TCVN 6474-2007 Eng

TCVN NATIONAL STANDARD
TCVN 6474-1: 2007 TCVN 6474-9: 2007

Second edition

RULES FOR CLASSIFICATION AND TECHNICAL
SUPERVISION OF FLOATING STORAGE UNITS

HA NOI -2007

BLANK PAGE
3

NATIONAL STANDARD TCVN 6474-1: 2007 TCVN 6474-9: 2007

Foreword
National standards from TCVN 6474-1:2007 to TCVN 6474-9:2007 replace to TCVN
6474:1999.
National standards from TCVN 6474-1:2007 to TCVN 6474-9:2007 are edited by
Vietnam Register and TCVN/TC8 ''Shipbuilding and Offshore'' Technical Standard
Board, is proposed by Ministry of Transportation and Standard - Measure - Quality
General Department, is promulgated by Ministry of Science and Technology.

4

BLANK PAGE

5
NATIONAL STANDARD TCVN 6474-1: 2007 TCVN 6474-9: 2007
CONTENTS
Foreword 3
PART 1: CLASSIFICATION 25
1 General requirements 25
1.1 Application 25
1.2 Reference documents 25
2 Definition and explaination 27
2.1 Floating storage units. 27
2.1.1 Purpose 27
2.1.2 Major Elements 27
2.2 Type of floating storage units 27
2.3 Coordinates and motion 28
2.4 Production Facilities 29
2.4.1 General 29
2.4.2 Production Support Systems 29
2.4.3 Hazardous Areas 29
2.4.4 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) 30
2.4.5 Safety Analysis Function Evaluation (S.A.F.E.) Charts 30
2.5 Position Mooring System 30
2.5.1 General 30
2.5.2 Spread Mooring 30
2.5.3 Single Point Mooring (SPM) 31

6
2.5.4 Dynamic Positioning and Thruster Assisted Systems 36
2.6 Subsea System 36
2.6.1 General 36
2.6.2 Floating Hose 36
2.6.3 On Bottom Flexible Flow Lines 36
2.6.4 Pipe Line End Manifold (PLEM) 36
2.6.5 Riser 36
2.6.6 Riser System 37
2.6.7 Riser Support 37
2.6.8 Submerged J umper Hoses 37
3 Classification 38
3.1 Class assignation 38
3.2 Class of floating storage units 38
3.2.1 Scope of classification for floating storage units 38
3.2.2 Basic characters of classification for floating storage units 38
3.2.3 Class notations of hull of floating storage units 38
3.2.4 Class notations of machinery of floating storage units 39
3.3 Subdivision notation and additional notations 39
3.3.1 Subdivision notation 39
3.3.2 Notation for in water survey of submerged part of hull of floating storage units 40
3.3.3 Notation for enhanced survey programme 40
3.3.4 Notation for function of floating storage units 40
3.3.5 Dynamic positioning system 40

7
3.3.6 Notations for location and operational condition 40
3.3.7 Example for charaters and notations of classification 41
3.4 Class maintenance 41
3.5 Suspension of Class 41
3.6 Lifting of Suspension 42
3.7 Withdrawal of class and chance character of classification 42
3.8 Reclassification 42
3.9 Requisition for a survey 43
3.9.1 Classification survey 43
3.9.2 Survey for class maintenance 43
3.10 Certificate of Classification 43
3.10.1 Issurance of Classification Certification 43
3.10.2 Endorsement of Classification Certificates 43
3.10.3 Issuance of Provisional Classification Certificates 43
3.10.4 Validity of Certificate of Classification and Provisional Certificate of Classification 43
3.10.5 Retention, Reissue, Rewriting and Return of Certificate of Classification 44
4 Technical documentation 46
4.1 Design documents for submission 46
4.1.1 Design documents for submission 46
4.1.2 Amendments to approved technical documentation 46
4.1.3 Submission of final design documentation 46
4.1.4 Requirements for the technical documentation for approval 46
4.1.5 Duration of validity of approved technical documentation 46

8
4.2 Documents issued by VR 47
4.2.1 Documents issued in compliance with the Rules 47
4.2.2 Seaworthiness certificate 47
5 Classification Surveys 49
5.1 Classification Surveys during Construction 49
5.1.1 General 49
5.2 Submission of Plans and Documents for Approval 49
5.2.1 Hull of floating storage units 49
5.2.2 Position Mooring System 52
5.2.3 Production Facilities and Production Support Facilities 52
5.2.4 Import/export system 54
5.2.5 Machinery installations and electrical installations 55
5.2.6 Manuals and Procedures 55
5.3 Presence of Surveyor 56
5.4 Hydrostatic and Watertight tests 57
5.5 Classification Survey of Unit not built under Survey 57
5.5.1 General 57
5.5.2 Tests 58
PART 2: ENVIRONMENTAL LOADING AND DESIGN BASIC 59
1 Environmental loading and design basis 59
1.1 Design Basis 59
1.2 Design Documentation 59
1.3 Design Conditions 60

9
1.3.1 Position Mooring System 60
1.3.2 Structural Strength and Fatigue Life 61
1.4 Environmental Conditions 63
1.4.1 General 63
1.4.2 Environmental Loads 64
1.4.3 Current 64
1.4.4 Wind 65
1.4.5 Waves 67
1.4.6 Directionality 69
1.4.7 Soil Conditions 69
PART 3 : TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 71
1 Technical requirements for floating storage units 71
1.1 All Vessels 71
1.1.1 General 71
1.1.2 Lightweight Data 72
1.1.3 Load Line 72
1.1.4 Operating Manual 72
1.1.5 Loading Manual (Operating Manual) 74
1.1.6 Trim and Stability Booklet (Operating Manual) 75
1.1.7 Engineering Analysis 75
1.1.8 Mooring Systems and Equipment 76
1.1.9 Material 76
1.1.10 Underwater marking 77

10
1.1.11 Corrosion Protection 77
1.2 Ship - Type Vesels 80
1.2.1 General 80
1.2.2 Definitions 81
1.2.3 Longitudinal Strength 81
1.2.4 Stability , Division and Loadline 81
1.2.5 Structural Arrangement 82
1.2.6 Structural Design of the Hull 82
1.2.7 Engineering Analyses of the Hull Structure 85
1.2.8 Analysis and Design of Other Major Hull Structural Features 90
1.2.9 Marine Piping Systems 94
1.2.10 Electrical Systems 94
1.2.11 Fire Fighting Systems and Equipment 97
1.2.12 Machinery 98
1.2.13 Equipment 98
1.2.14 Safety Equipment 98
1.3 Column-stabilized Vessels 98
1.3.1 General 98
1.3.3 Loading Criteria 99
1.3.4 Wave Clearance 99
1.3.5 Structural Design 99
1.3.6 Engineering Analysis of the Vessel's Primary Structure 101

11
1.3.7 Analysis and Design of Other Major Structures 103
1.3.8 Stability 104
1.3.9 Marine Piping Systems 105
1.3.11 Fire Fighting Systems and Equipment 105
1.3.12 Machinery and Equipment 105
1.3.13 Safety Equipment 106
1.4 Existing Tanker Hull Structures (Ordinary Conversions) 106
1.4.1 Introduction 106
1.4.2 General 106
1.4.3 Alternative Acceptance Criteria for the 'Basic Design' of the Hull Structure 107
1.4.4 Assessing the 'Basic Design' of the Hull Structure 115
1.4.5 Optional: "Time to Steel Renewal" Assessment 116
1.4.6 Survey Requirements for an "Ordinary Conversion" 116
1.5 Tension Leg Platforms 119
1.6 Spar Vessels 119
PART 4: POSITION MOORING SYSTEM 121
1. Mooring system 121
1.1. Definitions 121
1.1.1. Spread Mooring 121
1.1.2. Single Point Mooring (SPM) 122
1.2. System Conditions 122
1.2.1. Intact Design 122

12
1.2.2. Damaged Case with One Broken Mooring Line 123
1.2.3. Transient Condition with One Broken Mooring Line 123
1.3. Mooring Analysis 123
1.3.1. Mean Environmental Forces and Moments 124
1.3.2. Maximum Offset and Yaw Angle of the Vessel 125
1.3.3. Maximum Line Tension 126
1.3.4. Mooring Line Fatigue Analysis 127
1.4. Mooring Line Design 128
1.5. Hawser Loads 128
1.6. Dynamic Positioning Systems 129
1.7. Thruster Assisted Mooring Systems 129
1.8. Mooring Equipment 129
2. Anchor Holding Power 130
2.1. Drag Anchor 130
2.2. Conventional Pile 131
2.3. Vertically Loaded Drag Anchors (VLA) 131
2.4. Suction Piles 132
2.5. Factor of Safety 133
3. Field Test 133
4. Single Point Moorings - CALMs, SALMs, Turrets and Yokes 135
4.1. Design Loadings 135
4.2. Structural Components 135

13
4.3. Mechanical Components 135
4.4. Hazardous Areas and Electrical Installations 136
4.5. Fire Fighting Equipment 136
4.6. Product Piping Systems and Floating Hoses 136
4.7 Turret Mooring 136
4.8. Turret/Vessel Structural Interface Loads 138
5. Surveys During Construction 138
PART 5 : HYDROCARBON PRODUCTION AND PROCESS SYSTEMS 141
1. Hydrocarbon Production and Process Systems 141
1.1. General requirements 141
1.2. Application 141
1.3. Subsea Equipment 142
1.4. Use other standards 142
1.5. Non-standard Equipment 142
1.6. Design and Construction 142
1.6.1 General 142
1.6.2 Arrangements 143
1.6.3 Structural Considerations 143
1.7. Process System 143
1.7.1 Submittals 143
1.7.2 Piping System and Manifolds 144
1.7.3 Pressure Relief and Depressurization Systems 144
1.7.4 Process Equipment 144

14
1.7.5 Prime Movers 144
1.7.6 Safety Systems 144
1.7.7 Control System 145
1.7.8 Quick Disconnect System 145
1.7.9 Electrical Installations 146
1.8. Hazardous Area Classification 146
1.9. Fire protection 146
1.10. Fabrication and testing 146
1.10.1 Pressure Vessels, Accumulators, Heat Exchangers, Separators, and Manifolds 146
1.10.2 Pumps, Compressors and Diesel/Gas Engines 147
1.10.3 Motors and Generators 147
1.10.4 Switchboards and Control Panels 147
1.10.5 Process and Process Support Piping 147
PART 6 : IMPORT AND EXPORT SYSTEMS 149
1. Import and export systems 149
1.1. General 149
1.1.1 Riser Classification Boundaries 149
1.1.2 Basic Design Considerations 150
1.2. Submission of Plans and Design 150
1.3. Environmental conditions 151
1.4. System Design and Analysis 151
1.4.1 General requirements 151
1.4.2 Rigid Risers 151

15
1.4.3 Flexible Risers 153
1.4.4 Export Vessel Transfer System 154
1.4.5 System Components 154
1.4.6 Installation Analysis 154
1.5. Material 155
1.5.1 Material for Rigid Risers 155
1.5.2 Material for Flexible Risers 155
PART 7 INSTALLATION, HOOK-UP AND COMMISSIONING 157
1. Installation, Hook-up, and Commissioning 157
1.1. General requirements 157
1.1.1. General Description 157
1.1.2. Pre-installation Verification 157
1.1.3. Pile or Anchor and Mooring Line Installation 157
1.1.4. Tensioning and Proof Load Testing 158
1.1.5. Hook-up of the Anchor Chain System 159
1.1.6. Import/Export System Installation 159
1.1.6.1. Rigid and Flexible Risers 160
1.1.6.2. Export Vessel Transfer System 160
1.1.7. Disconnecting Procedure 161
1.2. Hook-Up Procedures Submittal 161
1.3. Start-Up and Commissioning Procedures Submittal 161
1.4. Surveys during Installation of the Mooring Systems 161

16
1.5. Surveys During Installation of the Import/Export System 162
1.6. Surveys during Hook-Up 163
1.7. Demonstration of the Disconnectable Mooring System 164
1.8. Surveys During Start-Up and Commissioning 164
PART 8: SURVEYS AFTER INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING 167
1 Class maintenance surveys 167
1.1 Periodical surveys 167
1.1.1 General 167
1.1.2 Modification of Requirements 168
1.1.4 Survey Reports File 169
1.1.5 Corrosion Prevention System - Ballast Tanks 170
1.2 Intervarls of periodical surveys 170
1.2.1 General 170
1.2.2 Annual surveys 170
1.2.3 Docking surveys 170
1.2.4 Underwater Inspection in Lieu of Drydocking Survey (UWILD) 170
1.2.5 Intermediate surveys 171
1.2.6 Special surveys 171
1.2.7 Boiler surveys 173
1.2.8 Propeller shaft and stern tube shaft surveys 173
1.3 Annual surveys 174
1.3.1 Requirements for Annual Surveys Hull 174

17
1.3.2 Annual survey for Machinery installations and Electrical Installations 179
1.4 Docking surveys 184
1.4.1 General 184
1.4.2 Requirements for Docking survey 185
1.5 Underwater Inspection in Lieu of Drydocking Survey 186
1.5.1 General 186
1.5.2 Parts to be Examined 187
1.6 Intermediate Surveys 189
1.6.1 General 189
1.6.2 Intermediate survey for hull 190
1.7 Special surveys 191
1.7.1 General 191
1.7.2 Special surveys for hull 191
1.7.3 Special surveys for Machinery Installations and Electrical Installations 197
1.8 Boiler and thermal oil heater surveys 204
1.8.1 General 204
1.9 Propeller shafts and stern tube shaft surveys 204
1.9.1 General 204
1.10 Automatic and Remote Control System Surveys 204
1.11 Annual Surveys for Inert Gas Systems 204
1.11.1 General 204
1.11.2 Alarm and Safety Device 205
1.12 Special Periodical Surveys for Inert Gas Systems 206

18
1.12.1 General 206
1.12.2 Separate Inert Gas Generator System 207
1.12.3 Gas Stored in Bottles System 207
1.13 Annual Surveys Production Facilities 207
1.14 Special Periodical Surveys - Production Facilities 207
1.15 Annual Surveys - Mooring Systems 208
1.15.1 Annual Surveys - Spread Mooring Systems 208
1.15.2 Annual Surveys - Single Point Mooring (SPM) Systems 208
1.16 Special Periodical Surveys - Mooring Systems 209
1.17 Annual Surveys - Import and Export Systems 210
1.18 Special Periodical Survey Import and Export Systems 211
PART 9: SPECIFIC REGULATIONS 213
1 APPENDIX I: THE CONCEPT AND APPLICATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL
SEVERITY FACTORS (ESFS) FOR SHIP-TYPE SITE-DEPENDENT DESIGNED
FLOATING OFFSHORE INSTALLATIONS 214
1.1 ESFs of the Beta Type 214
1.2 ESFs of the Alpha Type 216
2 APPENDIX II: THE MODIFICATION OF SHIP-TYPE FLOATING PRODUCTION
SYSTEM CRITERIA FOR SITE-SPECIFIC ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS 218
2.1 Deck Load 218
2.1.1 Loads for On-Site Operation 218
2.1.2 Load in Transit Condition 220
2.2 Sloshing Loads 220

19
2.3 Green Water 220
2.4 Bow Impact Pressure 221
2.5 Bottom Slamming Pressure 222
2.6 Local Structure of the Hull Supporting Deck Mounted Equipment 224
2.6.1 General 224
2.6.2 Load Pattern No. 1 224
2.6.3 Load Pattern No. 2 231
3 APPENDIX III: EXTENT OF STRUCTURES IS TO BE ANALYSED BY FINITE
ELEMENT MODELS (FEM) 232
3.1 Methods of Approach and Analysis Procedures 232
3.2 3D Finite Element Models 232
3.3 2D Finite Element Models 232
3.4 Local Structural Models 232
3.5 Load Cases 232
4 APPENDIX IV: LOAD CRITERIA 234
4.1 General 234
4.1.1 Load Components 234
4.2 Static Loads 234
4.2.1 Still-water Bending Moment 234
4.3 Wave-induced Loads 235
4.3.1 General 235
4.3.2 Horizontal Wave Bending Moment and Shear Force 235
4.3.3 External Pressures 237

20
4.4 Nominal Design Loads 243
4.4.1 Hull Girder Loads Longitudinal Bending Moments and Shear Forces 243
4.4.2 Local Loads for Design of Supporting Structures 244
4.4.3 Local Pressures for Design of Plating and Longitudinals 244
4.5 Combined Load Cases 245
4.5.1 Combined Load Cases for Structural Analysis 245
4.5.2 Combined Load Cases for Failure Assessment 245
4.6 Sloshing Loads 246
4.6.1 General 246
4.6.2 Strength Assessment of Tank Boundary Structures 246
4.6.3 Sloshing Pressures 247
4.7 Impact Loads 256
5 APPENDIX V: FATIGUE LIFE 257
5.1 Floating storage units with length more than 150 m 257
5.1.1 General 257
5.1.2 Procedures 257
5.1.3 Spectral Analysis 258
5.2 Floating storage units with length less than 150 m 259
6 APPENDIX VI: FAILURE CRITERIA YIELDING 260
6.1 Floating storage units with length more than 150 m 260
6.1.1 General 260
6.1.2 Structural Members and Elements 260
6.1.3 Plating 261

21
6.2 Floating storage units with length less than 150 m 262
7 APPENDIX VII: MACHINARY, PROCESS SYSTEM ON FLOATING STORAGE
UNIT 263
7.1 General 263
7.2 Definitions 263
7.3 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted 265
7.3.1 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted 265
7.3.2 Details 267
7.3.3 Hydrocarbon Production and Process Systems 267
7.3.4 Process Support Systems 269
7.3.5 Marine Support Systems 270
7.3.7 Instrumentation and Control Systems 273
7.3.8 Fire Protection and Personnel Safety 274
7.3.9 Arrangements for Storage Tank Venting and Inerting 275
7.3.10 Arrangements for Use of Produced Gas as Fuel 275
7.3.11 Start-up and Commissioning Manual 275
7.4 Hydrocarbon Production and Process Systems 276
7.4.1 General 276
7.4.2 Process Design 276
7.4.3 Facility Layout 277
7.4.4 Piping and Instrumentation Design 280
7.4.5 Emergency Shutdown (ESD) Stations 282

22
7.4.6 Pressure Relieving and Hydrocarbon Disposal Systems 282
7.4.7 Spill Containment, Open and Closed Drain Systems 286
7.4.8 Protection from Ignition by Static Charge 288
7.4.9 Major Equipment Requirements 288
7.4.10 Process Piping Systems 293
7.4.11 Packaged Process Units 294
7.5 Process Support Systems 295
7.5.1 General 295
7.5.2 Component Requirements 295
7.5.3 System Requirements 297
7.6 Electrical Systems 302
7.6.1 Applicability 302
7.6.2 Design Considerations 302
7.6.3 Rotating Electrical Machinery 306
7.6.4 Transformers 306
7.6.5 Switchgear 307
7.6.6 Wire and Cable Construction 312
7.6.7 Hazardous Areas 313
7.6.8 Ventilation 315
7.6.9 Cable Support and Installation 316
7.6.10 Power Source Requirements 316
7.6.11 Emergency Source of Power 318
7.6.12 Battery Systems 318

23
7.6.13 Short Circuit Current Calculations and Coordination Study 318
7.6.14 Protection from Ignition by Static Charges 319
7.7 Instrumentation & Control Systems 319
7.7.1 Applicability 319
7.7.2 Components 320
7.7.3 Instruments 321
7.7.4 Alarm Systems 321
7.7.5 Control and Monitoring 323
7.7.6 Safety Systems 324
7.7.7 Shutdown Systems 326
7.7.8 relief valves 326
7.7.9 Shutdown valves, blowdown valves, diverter valves 327
7.8 Fire Protection and Personnel Safety 327
7.8.1 Scope 327
7.8.2 Fire Fighting Systems 327
7.8.3 Fire and Gas Detection and Alarm Systems 343
7.8.4 Structural Fire Protection 344
7.8.5 Muster Areas 348
7.8.6 Means of Escape 349
7.8.7 Lifesaving Requirements 349
7.8.8 Personnel Safety Equipment and Safety Measures 350
7.9 Survey During Construction and Commissioning 351
7.9.1 Construction Surveys 351

24
7.9.2 Commissioning and Start-up Surveys 352
7.9.3 Start-up and Commissioning Manual 353
7.10 Survey for Maintenance of Class 360
7.10.1 Annual Survey 360
7.10.2 Special Survey 361
8 APPENDIX VIII: UNDERWATER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 363
8.1 Introduction 363
8.2 Conditions 363
8.2.1 Limitations 363
8.2.2 Thickness Gauging and Nondestructive Testing 363
8.2.3 Tailshaft Surveys 363
8.2.4 Plans and Data 363
8.2.5 Underwater Conditions 364
8.3 Physical Features 364
8.3.1 Stern Bearing 364
8.3.2 Rudder bearings 365
8.3.3 Sea Suctions 365
8.3.4 Sea Valves 365
8.4 Procedures 365
8.4.1 Exposed Areas 365
8.4.2 Underwater Areas 365
8.4.3 Damage Areas 365
TCVN 6474-1:2007
25
NATIONAL STANDARD TCVN 6474-1:2007
Second Edition

RULES FOR CLASSIFICATION AND TECHNICAL SUPERVISION OF
FLOATING STORAGE UNITS
PART 1: CLASSIFICATION

1 General requirements
1.1 Application
1.1.1 National standard Rules for classification and technical supervision of floating
storage units are applicable for all self-propelled and non-propelled floating storage
units operating in Vietnamese seas
1.1.2 This standard assigns the requirements on the classifications and constructions of
floating storage units.
1.1.3 The technical Supervision and Classification for any types of floating storage units
are to be carried out by Vietnam Register (hereinafter referred to as VR).
1.1.4 The floating storage units are to met the requirements specified in this standards and
other appropriate requirements specified in relevant regulations and reference
standards.
1.1.5 Requirements of other equivalent Rules or technical Standards may be used, if agreed
by VR
1.1.6 This standard is applied to both new building, alteration, repair of units and in
operation.
1.1.7 Units are designed or built under regulations, which is different from these
regulations, will be considered for classification by VR if safety levels are
equivalent. In this case, VR should be informed from initial design stage for accept
the basis of design.
1.2 Reference documents
1.2.1 Vietnamese standards from TCVN 6259-1: 2003 to TCVN 6259-11: 2003 Rules
TCVN 6474-1:2007
26
for classification and construction of sea going ships and enclosed amendments.
1.2.2 Vietnamese standards from TCVN 5309:2001 to TCVN 5319: 2001 Mobile
offshore units - Rules for classification and construction.
1.2.3 TCVN 6968: 2005 Rules for offshore lifting apppliance
1.2.4 TCVN 6809: 2001- Rules for classification and construction of single point moorings

TCVN 6474-1:2007
27
2 Definition and explaination
2.1 Floating storage units
2.1.1 Purpose
2.1.1.1 A Floating storage unit provides hydrocarbon processing and/or hydrocarbon
storage and offloads hydrocarbons. A Floating storage unit configuration may be
ship-type, semi-submersible type and other types, which is depended on its
functions as specified in 2.1.1.2.
2.1.1.2 The notations FPSO, FPS, FSO were chosen to provide a clear description of the
function of each configuration.
FPSO Floating Production, Storage and Offloading System An FPSO processes, stores
and offloads hydrocarbons.
FPS Floating Production (and Offloading) System, An FPS processes and offloads
hydrocarbons without storage capacity.
FSO Floating Storage and Offloading System, An FSO stores and offloads
hydrocarbons without hydrocarbon processing facilities.
2.1.2 Major Elements
2.1.2.1 A Floating storage unit consists of several of the following major elements:
(1) Vessel
(2) Position mooring (or station keeping system)
(3) Production processing facilities
(4) Import/export system
2.1.2.2 Classification boundaries encompass the vessel and position mooring system and
may include the production facilities. Import/export systems may be classed, as
well.
2.2 Type of floating storage units
2.2.1 Floating storage unit refers to a floating structure and the machinery, equipment and
systems necessary for safety, propulsion (if fitted) and auxiliary services. The
structural configurations of these units may be ship-shaped (with or without
propulsion), column stabilized or any other configuration of a purpose-built floating
vessel.
TCVN 6474-1:2007
28
2.2.2 Ship-type floating storage units are displacement hulls, either ship-shaped or barge-
shaped, which have been designed or converted to a floating production and/or
storage system. They may have propulsion machinery and/or station keeping
systems.
2.2.3 Column-stabilized Floating storage units consist of surface piercing columns,
submerged pontoons and a deck supported at column tops.
2.2.4 Other Types: Purpose-built and new configurations, such as tension leg platforms
and spar buoys, belong to this category.
2.3 Coordinates and motion
2.3.1 The coordinates of floating storage units are given in figure 1-1 below.
2.3.2 The oscillated motion of floating storage units consists three straight oscillations and
three rotating oscillations, which are called in accordance with relevant axis and
illustrated in figure 1-1.
2.3.3 Three straight oscillation consists:
Straight oscillation in X-axis Surge
Straight oscillation in Y-axis Sway
Straight oscillation in Z-axis Heave
2.3.4 Three rotating oscillation consists:
Rotating oscillation in X-axis Roll
Rotating oscillation in Y-axis Pitch
Rotating oscillation in Z-axis - Yaw
TCVN 6474-1:2007
29

Figure 1-1: The oscillations of floating storage unit
2.4 Production Facilities
2.4.1 General
2.4.1.1 The production facilities typically consist of the processing, safety and control
systems, production support systems and auxiliary equipment for processing
hydrocarbon liquid and gas mixtures from wells or other sources. Generally, a
production facility includes all elements located onboard the Floating Installation
vessel. These elements are located from (and including) the Christmas tree or the
first inlet flange of the well fluid flow line inboard to (and including) the last
onboard flange. Some important items related to production facilities are defined in
the following paragraphs.
2.4.2 Production Support Systems
2.4.2.1 The production support systems include power generation and distribution,
instrument and service air, potable water, fuel oil systems, HVAC, instrumentation,
communication systems and firewater systems required to support hydrocarbon
production and processing.
2.4.3 Hazardous Areas
2.4.3.1 A classified area is an area in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be
present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures.
2.4.3.2 An area classification plan is a set of drawings indicating extent, boundaries and
classification of all classified areas.
x
y
z
TCVN 6474-1:2007
30
2.4.3.3 Hazardous areas are divided into three zones: zone 0, zone 1 and zone 2, which are
defined as follows:
(1) Zone 0: in which an explosive gas/air mixture is continuously present or present for
long periods.
(2) Zone 1: in which an explosive gas/air mixture is likely to occur in normal operation.
(3) Zone 2: in which an explosive gas/air mixture is not likely to occur, or in which such
a mixture, if it does occur, will only exist for a short time.
2.4.4 Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
2.4.4.1 P&IDs show the size, design and operating conditions of each major process
component, piping and valve designation and size, sensing and control
instrumentation, shutdown and pressure relief devices with set points, signal
circuits, set points for controllers, continuity of all line pipes and boundaries of skid
units and process packages
2.4.5 Safety Analysis Function Evaluation (S.A.F.E.) Charts
2.4.5.1 The S.A.F.E. charts list all process components and emergency support systems
with their required sensing devices and the functions to be performed by each
device and relate all sensing devices, shutdown valves, shutdown devices and
emergency support systems to their functions.
2.5 Position Mooring System
2.5.1 General
2.5.1.1 A Position Mooring System keeps the vessel on station. The Position Mooring
System includes mooring lines, connectors and hardware, winches, piles, anchors
and thrusters. For a single point mooring system, the turret, turntable, disconnecting
system, buoy, anchoring legs, etc., are also part of the system.
2.5.2 Spread Mooring
2.5.2.1 A spread mooring is a system with multiple catenary mooring lines anchored to
piles or drag anchors at the sea bed. The other end of each line is individually
attached to winches or stoppers on the vessel through fairleads as necessary. A
catenary mooring line may have one or more line segments, in-line buoy(s) (spring
buoy) or sinker(s) (clumped weight) along the line.
TCVN 6474-1:2007
31
2.5.3 Single Point Mooring (SPM)
A single point mooring allows the vessel to weathervane. Three typical types of single point
mooring systems that are commonly used are described below:
2.5.3.1 CALM (Catenary Anchor Leg Mooring): A catenary anchor leg mooring system
consists of a large buoy anchored by catenary mooring lines. The vessel is moored
to the buoy by soft hawser(s) or a rigid yoke structure.
2.5.3.2 SALM (Single Anchor Leg Mooring): A single anchor leg mooring system consists
of an anchoring structure with built-in buoyancy at or near the water surface and is
itself anchored to the seabed by an articulated connection.
2.5.3.3 Turret Mooring: A turret mooring system consists of a number of mooring legs
attached to a turret that is designed to act as part of the vessel, allowing only
angular relative movement of the vessel to the turret, so that the vessel may
weathervane. The turret may be mounted internally within the vessel or externally
from the vessel bow or stern. Typically, a spread mooring arrangement connects the
turret to the seabed.
2.5.3.4 Yoke Arm A yoke arm is a structure at the end of the vessel that only allows
angular relative movement between the vessel and the mooring attachment to the
seabed.
2.5.3.5 The above mentioned types of single mooring system are illutrated in figures
below:
TCVN 6474-1:2007
32

Figure 1-2 : Spread mooring

Figure 1-3: External turret mooring
TCVN 6474-1:2007
33

Figure 1-4: Internal turret mooring

Figure 1-5: CALM with rigid york structure
TCVN 6474-1:2007
34

Figure 1-6: CALM Soft hawser

Figure 1-7: SALM with an articulated connection

TCVN 6474-1:2007
35

Figure 1-8: SALM with vertical hawser and connection rope
TCVN 6474-1:2007
36
2.5.4 Dynamic Positioning and Thruster Assisted Systems
2.5.4.1 A dynamic positioning system is defined as all of the equipment necessary to
provide a means of controlling the position and heading of a Floating Installation
within predetermined limits by means of vectored thrust.
2.5.4.2 A thruster-assisted system provides controlled thrust to assist the main (usually
static) mooring system and reduce component loading of the main mooring system
2.6 Subsea System
2.6.1 General
2.6.1.1 A subsea system is a flexible/articulated piping system providing a conduit for the
hydrocarbons from the subsea pipeline to the surface components. It includes
subsea pipelines, subsea well system and risers.
2.6.2 Floating Hose
2.6.2.1 A floating hose is a floating conduit used to export hydrocarbons from a point of
storage/production, either an SPM or vessel's manifold to a receiving vessel's
manifold for transport.
2.6.3 On Bottom Flexible Flow Lines
2.6.3.1 These lines are conduit used to connect one subsea location to another subsea
location prior to a vertical conveyance by the riser system to the surface.
2.6.4 Pipe Line End Manifold (PLEM)
A PLEM is the assemblage of valves and components or equipment performing the
equivalent function connecting the production facilities to the pipeline carrying product to
or from the shore, an offloading system or to another facility.
2.6.4.1 Import PLEM: Import PLEM is the equipment connecting to the Import Riser and
the import supply line or wellhead.
2.6.4.2 Export PLEM: Export PLEM is the equipment connection between the Export Riser
and the product discharge line
2.6.5 Riser
TCVN 6474-1:2007
37
A riser is a subsea rigid or flexible pipe that connects the surface facilities with the sea floor
and thus the conduit for fulfilling the desired function of conveying fluids, gas, electrical
power, etc.
2.6.6 Riser System
The riser system includes the entire assemblage of components, control systems, safety
systems and tensioning devices that ensure the integrity of the riser throughout its operation.
2.6.7 Riser Support
Riser support comprises any structural attachments, including buoyancy devices that are
used to give structural integrity to the riser or transfer load to the supporting structure.
2.6.8 Submerged J umper Hoses
J umper hoses are flexible lines used in conjunction with rigid risers to accommodate the
relative motion between the Floating Installation and the submerged top of the riser. J umper
hoses may also be used to connect the subsea manifold to the wellhead.

TCVN 6474-1:2007
38
3 Classification
3.1 Class assignation
3.1.1 Units will be assigned a class and registered in VR Offshore Register book by VR
when it is designed, constructed and surveyed in compliance with requirements of
these regulations.
3.2 Class of floating storage units
3.2.1 Scope of classification for floating storage units
3.2.1.1 Scope of classification for floating storage units consists three main items: hull of
floating storage units, position mooring systems and production facilities.
3.2.1.2 Other items such as import/export system may be classed if requested by floating
storage units owner.
3.2.2 Basic characters of classification for floating storage units
The floating storage unit classed by VR will be assigned a class with following characters
when it was found satisfactory with the requirements specified in this standards:
VR or VR or ()VR
VR : Symbol of VR showing the supervision of units in compliance with the
requirements of this standard.
* : Construction carried out under supervision of VR
* : Construction carried out under supervision of a Classification Society authorized
or/and recognized by VR
(*) : Construction without supervision of VR or under supervision of a Classification
Society.
These characters also use when classification service was carried out by VR for specific
items or parts of floating storage unit as requested by owner.
3.2.3 Class notations of hull of floating storage units
Characters of the classification and notations of the hull are as follows:
* VRH : Hull design has been approved by VR in compliance with the Rules and hull
has been constructed under supervision of VR in compliance with the approved plans
and drawings.
TCVN 6474-1:2007
39
* VRH : Hull design has been approved by a Classification Society recognized or/and
authorized by VR and hull has been constructed under supervision of that Society and
then surveyed by VR in compliance with the Rules.
(*) VRH : Hull design has not been approved by any Classification Society (or has
been approved by an unrecognized Classification Society) and hull has been
constructed without supervision of any classification (or under supervision of an
unrecognized Classification Society) and then surveyed by VR in compliance with the
Rules.
3.2.4 Class notations of machinery of floating storage units
Due to almost existing and new building floating storage units are non-propelled and
machinary systems in floating storage unit consist electrical generators and other machinary
in machinary room, following characters of classification is assigned by VR to machinary
system of floating storage units. The mentioned machinary system here is meant electrical
generator and other machirary in machinary room:
* VRM: Machinery installations design has been approved by VR in compliance with
the Rules and machinery installations have been constructed under supervision of VR
in compliance with the approved plans and drawings.
* VRM : Machinery installations design has been approved by a Classification Society
recognized or/and authorized by VR and machinery installations have been constructed
under supervision of that Society and then surveyed by VR in compliance with the
Rules.
* VRM : Machinery installations design has not been approved by any Classification
Society (or has been approved by an unrecognized Classification Society) and
machinery installations have been constructed without supervision of any
Classification Society (or under supervision of an unrecognized Classification Society)
and then surveyed by VR in compliance with the Rules.
3.3 Subdivision notation and additional notations
3.3.1 Subdivision notation
A Floating storage unit which complies with the applicable requirements of Part 9 "
Subdivision" TCVN 6259-9: 2003, one of the Subdivision distinguishing notations is added
to the characters of classification as , , . These figures denote the condition that the
3 2 1
TCVN 6474-1:2007
40
unit still remains afloat in a satisfactory state of equilibrium in compliance with the
requirements of Chapter 3, Part 9 TCVN 6259-9: 2003 if any one compartment or any two
or three adjacent compartments of her is/are flooded.
3.3.2 Notation for in water survey of submerged part of hull of floating storage units.
If requested by units owner and the floating storage unit was found satisfactory with VRs
requirement for in-water survey of submerged part of hull (see clause 1.2.4 TCVN 6474-8),
the floating storage unit shall be assigned following additional notation: IWS (in water
survey)
3.3.3 Notation for enhanced survey programme
For floating storage units, which are to be applied the enhanced survey programme (see
clause 1.7.2 TCVN 6474-8) in surveys for class maintenance in appropriate requirements
specified in part 1B TCVN 6259-1: 2003, the class character of floating storage unit will be
added following notation: ESP (Enhanced Survey Programme).
3.3.4 Notation for function of floating storage units
3.3.4.1 The charaters of classification of floating storage units will be added following
notations depended on functions of the units:
FPSO Floating, production, storage and offloading systems
FPS - Floating, production and offloading systems
FSO - Floating, storage and offloading systems
3.3.4.2 If the floating storage unit has a function differed with functions mentioned in
3.3.4.1, the additional notation for function of floating storage unit will be
considered by VR for each case.
3.3.5 Dynamic positioning system
3.3.5.1 If dynamic positioning systems were installed for station keeping purposes in
floating storage unit , the charaters of classification of floating storage units will be
added a notation DPS.
3.3.6 Notations for location and operational condition
TCVN 6474-1:2007
41
If the unit is operated in a particular location and when maximum loads incluced by wave,
wind, ice and current in that location have been considered then the location, loads and ice
reinforcement shall be stated in classification certificate .
3.3.7 Example for charaters and notations of classification
* VRH, *VRM FSO IWS BACH HO FIELD Class notation of floating unit, storage,
offloading, unit has been constructed under supervision of VR, unit has notation for in-
water survey of submerged part of hull, the unit is operated in Bach Ho field.
* VRH, *VRM FPSO EPS DPS DRAGON FIELD Class notation of floating unit,
storage, production, offloading, Construction carried out under supervision of a
Classification Society authorized or/and recognized by VR, unit has notation for Enhanced
Survey Programme, unit has notation for dynamic positioning system, the unit is operated in
Dragon field.
3.4 Class maintenance
3.4.1 The units which have been classed with VR will maintain the assigned class and
character until, as a result of surveys inspections or test which have been carried out,
the units are found to be in fully compliance with the relevant requirements of this
standard.
3.4.2 Any damage or defect which may affect the class assigned is to be reported to VR
without delay and an application for surveys is to be submitted by Owner/operator or
their representative .
3.5 Suspension of Class
3.5.1.1 The class assigned to a unit by VR will be suspended under any one of the
following conditions:
(1) Class is suspended for any use, operation, loading condition or other application of
any vessel for which it has not been approved by VR and that affects or may affect
classification or the structural integrity, quality or fitness for a particular use or
service.
(2) If the periodical surveys required for maintenance of class are not performed by the
due date and no Rule-allowed extension has been granted by VR, class will be
suspended
TCVN 6474-1:2007
42
(3) If recommendations issued by the VR are not performed within their due dates, class
will be suspended.
(4) When the Owner fails to repair such damages and defects that affect the class of the
unit in accordance with VR requirements;
(5) Class will be suspended for any damage, failure, deterioration or repair that has not
been completed as recommended by VR
3.5.1.2 If proposed repairs have not been submitted to VR and agreed upon prior to
commencement, class may be suspended
3.6 Lifting of Suspension
3.6.1 Class will be reinstated after suspension for
(1) overdue surveys upon satisfactory completion of the overdue surveys.
(2) overdue recommendations upon satisfactory completion of the overdue
recommendation.
(3) overdue continuous survey items upon satisfactory completion of the overdue items.
3.7 Withdrawal of class and chance character of classification
3.7.1 The class assigned to a unit by VR will be withdrawal under any one of the following
conditions:
(1) If the circumstances leading to suspension of class are not corrected within the time
specified, the unit's class will be withdrawal;
(2) VR recognized that the unit can no longer be used ;
(3) When requested by the Owner of the unit;
(4) Survey fees are not paid by the owner .
3.7.2 VR will change or wihdraw class notation stated in Classification certificate if there
is change or violation of principle conditions which are basis for classification of
unit.
3.8 Reclassification
3.8.1 When reclassification or class reinstatement is desired for a unit for which the class
previously was assigned by VR and has been withdrawn, a special survey for
reclassification, appropriate to the age and technical conditions of the unit, will be
carried out by VR.
TCVN 6474-1:2007
43
3.8.2 If, at such survey, the unit is found that its conditions are fully compliance with the
regulations, VR may reinstate its original class or assign such other class as may be
deemed necessary .
3.9 Requisition for a survey
3.9.1 Classification survey
The classification survey and registration will be carried out by VR when received a
requisition by units owner or shipyard.
3.9.2 Survey for class maintenance
The periodical survey for class maintenance will be carried out when received a requisition
for a survey by units owner, barge captain or owners representative.
3.10 Certificate of Classification
3.10.1 Issurance of Classification Certification
Upon the completion of the construction survey, classification survey for first entry of
reclassification survey of a unit, if it is found that the unit complies fully with this standard,
a classification certificate will be issued to the floating storage unit by VR.
3.10.2 Endorsement of Classification Certificates
The Classification Certificate for Units issued by VR will continue to be valid, provided that
the units are subjected to the annual surveys for maintenance of class as prescribed of the
Regulations and results of the surveys are found satisfactory to the requirements of the
Regulations
3.10.3 Issuance of Provisional Classification Certificates
Pending the issuance of the Classification Certificate, where a result of surveys is found that
the unit is in a fit an efficient condition and in compliance with the regulations, VR may
issue a corresponding Provisional Classification Certificates to enable the unit to be put into
service in the shortest possible period of time .
3.10.4 Validity of Certificate of Classification and Provisional Certificate of Classification
3.10.4.1 A Certificate of Classification shall be valid for a period not exceeding five years.
The validity of the Certificate of Classification may be extended for five months
from the date of completion of the Special Survey when a registered unit has been
TCVN 6474-1:2007
44
subjected to a Special Survey in accordance with the Rules to the satisfaction of the
Surveyor.
3.10.4.2 A Certificate of Classification, the validity of which has been extended as described
in 3.10.4.1 above, is to become invalid upon issue of the new Certificate of
Classification.
3.10.4.3 A Provisional Certificate of Classification is valid for five months from the date of
issue of the Provisional Certificate of Classification. The Provisional Certificate of
Classification is to become invalid upon issue of the Certificate of Classification.
3.10.4.4 The full term classification certificate and provisional classification certificate is
invalid when the class has been withdrawn as specified in clause 3.7.
3.10.4.5 The certificate of classification of the unit is invalid if not satisfied the requirements
in 3.10.2.
3.10.5 Retention, Reissue, Rewriting and Return of Certificate of Classification
3.10.5.1 The master of a unit is to keep a Certificate of Classification or a Provisional
Certificate of Classification on board the ship and present the same to VR upon
request.
3.10.5.2 The owner or master of a ship is to request VR without delay to reissue a Certificate
of Classification or a Provisional Certificate of Classification when the same is lost
or soiled.
3.10.5.3 The owner or master of a unit is to request VR without delay to rewrite a Certificate
of Classification or a Provisional Certificate of Classification when the particulars
described in the same are changed.
3.10.5.4 The owner or master of a unit is to return a Provisional Certificate of Classification
when the Certificate of classification has been issued under the provisions of 3.10.1
or five months have passed from the date of issue of a Provisional Certificate of
Classification and is to return the old Certificate if the Certificate has been issued
under the provisions of 3.10.1 above to the VR immediately except the case the
Certificate was lost.
3.10.5.5 The owner or master of a unit is to return a Certificate of Classification or a
Provisional Certificate of Classification to VR immediately when the class is
withdrawn under 3.7.
3.10.5.6 The owner or master of a unit is to, when a lost Certificate of Classification or a lost
TCVN 6474-1:2007
45
Provisional Certificate of Classification is found after reissuing the same under
3.10.5.2 above, return the Certificate found to VR immediately.

TCVN 6474-1:2007
46
4 Technical documentation
4.1 Design documents for submission
4.1.1 Design documents for submission
4.1.1.1 Prior to the commencement of the work on the new construction, modification of
units or manufacture of materials and article liable to supervision by VR, the
technical design documentation within a scope determined in the relevant parts of
the Rules shall be submitted to VR for review and approval. If necessary, VR's may
require the documents to be submitted on a wider scope.
4.1.1.2 The scope of technical documentation for units or products of special design,
submitted for review and approval by VR is established in every particular case
upon agreement with VR.
4.1.2 Amendments to approved technical documentation
The unit designer, who intends amendments to the technical documentation approved by
VR shall submit the amendment documentation to VR enclosed with the unitowner's
acceptance for VR review and approval before work commencement.
4.1.3 Submission of final design documentation
The final design documentation shall be submitted to VR for approval before VR issues a
Classification Certificate to the unit.
4.1.4 Requirements for the technical documentation for approval
4.1.4.1 There must be enough data in the technical documentation submitted to prove that
the requirements of the Rules have been fully satisfied.
4.1.4.2 Calculations for determining the parameters or data by a standard are to comply
with the requirements of this standard, or by a method approved by VR.The
calculation method used must ensure accuracy.
4.1.4.3 Approval of the technical documentation relating to the requirements of the Rules is
confirmed by putting corresponding stamps of VR on it.
4.1.5 Duration of validity of approved technical documentation
4.1.5.1 Duration of validity of technical documentation approved by VR is as follows:
TCVN 6474-1:2007
47
The technical documentation of a unit for new construction approved by VR remains
valid for a period of 5 years from the date of stamping.
Interval between the date of approval of the documentation and the commencement
of the work on the construction a unit does not exceeds two and a half years
By the expiry of above term, the designer is required to submit the design documentation
again for approval. The scope of added documentation is to be accepted by VR.
4.1.5.2 In addition to requirements specified in 4.1.5.1 above, the technical documentation
approved by VR shall be submitted to alterations necessitated by the provisions of
amendments to the International Conventions and International Codes to which the
country whose flag a unit flies is a party.
4.1.5.3 In addition, all the documents and plans approved by VR shall be altered to comply
with the instructions circulated by VR which provides for their unconditional
fulfillment in units under construction, reconstruction or conversion.
4.2 Documents issued by VR
4.2.1 Documents issued in compliance with the Rules
4.2.1.1 The units classed with VR shall get the certificates specified in 3.10 of this part if
they have been surveyed and certified by VR Surveyors in compliance with the
requirements of the Rules.
4.2.1.2 Besides the certificates referred in 4.2.1.1 above, VR shall issue survey reports and
other technical documents in compliance with the contents and survey results
carried out by Surveyor.
4.2.2 Seaworthiness certificate
4.2.2.1 The following Vietnamese flagged units shall obtain the Seaworthiness certificate if
they have been surveyed and certified by VR in compliance with the requirements
of these Rules and other applicable Rules as well as the requirements of the
International Conventions applicable for the units:
(1) Units classed with VR
(2) Units dually classed with VR and another Classification Society
(3) Units having double classes of which one is VR's class
4.2.2.2 The validity of the Seaworthiness certificate shall not exceed the validity of the
TCVN 6474-1:2007
48
classification certificate and the certificates issued in accordance with the
requirements of the national Regulations and/or the certificates issued in
compliance with the requirements of the International Conventions (if applicable),
the next periodical surveys and/or the period which the VR set out for the unitowner
to clear the recommendations, whichever is shortest.

TCVN 6474-1:2007
49
5 Classification Surveys
5.1 Classification Surveys during Construction
5.1.1 General
In the Classification survey during construction, surveys are to be carried out on hull
construction, equipment, machinery, construction of fire protection, means of escape, fire
extinguishing arrangements, electrical installation, stability and load line and positioning
systems in order to ascertain that they meet the relevant requirements of VR.
5.2 Submission of Plans and Documents for Approval
In the Classification Survey during construction, plans and documents as listed below are to
be submitted for the approval by VR before the work is commenced, if applicable:
5.2.1 Hull of floating storage units
5.2.1.1 Ship-type units
(1) General arrangement;
(2) Transverse sections showing scantlings;
(3) Longitudinal sections showing scantlings;
(4) Shell expansion ;
(5) Construction profile;
(6) Cross curves of stability
(7) Curves of righting moment and wind heeling moment
(8) Capacity plans and sounding tables of tanks
(9) Summary of distributions of fixed and variable weights for each reviewed condition;
(10) Type, location and quantities of permanent ballast;
(11) Plans indicating arrangement of watertight compartments, openings, their closing,
their closing applicances, etc. necessary for calculation of stability;
(12) Diagrams showing the extent to which the watertight and weathertight integrity is
intended to be maintained;
(13 ) Construction of frames, pillars and longitudinal girders under deck;
(14) Construction of single bottoms and double bottoms and deck construction including
details of helicopter deck, openings such as hatchways, wells, etc.;
(15) Construction of watertight and oiltight bulkhead and deep tanks indicating the
TCVN 6474-1:2007
50
heights of the highest parts of tank and the tops of overflow pipes;
(16) Tank bulkheads and flats with level of top of overflows and air pipes;
(17) Construction of stem, sternframe, propeller post and rudder;
(18) Construction of superstructures end deckhouses including their end bulkhead;
(19) Arrangements to resist painting of both peaks and their vicinity;
(20) Seatings of engines, boilers, thrust, blocks, plummer blocks, dynamos and other
essentially important auxiliary machineries;
(21) Foundations for anchoring equipment, industrial equipment, etc., where attached to
hull structure, superstructures or deckhouses;
(22) Turret mooring and yoke connection including mechanical details;
(23) Corrosion control arrangements;
(24) Methods and locations for nondestructive testing and procedures for thickness
measurements;
(25) Construction of machinery rooms, pump rooms and motor rooms including their
casings and shaft tunnels ;
(26) Masts, mast houses;
(27) Pumping arrangements;
(28) Arrangements and construction of watertight doors, hatchways, side scuttles and
closing appliances of openings ;
(29) Construction for fire protection with materials used in the construction of
superstructures, bulkheads, decks, deckhouses, trunks, stairways, deck coverings,
etc. and arrangements of closing appliances of openings and means of escape;
(30) Fire extinguishing arrangements;
(31) Details of inspection facilities;
(32) Details of welding procedures;
(33) Details of painting and corrosion control procedures;
(34) Details of maintenance and inspection procedures;
(35) Stability information booklet;
(36) Loading manual, where the loading manual is to be provided in accordance with the
requirement of 1.1.4 part 3;
(37) Temporary mooring arrangements, towing arrangements and arrangements of
positionings systems for a long period of time;
TCVN 6474-1:2007
51
(38) Arrangements and construction of positioning systems;
(39) Plan indicating design loadings for all decks;
(40) Details of docking plan and in-water inspection procedures;
5.2.1.2 For column stabilized type units
In addition to the relevant plans or documents specified in 5.2.1.1, Plans and documents for
construction of all columns, lower hull, upper hull, bracings, footings and below documents
are to be submitted for the approval by VR:
The following information is to be submitted and appropriate relevant information is to be
provided in the Operating Manual:
(1) Inspection plans for all compartments below the maximum immersion line;
(2) Closure means for external openings whose lower edges are below the levels to
whichweathertight integrity is to be ensured;
(3) A plan identifying the disposition (open or closed) of all non-automatic closing
devices and locations of all watertight and weathertight closures for each mode of
operation afloat is to be submitted for review prior to the vessels delivery. Upon
satisfactory review, the plan is to beincorporated into the Operating Manual;
(4) Means for detection of and recovery from flooding of compartments that lie partly or
completely below the operating or survival drafts and are adjacent to the sea or
contain salt water piping or pumping equipment;
(5) The estimated time to deballast the vessel from operating to survival draft;
(6) Means of preventing progressive flooding via sounding tubes, tank vents and
overflows, ventilating systems, trunks, etc., from compartments within the assumed
damaged areas;
(7) Means of detecting flooding of and means of water removal from void spaces not
connected to the bilge or ballast systems;
(8) Means of closure and evacuation of water from chain lockers;

(9) The remaining or residual range of stability resulting from the damaged condition
and the type and location of appropriate closures to prevent downflooding;
(10) Means of sounding tanks;
(11) A description of the ballast piping and control system describing the items listed :
TCVN 6474-1:2007
52
(a) Redundancy of pumps, valves and controls and alternate means of valve operation.
(b) Valve operating and indicating means.
(c) Means of manual and remote operation of ballast pumps and valves.
(d) Communication means between ballast control spaces and pump rooms, including
those means of communication that are independent of the ships service
communication system.
(e) Means of determining the failure of critical ballast system components and means to
overcome their failure.
5.2.2 Position Mooring System
5.2.2.1 Mooring Arrangement or Pattern;
5.2.2.2 Details of winching equipment;
5.2.2.3 Details of anchoring system;
5.2.2.4 Details of mooring line segments;
5.2.2.5 Connections at anchors and between mooring line segments;
5.2.2.6 Details of in-line (spring) buoys;
5.2.2.7 Details of buoy for CALM system (see definition in 2.5) ;
5.2.2.8 Details of SALM structures, if appropriate (see definition in 2.5) ;
5.2.2.9 Details of Turret System to show turret structure, swivel, turntable and
disconnecting device ;
5.2.2.10 Details of yoke (hard or soft) connecting the vessel and CALM/SALM structure(see
definition in 2.5) ;
5.2.2.11 Environmental Report;
5.2.2.12 Mooring Analysis describing method of load calculations and analysis of dynamic
system todetermine the mooring line design loads ;
5.2.2.13 Model Test report when the design loads are based on model tests in a wave basin
(applicable only for first unit in new building series);
5.2.2.14 Thruster specifications and calculations of a system with dynamic positioning
system for thruster forces and power to counteract environmental forces;
5.2.3 Production Facilities and Production Support Facilities
The following design documentation and documentation specified in appendix VII, Part
9 of a floating production and storage system is required to be submitted, as applicable :
TCVN 6474-1:2007
53
(1) General Arrangements showing arrangements and locations of storage tanks,
machinery, equipment, living quarters, fire walls, emergency shutdown (ESD)
stations, control stations, crude loading and discharge stations and the flare (see
Part 5);
(2) Hazardous Area Classification Plans, as defined in 2.4.3 herein;
(3) Details of Storage Tank Venting and Inerting indicating arrangements for storage
tank venting and inerting;
(4) Arrangements for Use of Produced Gas as Fuel showing piping and control
arrangements for use of produced gas as fuel showing details of double wall or
ducting arrangements for the pipe runs in way of the safe space;
(5) A design specification that is to include design parameters (environmental
conditions, geographical location of the unit, external loads, pressures,
temperatures, etc.), standards and codes adopted throughout the design,
construction and testing stages and the process description;
(6) A description of the field development plan, including well fluid properties,
production rates, gas oil ratios, processing scheme, well shut-in pressures;
(7) Process flow sheets showing major process equipment components, process piping,
material balance, normal pressures and temperatures at the inlet and outlet of each
major component;
(8) Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) indicating location of all sensing and
controlling elements on the process and production support systems, sizing and
material specification of piping and the associated components, maximum design
pressure and temperature ratings, piping strength and flow calculations ;
(9) List of electrical equipment located in hazardous areas together with the certificates
issued by an independent testing laboratory to show suitability of their use in the
intended location;
(10) Electrical one line diagram showing ratings of all generators, motors, transformers,
type and size of wires and cables. Types and rating of circuit breakers with the
setting, interrupting capacity of circuit breakers and fuses;
(11) Short circuit current calculations and coordination data giving the maximum
calculated short circuit current available at the main bus bars and at each point in
the distribution system in order to determine the adequacy of the interrupting
TCVN 6474-1:2007
54
capacities of the protective device;
(12) Safety Analysis, including Safety Analysis Function Evaluation (S.A.F.E.) charts;
(13) Emergency shutdown system (ESD) relating to all sensing devices, shutdown
valves, shutdown devices and emergency support system to their functions and
showing ESD logic for the complete process and the subsea valves system;
(14) Emergency backup and uninterrupted power source, supply and the consumers;
(15) Pressure vessel (fired and unfired) and heat exchangers, design dimensional
drawings, design calculations, material specifications, pressure and temperature
ratings, together with weld details and the details of their support;
(16) Pressure relief and depressurization vent systems showing arrangements sizing of
the lines, capacities of the relief valve, materials, design capacity, calculations for
the relief valves, knock out drums, anticipated noise levels and gas dispersion
analyses;
(17) Complete details of flares, including pilots, igniters and water seal and design
calculations, including stability and radiant heat analyses;
(18) Schematic plans for the production support systems, including the size, wall
thicknesses, maximum design working pressure and temperature and materials for
all pipes and the type, size and material of valves and fittings;
(19) Compressors, pumps selection and control arrangements, including specification
data sheet;
(20) Fire and gas detection system showing the location and detailed description of all
power sources, sensors, annunciation and indication, set point for the alarm system;
(21) Passive and active fire protection system indicating locations of fire walls, fire
pumps and their capacities, main and backup power supply, fixed and portable fire
extinguishing, and fire fighting systems and equipment. In this regard, supportive
calculations are to be submitted to show the basis of capacities and quantities of fire
extinguishing equipment;
(22) Escape route plan ;
(23) Startup and commissioning procedures detailing sequence of events for inspection,
testing and startup and commissioning of equipment and system;
(24) Installation, Hook-up and Commissioning Procedures (see part 7);
5.2.4 Import/export system
TCVN 6474-1:2007
55
The design documentation required to be submitted is specified in Part 6.
5.2.5 Machinery installations and electrical installations
5.2.5.1 Machinery arrangement of machinery spaces, pump rooms, motor rooms and
diagrams for internal communication systems including a diagram for an engineers'
alarm systems;
5.2.5.2 For machinery installations used for the system or the equipment essential for the
safety of the unit or for the propulsion of the unit ( only applicable to the unit which
has the main propulsion machinery) : plans and documents required in the relevant
in TCVN 6259-3:2003;
5.2.5.3 For machinery installations used solely for the operation which is the purpose of the
unit: plans and documents specified in Chapter 2, Chapter 3, Chapter 9 and Chapter
10 TCVN 6259-3:2003 for diesel engines, steam turbines, boilers and incinerators,
plans and documents specified in Chapter 13, TCVN 6259-3:2003 for piping
systems, valves and fittings, plans and documents specified in Chapter 16, chapter
17. chapter 18 and chapter 19 for windlasses and mooring winches, refrigerating
machinery, systems of automatic and remote control, spare parts, tools and
instruments.
5.2.5.4 For the units provided with the dynamic positioning system
Construction and control diagrams of dynamic positioning system
5.2.5.5 Plans and documents for electrical installations specified in 1.1.6 TCVN 6259-
4:2003
5.2.5.6 Other plans and/or documents deemed necessary by the VR
5.2.6 Manuals and Procedures
5.2.6.1 Manuals
(1) Loading Manual (see clause 1.1.4 part 3)
(2) Trim and Stability(see clause 1.1.5 part 3)
(3) Operation manual (see clause 1.1.6 part 3)
5.2.6.2 Procedures
(1) Disconnecting Procedure, if applicable(see clause 1.1.7 part 7)
(2) Drydocking Procedure (see clause 10.4)
TCVN 6474-1:2007
56
(3) Hook Up Procedures (see clause 1.2 part 7)
(4) Import/Export System (see clause 1.1.4 part 6 and 1.1.6 part 7)
(5) Installation Procedures and manuals (see clause 1.1 part 7)
(6) Startup and Commissioning Procedures Survey (see clause 1.3 part 7)
(7) Inspection Planning Document (see part 8)
5.3 Presence of Surveyor
5.3.1 The presence of the Surveyor is required at the following stages of the work in
relation to hull and equipment:
5.3.1.1 When the material and equipments tests prescribed relevant parts are carried out
5.3.1.2 When the materials or parts manufactured away from the site are being applied to
the unit concerned
5.3.1.3 When the tests of welding prescribed in relevant Part are carried out
5.3.1.4 When designated by the Society during shop work or sub-assembly
5.3.1.5 When each block is assembled
5.3.1.6 When hydrostatic tests, watertight tests and non-destructive tests are caried out
5.3.1.7 When hull is completed
5.3.1.8 When performance tests are carried out on closing appliances of openings, remote
control devices, steering gears anchoring and mooring arrangements, piping, etc
5.3.1.9 When installing of rudder, profiling of keel line, measurement of principal
dimensions, measurement of deflection of hull, etc. are carried out
5.3.1.10 When the units are marked with the load lines in accordance with the requirements
in TCVN 6259-11:2003
5.3.1.11 When mooring systems are fitted on board and performance tests are carried out
5.3.1.12 When sea trials are carried out
5.3.1.13 When installing of fire extinguishing arrangements, and when the performance tests
are carried out
5.3.1.14 When inclining tests are carried out
5.3.1.15 For column stabilized units, when the draught scales are fitted
5.3.1.16 When deemed necessary by the VR;
5.3.2 The presence of the Surveyor is required at the following stages of the work in
relation to machinery installations and electrical installations
TCVN 6474-1:2007
57
5.3.2.1 When the tests of materials of main parts machinery prescibed in Part 7-A TCVN
6259-7:2003 are carried out
5.3.2.2 When the materials are applied to the parts and the parts are installated on board
5.3.2.3 When machining of the main parts is finished and, if necessary, at a proper time
during machining
5.3.2.4 In case of welded construction, before welding is commenced and when it is
completed
5.3.2.5 When shop trials are carried out
5.3.2.6 When important machinery installations and electrical installations are installed on
board
5.3.2.7 When performance tests are carried out on, remote control devices of closing
appliances, remote control devices, steering gears, mooring arrangements, piping,
etc
5.3.2.8 When each component consisting of a dynamic positioning systemis fitted on board
and ferformance tests of each component are carried out
5.3.2.9 When sea trials are carried out
5.3.2.10 When deemed necessary by the VR
5.3.3 The requirements specified in 5.3.1 and 5.3.2 may be modified having regard to the
actual status of facilities, technical abilities and quality control at the work, except
the case of sea trials and stability experiments
5.4 Hydrostatic and Watertight tests
5.4.1.1 Hydrostatic and watertight tests in the Classification Survey during construction are
to be in accordance with the requirements in 2.1.6, Chapter 2, Part 1-B General ,
TCVN 6259-1:2003
5.4.1.2 Notwithstanding the requirement in 5.3.4.1, where considering the design condition
and these are approved by the VR, hydrostatic and watertight tests are to be
appropriate to the VR
5.5 Classification Survey of Unit not built under Survey
5.5.1 General
5.5.1.1 In the Classification Survey of Unit not built under VR's survey, the actual
scantlings of main parts of the unit are to be measurd in addition to such
TCVN 6474-1:2007
58
examination of the hull and equipment, machinery installations, construction of fire
protection and detection, means of escape, fire extinguishing arrangements,
electrical instalations, stability and load lines and positioning systems as required
for the special survey corresponding to the units' age in order to ascertain that they
meet the relevant requirements in the Rules
5.5.1.2 The units intended to be surveyed in accordance with -1, necessary plans documents
are required for the classification survey during construction are to be submitted for
the approval by the VR
5.5.2 Tests
5.5.2.1 Hydrostatic and watertight tests are to be carried out in accordance with the
requirements in 5.4
5.5.2.2 The stability experiments are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements
in this standard. Where sufficient information based on previous stability
experiments is available and neither alteration nor repair affecting the stability has
been made after previous experiments, the stability experiments of the unit may be
dispensed with. However, the dispension for stability experiments is not applied for
column stabilized unit.

TCVN 6474-2:2007
59
Second Edition

PART 2: ENVIRONMENTAL LOADING AND DESIGN BASIC

Reference standards and definitions: see Part 1, TCVN 7474-1: 2007.
1 Environmental Loading and Design Basis
1.1 Design Basis
The design basis of a Floating Installation is to identify the production rate, storage
capacity and loading capabilities. Since the system is site-specific, the
environmental condition of the site directly influences the design of such a system.
The effects of prevailing winds are to be considered to minimize the risk of vented
or flared hydrocarbons to personnel, living quarters and evacuations means.
Generally, atmospheric vents, flare systems and emergency gas release vents are to
be arranged in such a way so that prevailing winds will carry heat and/or unburned
gases away from potential ignition sources on the installation.
The design environmental conditions are to include those for the operating,
installation and transit portions of the Floating Installation's design life. This Part
specifically covers the environmental design criteria for:
(1) Position Mooring System.
(2) Structural Strength and Fatigue Life Assessments
1.2 Design Documentation
The design documentation submitted is to include the reports, calculations, plans
and other documentation necessary to verify the structural strength of the vessel
itself and adequacy of the mooring system, production and other utility facilities
and riser system (if included in the classification) for the intended operations.
TCVN 6474-2:2007
60
1.3 Design Conditions
1.3.1 Position Mooring System
The position mooring system of a Floating Installation is to be designed to survive
in the Design Environmental Condition and operate in the Design Operating
Condition. For a disconnectable mooring system, the limiting condition at which
the mooring system is to be disconnected or reconnected is to be specified.
1.3.1.1 Design Environmental Condition (DEC)
The Design Environmental Condition (DEC) is defined as the extreme condition
with a specific combination of wind, waves and current for which the system is to
be designed.
The DEC is to be one of the following combinations that results in the most severe
loading case:
100-year waves with associated wind and current.
100-year wind with associated waves and current.
In areas with high current, additional design environmental load cases may need to
be considered.
The 100-year waves are normally characterized by a significant wave height with a
spectral shape type and a range of associated peak wave periods.
A minimum return period of 100 years for the DEC is required for Floating
Installations. A minimum return period of 50 years will be specially considered if it
is accepted by VR. Any environmental combinations with return periods shorter
than that of the DEC which induce larger mooring load responses are to be used in
the design.
1.3.1.2 Design Operating Condition (DOC)
The Design Operating Condition (DOC) is defined as the limiting environmental
condition that would require suspension of normal operations.
1.3.1.3 Design Installation Condition (DIC)
The Design Installation Condition (DIC) is defined as the limiting environmental
condition that would require suspension of installation operations. Specific limits
TCVN 6474-2:2007
61
on environmental conditions affecting safe operation during the installation phases
described in Part 7 are to be established and documented.
1.3.1.4 Angular Separation of Wind, Current and Waves
For single point mooring systems, which allow the vessel to weathervane, both
collinear and non-collinear directions among wind, current and waves are to be
considered. Proper angular separation for the DEC of wind, current and waves is to
be determined based on the site-specific environmental study. If this information is
not available, the following two angular combinations for non-collinear
environments can be considered as a minimum:
(1) Wind and current are collinear and both at 30 degrees to waves.
(2) Wind at 30 degrees to waves and current at 90 degrees to waves.
For spread mooring systems with limited change in vessel heading angles (less than
20 degrees) under design environmental loads, the collinear environments of wind,
current and waves, which are generally controlling, can be used in design.
For each design sea state, a long-crested sea without spectral energy spreading in
direction is normally considered in the mooring analysis
1.3.2 Structural Strength and Fatigue Life
1.3.2.1 Project Site
The site-specific wave conditions, including both long-term extreme events and
wave scatter diagram data of wave height/period joint occurrence distribution, are
to be considered for the vessel's hull strength and fatigue life assessment. A
minimum return period of 50 years for the structural response will be specially
considered, provided that it is accepted by VR. Different environmental conditions
may induce different worst responses on various parts of the hull structure. The
wave-induced maximum motion responses and maximum structural load effects
may result from different wave periods. Therefore, the following environmental
conditions are to be considered:
(1) 100-year return period waves characterized by a significant wave height with
a range of associated peak wave periods. Both winter storms and tropical
cyclones (hurricanes or typhoons), if any, need be considered.
TCVN 6474-2:2007
62
(2) Wave scatter diagram data of wave height/period joint occurrence distribution.
The length of time on which the data base for the wave scatter diagram data is
constructed is long enough to be a reliable basis for design (preferably at least
five years). The occurrence distribution is to be annualized with equal
probability of occurrence for each data point. Each data point is to represent a
sea state of approximately three hours in a continuous time duration of the
database.
(3) Wave directions of head seas and other directions relative to the vessel
heading, including the effects of wind and current, with proper probability
distribution are to be considered, irrespective of the type of mooring system
utilized.
(4) As appropriate, either long-crested seas or short-crested seas with cosine
squared spectral energy spreading in direction are to be considered for various
design issues.
1.3.2.2 Transit
The wind and wave conditions representing the environment for the transit route
from the building or outfitting site (or the shipyard where the conversion
modifications are made) to the project site and the time of the year are to be
determined for the design of a floating installation. As a minimum, the wind speed
and significant wave height of 10-year return period are to be considered, unless a
weather routing plan is to be implemented for the voyage. Seasonal effects on the
design environments as appropriate for the proposed transit duration can be
considered.
In addition to the check on vessel's hull strength during transit, special attention is
to be paid to items such as the flare boom, crane pedestal and process equipment
supports that will be subject to motion-induced loading and/or effects of green
water. Motion-induced loads during transit are to be calculated and the
superstructures and their supports, which are included in the scope of classification,
shall be verified against these loads.
If fitted with an internal turret, special consideration is to be given to bottom
slamming to preclude damage to the turret supports and bearings.
TCVN 6474-2:2007
63
1.4 Environmental Conditions
1.4.1 General
The environmental conditions for the various design conditions described in 1.3 are
to be submitted with adequate data for the specific site of operation. Statistical data
and mathematical models that describe the range of pertinent expected variations of
environmental conditions are to be employed. All data used are to be fully
documented with the sources and estimated reliability of data noted.
An environmental report describing methods employed in developing available
data into design criteria is to be submitted in accordance with TCVN 6474-1: 2007.
Probabilistic methods for short-term, long-term and extreme-value prediction are to
employ statistical distributions appropriate to the environmental phenomena being
considered, as evidenced by relevant statistical tests, confidence limits and other
measures of statistical significance. Hindcasting methods and models are to be fully
documented
Generally, data and analyses supplied by recognized consultants will be accepted as
the basis of design. Published design standards and data, if available for the
location of interest, may be cited as documentation.
Specifically, the following environmental data are normally to be provided:
(1) Extreme events of 100-, 10- and 1-year return period data for wind speed,
significant wave height and current. A range of associated wave periods is to
be considered for each specified significant wave height. Both winter storms
and tropical cyclones (hurricanes or typhoons), if any, need be considered.
(2) Directional data and angular separation for extreme values of wind, waves and
current.
(3) Wave spectral shape formulation.
(4) Current speed and directional variation through the water depth.
(5) Wave height/period joint occurrence distribution (wave scatter diagram data
with equal annual probability of occurrence for each data point).
(6) Long-term wave statistics by direction.
(7) Water depth and tidal variations, including wind and pressure effects of
storms.
(8) Air and sea temperature.
TCVN 6474-2:2007
64
1.4.2 Environmental Loads
The design of a Floating Installation requires the establishment of environmental
loads considering the following parameters:
(1) Air and sea temperatures
(2) Currents
(3) Tides and storm surges
(4) Waves
(5) Wind
Other phenomena such as loop currents, tsunamis, submarine slides, seiche,
abnormal composition of air and water, air humidity, salinity, ice drift and icebergs
may require special considerations.
Wind tunnel and towing tank tests on the project-specific submerged hull and
superstructures are preferred in determining current and wind loads. Alternatively,
the following calculation procedures can also be applied.
1.4.3 Current
The current forces on the submerged hull, mooring lines, risers or any other
submerged objects associated with the system are to be calculated using a current
profile established in accordance with 1.3. In areas where relatively high velocity
currents occur, load amplification due to vortex shedding is to be considered.
Current force, Fc on the submerged part of any structure is calculated as the drag
force by the following equation:
Lc dng chy Fc tc dng ln cc phn ngp nc ca bt k kt cu no phi
c tnh ton theo cng thc sau:
1
2 w
=
c D c c c
F C A u u
, N
where:
w

= density of sea water, 1,027 kg/m
3

C
D
= drag coefficient, in steady flow (dimensionless)
u
c
= current velocity vector normal to the plane of projected
area, in m/s
TCVN 6474-2:2007
65
A
c
= projected area exposed to current, in m
2
.
1.4.4 Wind
The wind conditions for various design conditions are to be established from
collected wind data and should be consistent with other environmental parameters
assumed to occur simultaneously. In general, the wind speed is to be based on a
recurrence period of 100 years.
The environmental report is to present wind statistics for the site of installation. The
statistics are to be based on the analysis and interpretation of wind data by a
recognized consultant. The report is to include a wind rose or table showing the
frequency distributions of wind velocity and direction and a table or graph showing
the recurrence period of extreme winds. The percentage of time for which the
operational phase limiting wind velocity is expected to be exceeded during a year
and during the worst month or season is to be identified.
1.4.4.1 Wind Load
The wind loading can be considered either as a steady wind force or as a
combination of steady and time-varying load, as described below:
(1) When wind force is considered as a constant (steady) force, the wind velocity
based on the 1-minute average velocity is to be used in calculating the wind load.
(2) Effect of the wind gust spectrum can be taken into account by considering
wind loading as a combination of steady load and a time-varying component
calculated from a suitable wind spectrum. For this approach, the wind velocity
based on 1-hour average speed is to be used for steady wind load calculation. The
first approach is preferred to this approach when the wind energy spectrum cannot
be derived with confidence.
Wind pressure, pw, on a particular windage of a floating vessel may be calculated
as drag forces using the following equations:
P
w
= 0.610 C
s
C
h
V
r
2
N/m
2
V
r
in m/s
= 0.0623 C
s
C
h
V
r
2
kgf/m
2
V
r
in m/s
= 0.00338 C
s
C
h
V
r
2
lbf/ft
2
V
r
in knots
TCVN 6474-2:2007
66
where
C
s
= Shape Coefficient (dimensionless), given in table 2-1
C
h
= Height Coefficient (dimensionless), given in table 2-2.
The height coefficient, Ch, in the above formulation accounts for the wind velocity
(Vw) profile in the vertical plane. The height coefficient, Ch, is given by the
following equation:
2

=

z
h
r
V
C
V
or
2

=

h
r
z
C
z
, but C
h
1
where the velocity of wind, V
z
, at a height, z, is to be calculated as follows:

=

z r
r
z
V V
z

V
r
= velocity of wind at an reference elevation, Z
r
, of 10 m

= 0.09 - 0.16 for 1-minute average wind
0.125 for 1-hour average wind.
The corresponding wind force, Fw, on the windage is
F
w
= p
w
. A
w

where:
A
w
= projected area of windage on a plane normal to the
direction of the wind, in m
2

The total wind force is then obtained by summing up the wind forces on each
windage
Representative values of C
h
are given in Table 2-2 of this standard. Wind profiles
for the specific site of the Floating Installation should be used.
The shape coefficients for typical structural shapes are presented in Table 2-1 of
this standard. To convert the wind velocity, V
t
, at a reference of 10 m (33 feet)
above sea level for a given time average, t, to velocity of another time average, the
following relationship may be used:

( ) 1 t h
V fV =

TCVN 6474-2:2007
67
Example values of the factor f for a specific waters are listed in Table 2-3 . Values
specific to the site of the Floating Installation are to be used.
Wind forces on Floating Installations other than ship-type are to be calculated by
the summation of wind forces on individual areas using the above formulas.
If the 1-hour average wind speed is used, the wind's dynamic effect should be
separately considered. The wind energy spectrum, as recommended in API RP 2A,
may be used.
1.4.5 Waves
Wave criteria are to be described in terms of wave energy spectra, significant wave
height and associated period for the location at which the Floating Installation is to
operate. Waves are to be considered as coming from any direction relative to the
vessel. Consideration is to be given to waves of less than the maximum height
because the wave-induced motion responses at waves with certain periods may be
larger in some cases due to the dynamic behavior of the system as a whole (floating
storage unit/ mooring system).
1.4.5.1 Wave Forces
The wave forces acting on a floating vessel consist of three components, i.e., first
order forces at wave frequencies, second order forces at frequencies lower than the
wave frequencies and a steady component of the second order forces. This steady
component of the wave force is called Mean Drift Force. The calculation of wave
loading is necessary for assessing the vessel motion responses and the mooring
system. It requires calculations of dynamic characteristics of the vessel and the
hydrodynamic loading on the vessel for a given environmental condition
For structures consisting of slender members that do not significantly alter the
incident wave field, semi-empirical formulations, such as Morison's equation, may
be used. For calculation of wave loads on structural configurations that
significantly alter the incident wave field, appropriate methods which account for
both the incident wave force (e.g., Froude-Krylov force) and the forces resulting
from wave diffraction are to be used. In general, application of Morison's equation
may be used for structures comprising slender members with diameters (or
TCVN 6474-2:2007
68
equivalent diameters giving the same cross-sectional areas parallel to the flow) less
than 20 percent of the wave lengths.
For a column-stabilized type of vessel consisting of large (columns and pontoons)
and small (brace members) cylindrical members, a combination of diffraction and
Morison's equation can be used for calculation of hydrodynamic characteristics and
hydrodynamic loading. The designer may refer to TCVN 5310: 2001.
Alternatively, the suitable model test results or full scale measurements can be
used.
Wave force calculations should account for shallow water effects which increase
current due to blockage effects, change the system natural frequency due to
nonlinear behavior of moorings and alter wave kinematics.
1.4.5.2 Wave-induced Vessel Motion Responses
The wave-induced response of a vessel consists of three categories of response, i.e.,
first order (wave frequency) motions, low frequency or slowly varying motions and
steady drift.
(1) First Order Motions: These motions have six degrees of freedom (surge, sway,
heave, roll, pitch and yaw see definitions in Part 1) and are at wave
frequencies that can be obtained from model tests in regular or random waves
or by computer analysis in frequency or time domain.
(2) Low Frequency Motions: These motions are induced by low frequency
components of second order wave forces. The low frequency motions of
surge, sway and yaw can be substantial, particularly at frequencies near the
natural frequency of the system. The low frequency motion-induced mooring
line tension in most systems with a tanker-type vessel is a dominating design
load for the mooring system. The low frequency motions are to be calculated
for any moored vessel by using appropriate motion analysis software or by
model test results of a similar vessel.
(3) Steady (Mean) Drift: As mentioned above, a vessel subjected to waves
experiences a steady drift along with the first and second order motions. The
mean wave drift force and yawing moment are induced by the steady
component of the second order wave forces. Mean drift forces and yawing
TCVN 6474-2:2007
69
moments are to be calculated using appropriate motion analysis computer
programs or extrapolated from model test results of a similar vessel.
1.4.6 Directionality
The directionality of environmental conditions can be considered if properly
documented by a detailed environmental report.
1.4.7 Soil Conditions
Soil data should be taken in the vicinity of the foundation system site. An
interpretation of such data is to be submitted by a recognized geotechnical
consultant. To establish the soil characteristics of the site, the foundation system
borings or probings are to be taken at all foundation locations to a suitable depth of
at least the anticipated depth of any piles or anchor penetrations plus a
consideration for the soil variability. As an alternative, sub-bottom profile runs may
be taken and correlated with at least two borings or probings in the vicinity of
anchor locations and an interpretation may be made by a recognized geotechnical
consultant to adequately establish the soil profile at all anchoring locations.
Table 2-1: Shape Coefficients Cs for Windages
Shape C
s

Sphere 0,4
Cylindrical Shapes 0,5
Hull above waterline 1,0
Deck House 1,0
Isolated structural shapes (Cranes, channels, beams, angles, etc.) 1,5
Under deck areas (smooth) 1,0
Under deck areas (exposed beams and girders) 1,3
Rig derrick 1,25
TCVN 6474-2:2007
70
Table 2-2: Height Coefficients C
h
for Windages
Height above Waterline Ch
m ft 1 min 1 hour
0 to < 15,3 0 to <50 1,00 1,00
15,3 to < 30,5 50 to <100 1,18 1,23
30,5 to < 46,0 100 to <150 1,31 1,40
46,0 to < 61,0 150 to <200 1,40 1,52
61,0 to < 76,0 200 to <250 1,47 1,62
76,0 to < 91,5 250 to <300 1,53 1,71
91,5 to < 106,5 300 to <350 1,58 1,78

Table 2-3: Wind Velocity Conversion Factor
Wind Duration factor f
1 hour 1,000
10 min 1,060
1 min 1,180
15 s 1,260
5 s 1,310
3 s 1,330

71
NATIONAL STANDARD TCVN 6474 -3 : 2007
Second edition

PART 3 :TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Reference standards and definitions: see Part 1 ,TCVN 6474-1: 2007
1 Technical requirements for floating storage units
1.1 All Vessels
1.1.1 General
1.1.1.1 This chapter cover the requirements for vessels (ship type and column stabilized) as
defined in Part 1. Other tyes ,as defined in 2.2.4 Part 1,will be considered on a
case-by-case basis.
1.1.1.2 This chapter cover the requirements for vessel that are newly designed or are
undergoing a major conversion that affects the principal dimensions of the floating
installation.The application of the requirements to existing vessel not undergoing
major conversion will be considered by VR based on the service history, age,
condition of the exsting floating installation.
1.1.1.3 The designer is required to submit to VR for review all applicable design
documentation, such as reports,calculation,plans and other documentation
necessary to verify the structural streng of the floating installation it self .The
submitted design documentation is to include the design environmetal condition
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
72
(see 1.4 Part 2).
1.1.2 Lightweight Data.
The lightweight and center of gravity are to be determined for vessels of all types .An
inclining test will be required for the first floating installation of a series, when as
near to completion as practical, to determine accurately the lightweight and position
of center of gravity . An inclining test procedure is to be submitted for review prior
to the test, which is to be witnessed by a Surveyor of VR .
1.1.3 Load Line
1.1.3.1 Every vessel is to have marks that designate the maximum permissible draft to which
the vessel may be loaded. Such markings are to be placed at suitable visible
locations on the hull or structure to the satisfaction of the Bureau. On column-
stabilized vessels, where practical, these marks are to be visible to the person in
charge of liquid transfer operations .
1.1.3.2 Except where otherwise permitted by the flag and coastal States, load line marks are
to be established under the terms of the International Convention of Load Lines,
1966. Where minimum freeboards cannot be computed by the normal methods laid
down by the convention, such as in the case of a column-stabilized unit, they are to
be determined on the basis of compliance with intact or damage stability
requirement for afloat modes of operation .
1.1.3.3 The vessels arrangements are to comply with all applicable regulations of the
International Convention on Load Lines.
1.1.4 Operating Manual
As for every kind of vessel ,Operating Manual include information as following, if
applicable , to be able to conduct operator to operate vessel in safety way:
1.1.4.1 A general description of the unit, including major dimensions, lightship
characteristics;
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
73
1.1.4.2 Summaries of approved modes of operation including for each mode of operation:
(1) Limiting environmental conditions, including wave height and period, wind
velocity, current velocity, minimum air and sea temperatures, soil
penetration, air gap and water depth;
(2)Design deck loadings, mooring loads, icing loads, variable load, total
elevated load, cantilever load, rated capacities of derricks, cranes and
elevating systems and types of helicopter for which the helideck is designed;
(3)Draft or draft range;
(4)Maximum allowable KG versus draft curves or equivalent and associated
limitations or assumptions upon which the allowable KG is based;
(5)Position (open or closed) of watertight and weathertight closures
1.1.4.3 General arrangements;
1.1.4.4 Watertight and weathertight boundaries, location of unprotected openings, and
watertight and weathertight closures;
1.1.4.5 Drawings indicating ballast system and type, location and quantities of permanent
ballast;
1.1.4.6 Schematic diagrams of the bilge, ballast and ballast control system;
1.1.4.7 Allowable deck loadings;
1.1.4.8 Capacity, centers of gravity and free surface correction for each tank;
1.1.4.9 Capacity and centers of gravity of each void provided with sounding arrangements
but not provided with means of draining;
1.1.4.10 Location and means of draining voids ;
1.1.4.11 Hydrostatic curves or equivalent;
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
74
1.1.4.12 Hazardous areas;
1.1.4.13 Simplified electrical one line diagrams of main power and emergency power
systems;
1.1.4.14 Diagram of fuel oil filling pipes ;
1.1.4.15 Recommended sequence of emergency shut-downs;
1.1.4.16 Fire extinguishing arrangements;
1.1.4.17 Life saving appliance arangements and Escape route plan ;
1.1.4.18 Light ship data ;
1.1.4.19 Technical information of helicopter used for helideck design ;
1.1.4.20 Plans and description of the mooring system and instructions for mooring ;
1.1.4.21 Plans and description of the dynamic positioning system and instructions for
positioning ;
1.1.4.22 Stability information booklet;
1.1.4.23 Loading Manual ;
1.1.4.24 Other instruction if Bureau require.
1.1.5 Loading Manual (Operating Manual) .
1.1.5.1 For a ship-type vessel, a loading manual is to be prepared and submitted for review
pertaining to the safe operation of the vessel from a strength point of view. This
loading manual is to be prepared for the guidance of and use by the personnel
responsible for loading the vessel. The manual is to include means for determining
the effects of various loaded, transitional and ballasted conditions upon the hull
girder bending moment . In addition, a loading instrument suitable for the intended
service is to be installed on the vessel. The check conditions for the loading
instrument and other relevant data are to be submitted for review .
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
75
1.1.5.2 An operating manual is required for the marine operation of all Floating Installations,
containing the information listed in Section 1.1.6 of the Mobile Offshore Drilling
Unit Rules , as applicable. The above mentioned loading manual may be included
in the overall operating manual or issued as a separate document. The loading
manual, if issued as a separate document, is to be referenced in the overall
operating manual.
1.1.5.3 Sections pertaining to each vessel type for additional requirements.
1.1.6 Trim and Stability Booklet (Operating Manual)
1.1.6.1 In addition to the loading manual described in (1.1.4), a ship-type floating
installation is to be provided with sufficient information to guide the master and
other responsible personnel in the safe loading, transfer and discharge of cargo and
ballast with respect to the hulls trim and stability. The information is to include
various loaded, transitional and ballasted example conditions over the full range of
operating drafts together with stability criteria to enable the responsible personnel
to evaluate the intact and damage stability of any other proposed condition of
loading.
1.1.6.2 This information may be prepared as a separate trim and stability booklet or may be
included in the overall operating manual. If issued as a separate document, the trim
and stability booklet is to be referenced in the overall operating manual.
1.1.6.3 Sections pertaining to each vessel type for additional requirements .
1.1.7 Engineering Analysis.
1.1.7.1 Documentation necessary to verify the adequacy of the hull structure is to be
submitted for review. The needed extent and types of analyses and the
sophistication of such analyses vary, depending on one or a combination of the
following factors:
(1) The design basis of the hull structure versus the conditions to be encountered
at the installation site;
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
76
(2) The relative lack of experience with the hull structures arrangement, local
details, loading patterns, failure mode sensitivities ;
(3) Potential deleterious interactions with other subsystems of the floating offshore
installation ;
1.1.7.2 The required structural analyses are to employ the loads associated with the
environmental conditions determined in association with Part 2. These conditions
include those expected during the operational life of the Floating Installation on site
and those expected during the transport of the structure to the installation site.
1.1.8 Mooring Systems and Equipment
1.1.8.1 Position mooring systems are to meet the requirements of Part 4. For temporary
mooring equipment, see Chapter 25 ,TCVN 6259-2A:2003.Temporary mooring
equipment is equipment used in port or proteced water area.
1.1.9 Material
1.1.9.1 Steels are hull structure materials to be complied with the requirements given in
Chapter 3, 4, 5, 6 of Pt 7A TCVN 6259-7 : 2003 and TCVN 5317:2001.
1.1.9.2 It is the responsibility of the Owner to comply with the requirements of Vietnam
Register relating to selecting materials, issuing certificates and surveys.
1.1.9.3 Where aluminum alloys are used for secondary structures such as helicopter decks,
deckhouses, superstructures or other structural components they are to comply with
the relevant requirements of Pt 7A, Ch 8 of TCVN 6259-7 :2003.
1.1.9.4 If used steel and other material is different to above kinds of material ,their technical
properties are to be submitted to Bureau for approval .
1.1.9.5 Air and sea-water temperature in design is based on selecting materials should be
minimum average temperature in day at operational location accordance to 50 years
period.
1.1.9.6 Considerations should be given to other materials based on the their property
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
77
accordance to each special application.
1.1.9.7 Selected materials are complied with the design requirements accordance to static
stress, fugue stress, cracking resistant ability and corrosion resistant ability.
1.1.9.8 Grades used in structure are selected to standards of thickness, positions in structure
and minimum designed temperature of seawater and air.
1.1.10 Underwater marking
1.1.10.1 The underwater structure of a unit intended to be surveyed on an in-water basis
should have its main frames, bulkheads and joints etc. clearly identified by suitable
marking. Details are to be submitted for approval.
1.1.10.2 Underwater marking should consist of raised lines, numerals dud letters. Besides
painting, another material marking should be added.
1.1.10.3 If marking is to be carried out by welding the welds should be made with
continuous runs and the quality of welding and workmanship should be to an
equivalent standard as the main hull structure. Marking by welding is not permitted
in highly stressed areas or over existing butts or seams. The welding procedures
and consumables are to be submitted for approval.
1.1.11 Corrosion Protection
1.1.11.1 Steelwork is to be suitably protected against corrosion (except inside of oil tank).
This protection may be by coating or by a system of cathodic protection or by any
other approved method. The method is to be suitable for the position and purpose.
1.1.11.2 VR recommend that submerged hull should be protected by impressed current
cathodic protection- ICCP with the life is not less than 20 year.
1.1.11.3 The following plans and information are to be submitted:
(1) Evidence that any primers used will have no deleterious effect on subsequent
welding or on subsequent coatings;
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
78
(2) Details of the painting specification with regard to:
(a) The generic type of the coating and its suitability for the intended environment.
(b) The methods to be used to prepare the surface before the coating is applied and
the standard to be achieved.
(c) The method of application of the coating ;
(d) The number of coats to be applied and the total dry film thickness;
(3) Details of the areas to be coated .
1.1.11.4 Where a coating is to be applied in accommodation spaces, machinery spaces and
areas of similar fire risk, a statement that the coating is not formulated on a
nitrocellulose or other highly flammable base and has low flame spread
characteristic.
1.1.11.5 When a coating contains aluminum and is intended to be used on decks or in areas
where flammable gases may accumulate a statement from an independent
laboratory confirming that appropriate tests have shown that the coating does not
increase incentive sparking hazard in the area to which it is to be applied.
1.1.11.6 Proposals for the protection of wire ropes will be considered on their merits bearing
in mind the purpose of the rope, its construction and its intended life. In general, all
steel wire ropes will be required to be protected with a zinc coating.
1.1.11.7 The cathodic protection system should be designed for a period commensurate with
the design life of the structure and it should be capable of polarizing the steelwork
to a sufficient level in order to minimize corrosion.
1.1.11.8 Impressed current cathodic protection systems are not to be fitted in any tank.
1.1.11.9 Particular attention is to be given to the locations of anodes in tanks that can
contain explosive or other flammable vapour.
1.1.11.10 Aluminum and aluminum alloy anodes are permitted in tanks that may contain
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
79
explosive or flammable vapour but only at locations where the potential energy of
the anode does not exceed 275 J (28kgfm).
1.1.11.11 Aluminum anodes are not to be located under tank hatches or other openings
unless protected by adjacent structure .
1.1.11.12 Magnesium or magnesium alloy anodes are permitted only in tanks intended
solely for water ballast, in which case adequate venting must be provided.
1.1.11.13 The arrangements for glands, where cables pass through the shell, are to
include a small cofferdam. Cables to anodes are not to be led through tanks
intended for the carriage of low flash point oils. Where cables are led through
cofferdams or clean ballast tanks, they are to be enclosed in a substantial steel tube.
1.1.11.14 Where bimetallic connections are made measures are to be incorporated to
preclude galvanic corrosion.
1.1.11.15 Where possible items such as risers and pipelines should be electrically
insulated from the unit.
1.1.11.16 Storage tanks and other compartments require corrosion protection where the
stored product may be corrosive. Particular attention should be paid to the
likelihood of water in the bottom of hydrocarbon storage tanks and the elects of
bacterial induced corrosion. Proposals for suitable protective measures are to be
submitted for approval.
1.1.11.17 Where it is proposed to use inhibitors, biocides or other chemicals for the
protection of closed flooded compartments, full details, including :
(1) Compatibility, with each other and ;
(2) Evidence of satisfactory service experience or ;
(3) Suitable laboratory test results or ;
(4) Any other data to substantiate the suitability for the intended purpose are to be
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
80
submitted for consideration.
1.1.11.18 Cable and insulating material for impressed current anode systems should be
resistant to chloride, hydrocarbons and any, other chemicals with which they, may
come into connect.
1.1.11.19 For impressed current anode systems the electrical connection between the
anode cable and the anode body is to be watertight and mechanically and
electrically sound.
1.1.11.20 Potential surveys are to be carried out at agreed intervals. Should the results of
any potential survey are not meet the requirements then remedial action is to be
carried out at the earliest opportunity .
1.1.11.21 Design of cathodic protection systems should be approved by VR .
1.2 Ship Type Vesels
1.2.1 General
1.2.1.1 The design and construction of the hull, superstructure and deckhouses of ship-type
installations are to be based on all applicable requirements of the Steel Vessel
Rules. However, the design criteria for those structures, as given in the Steel Vessel
Rules, can be modified to reflect the different structural performance and demands
expected of a vessel engaged in unrestricted service compared to a vessel
positioned at a particular site on a long-term basis or a vessel with a specific and
invariant route
1.2.1.2 To reflect the site-dependent nature of the floating offshore installation is
accomplished through the introduction of a series of Environmental Severity
Factors (ESFs), Reference is to be made to Appendix 2 for the applicable structural
design and analysis criteria that have been modified to reflect site-specific service
conditions.
1.2.1.3 The design criteria for an oil-tanker-type vessel are located in TCVN 6259:2003.
TCVN 6259-2A:2003 is applicable to vessels of 90 meters or more in length while
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
81
TCVN 6259-2B:2003 applies to vessels under 90 meters in length. In addition, the
applicable criteria contained in the Load Line, SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions
issued by the International Maritime Organization are to be considered.
1.2.2 Definitions
The definition of a ship-type vessel is given in Part 1. See TCVN 6259-2:2003
for definition of primary vessel characteristics .
1.2.3 Longitudinal Strength
1.2.3.1 Longitudinal strength is to be based onTCVN 6259-2:2003 . The total hull girder
bending moment, Mt is the sum of the maximum still water bending moment\\ and
corresponding wave-induced bending moment (Mw) determined from 1.3 , Part 2
of this Guide considering both the expected on-site conditions and transit
conditions to the installation site. In lieu of directly calculated wave-induced hull
girder bending moments (vertical) and shear forces, recourse can be made to the
use of the Environmental Severity Factor (ESF) approach described in Appendix
1,Part 9 . The ESF approach can be applied to modify the Steel Vessel Rules
wave-induced hull girder bending moment and shear force formulas according to
TCVN 6259-2:2003 (see Appendix 2 ,Part 9 ).
1.2.3.2 Due account is to be given to the influence of mooring equipment and riser weights
in contributing to the vertical still water bending moments and shear forces
1.2.3.3 For all vessels of 90 m (295 ft) or more in length ,TCVN 6259-2:2003 requires that
a loading manual based on still-water conditions be prepared and submitted for
review.
1.2.3.4 The influence of mooring equipment and riser weights in contributing to the vertical
still water bending moments and shear forces (z) is to be considered properly
1.2.4 Stability , Division and Loadline
1.2.4.1 Requirement of stability for ship-type vessel is described in TCVN 6259-10:2003
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
82
1.2.4.2 Requirement of division for ship-type vessel is described in TCVN 6259 - 9:2003
1.2.4.3 Requirement of Loadline for ship-type vessel is described in TCVN 6259 - 11:2003
1.2.4.4 The intact and damage stability of the vessel are to be evaluated in accordance with
TCVN 5312:2001 . In addition, the requirements of the 1966 Load Line
Convention and MARPOL 73/78 are to be considered. See 1.1.5 for general
requirements pertaining to the makeup and issuance of loading guidance with
respect to stability
1.2.5 Structural Arrangement
1.2.5.1 The structural arrangement of the vessel are to comply with applicable requirements
of TCVN 6259-2:2003 . Reference should also be made to the 1966 Load Line
Convention and MARPOL 73/78
1.2.6 Structural Design of the Hull
1.2.6.1 The design of the hull is to be based on the applicable portions of TCVN 6259-
2:2003 . Where the conditions at the installation site are less demanding than those
for unrestricted service that are the basis of TCVN 6259-2:2003 , the design
criteria for various components of the hull structure may be reduced to reflect these
differences. However, when the installation site conditions produce demands that
are more severe, it is mandatory that the design criteria are to be increased
appropriately.
1.2.6.2 Appendix 1, Part 9 presents an explanation of the Environmental Severity Factor
(ESF) concept, which is used to adjust the unrestricted service criteria of TCVN
6259-2:2003 . Appendix 2, Part 9 present criteria from TCVN 6259-2:2003 that
are modified to show the introduction of the ESFs into the criteria.
1.2.6.3 In the application of the modified criteria, no minimum required value of any net
scantling is to be less than 85 percent of the value obtained, had all the Beta Values
been set equal to 1.0 (which is the unrestricted service condition).
1.2.6.4 The loads arising from the static tank testing condition are also to be directly
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
83
considered in the design. In some instances, such cases might control the design,
especially when the overflow heights are greater than normally encountered in oil
transport service, or the severity of environmentally-induced load components and
cargo specific gravity are less than usual.
1.2.6.5 Hull Design for Additional Loads and Load Effects .
(1) The loads addressed in this Subsection are those required in the design of a
vessel in Appendix II & IV , Part 9 . Specifically, these loads are those arising
from liquid sloshing in hydrocarbon storage or ballast tanks, green water on
deck, bow impact due to wave group action above the waterline, bow flare
slamming during vertical entry of the bow structure into the water and bottom
slamming. All of these can be treated directly by reference to Appendix II &
IV, Part 9 . However, when it is permitted to design for these loads and load
effects on the site-specific basis, the formulations given in Appendix II & IV ,
Part 9 can be modified to reflect the introduction of the previously mentioned
Environmental Severity Factors (ESFs-Beta-type) into the Rule criteria.
(2) Sloshing of Produced or Ballast Liquids
For ship-type vessels, it is typical that the tanks may be subjected to partial
filling levels. For tanks where partial filling is intended, sloshing analyses are
to be performed. Firstly, the sloshing analysis is to determine if the anticipated
filling levels in each tank are close to the vessels natural pitch and roll motion
periods. It is recommended that the natural periods of the fluid motions in each
tank for each anticipated filling level are at least 20 percent greater or smaller
than that of the relevant vessels motion. This range of vessel natural periods
constitutes the critical range. If the natural periods of the tanks and vessel are
sufficiently separated, then no further analyses are required. However, when
the tanks are to be loaded within critical filling levels, then additional
analyses are to be performed in order to determine the adequacy of the structure
for the internal pressures due to sloshing
(3) For vessel lengths of 150 m (492 feet) and above, the extent of sloshing analyses
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
84
is indicated in Appendix IV, Part 9 . For vessels less than 150 m in length, the
extent of sloshing analyses is according to recognised standards .
(4) However, it should be borne in mind that the sloshing assessment criteria given
in Appendix IV, Part 9 are derived considering an unrestrained freely floating
hull subjected to wave energy spectra representing the open ocean .Mooring
restrain ,potential hull weathervaning different wave energy characterizations (
e.g.,energy spectra for ocean swells ,tropical cyclonic storms and water depth
effects) may need to be additionally considered by the designer when
establishing sloshing induced loading.
(5) When it is permitted to base the design on a site-specific modification, green
water loads on deck , bow impact , slamming is to be modified as Appendix II,
Part 9 .
1.2.6.6 Superstructures and Deckhouses.
The designs of superstructures and deckhouses are to comply with the
requirements of TCVN 6259-2:2005.
1.2.6.7 Helicopter Decks
The helicopter deck structure is to be in accordance withTVCN 5310:2001 and
technical regulation for offshore helicopter decks .
1.2.6.8 Protection of Deck Openings
The machinery casings, all deck openings, hatch covers and companionway
sills are to comply with 6259-2:2003.
1.2.6.9 Bulwarks, Rails, Freeing Ports, Ventilators and Portlights
Bulwarks, rails, freeing ports, portlights and ventilators are to meet the
requirements of TCVN 6259-2:2003.
1.2.6.10 Materials and Welding
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
85
(1) Materials and welding is to be in accordance with TCVN 6259-6:2003 and
TCVN 6259-7:2003 .The weld type and sizing are to be shown on the
scantling drawings or in the form of a welding schedule and are to comply
with TCVN that govern the steel selection.
(2) The topsides facilities (production deck) are to be constructed from steel
selected in accordance with TCVN 7230: 2003.
(3) Tower mooring systems and SPM are to be constructed from steel selected
in accordance with TCVN 5317: 2001.
1.2.6.11 Machinery and Equipment Foundations
Foundations for equipment subjected to high cyclic loading, such as mooring
winches, chain stoppers and foundations for rotating process equipment, are to be
analyzed to ensure satisfactory strength and fatigue resistance. Calculations and
drawings showing weld details are to be submitted to VR for review.
1.2.7 Engineering Analyses of the Hull Structure
1.2.7.1 General
Documentation necessary to verify the structural strength of the vessel is to be
submitted for review. The criteria in this Subsection relate to the analyses required to
verify the scantling selected in the basic hull design in 1.2.6 as above. Except as
provided in TCVN 6259-2:2005 , the results of analyses that are required in this
Subsection cannot be used to reduce the scantlings established from 1.2.6 .
Depending on the specific features of the offshore installation, additional analyses to
verify and help design other portions of the hull structure will be required. Such
additional analyses include those for the deck structural components supporting
deck-mounted equipment and the hull structure interface with the position mooring
system. Analysis criteria for these two situations are given in 1.2.8 .
1.2.7.2 Strength Analysis of the Hull Structure
(1) For vessels of 150 m (492 feet) in length and above, the required extent of a Finite
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
86
Element Method (FEM) strength analysis is indicated in Appendix III, Part 9 . For
vessels less than 150 m in length, it is recommended that a Finite Element Method
(FEM) analysis be performed if the vessel is of double hull construction or of
unusual design . When the design is permitted to be based on site-specific
environmental conditions, the load components from the Steel Vessel Rules to be
used in the strength analyses can be adjusted as explained in 1.2.6 and Appendix II,
Part 9 .
(2) Generally, the strength analysis is performed to determine the load distribution in the
structure. An appropriate three-dimensional FEM model is to be analyzed for this
purpose. To determine the stress distribution in major supporting structures,
particularly at intersections of two or more members, fine mesh FEM models are to
be analyzed using the boundary displacements and load from the 3D FEM model.
To examine stress concentrations, such as at intersections of longitudinal stiffeners
with transverses and at cutouts, fine mesh 3D FEM models are to be analyzed.
In the strength analyses, the following loading conditions are to be used:
(3) General Cargo Load Patterns. The FEM analysis is to be performed in accordance
with the load patterns specified in Appendix IV, Part 9 . The load patterns included
in the Steel Vessel Rules have been developed to simulate the most severe load
effects in selected structural components. The actual loading patterns for the vessel
are to be reviewed to ensure that there are no other patterns producing more severe
loading. If any worse governing load patterns than those specified in the Steel
Vessel Rules exist, these load patterns are to be included in the analyses.
(4) Tank Test Loading Conditions. In addition to the specified load patterns and cargo
densities above, conditions representing tank testing are also to be investigated.
For ESF values of 1.0 and greater, the tank load patterns of Load Cases No. 5 and 6
specified in Appendix IV, Part 9 are to be analyzed considering static conditions and
seawater (Specific Gravity =1.025). The tanks are to be loaded considering the
actual height of the overflow pipe, which is not to be taken less than 2.44 m (8 feet)
above the deck at side. The external drafts for these Load Cases are to be taken as 25
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
87
percent of the design draft. However, notes (1) and (2) of the following paragraph are
applicable.
For ESF values of less than 1.0, the same load patterns of Load Cases No. 1 to 8
specified in Part 5, Chapter 1 of the Steel Vessel Rules are to be analyzed
considering static conditions and seawater (Specific Gravity =1.025). The tanks are
to be loaded considering the actual height of the overflow pipe, which is not to be
taken less than 2.44 m (8 feet) above the deck at side. The external drafts for these
Load Cases are to be taken as follows:
Load Case Percent of Design Draft
1 55 (1)
2 100 (3)
3 67
4 67
5 25 (1)
6 25 (1) (2)
7 100 (3)
8 100 (3)
1) Where the actual tank test condition with the tank loading pattern as
the center row of tanks results in a draft less than specified, the actual
tank test draft is to be used
2 ) For a vessel with two outer longitudinal bulkheads only (inner skin),
i.e., one tank across between the inner skin bulkheads, the minimum
actual tank test draft is to be used.
3 ) The actual tank test patterns will most likely not result in 100 percent
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
88
draft, but the 100 percent draft is specified as the design condition to
maximize external pressure loads.
Site tank tests are to be conducted. These tank test cases are to be
analyzed using the 1-year return period design operation condition
loads and a minimum specific gravity of cargo fluid of 0.9. The tank
pressure is to be calculated with the actual tank test pressure head on
site. The external drafts for these load cases are to be specified
according to the Loading or Operational Manual, or are to be agreed
upon between VR and the Owner or Client to determine the design
condition in terms of still water bending moments and shear forces
along the length of the cargo block.
(5) Transit Conditions. The transit condition is to be analyzed using the actual tank
loading patterns in association with the anticipated environmental conditions to be
encountered during the voyage (see 1.3, part 2).
1.2.7.3 Fatigue Analysis
For all vessels of 150 m and above, the extent of fatigue analysis required is
indicated in Appendix IV, Part 9 . For vessels of less than 150 m, the recognized
requirements are applicable.
The fatigue strength of welded joints and details at terminations, which may or may
not be located in highly stressed areas are to be assessed, especially where higher
strength steel is used. These fatigue and/or fracture mechanics analyses, based on the
combined effect of loading, material properties, and flaw characteristics are
performed to predict the service life of the structure and determine the most effective
inspection plan. Special attention is to be given to structural notches, cutouts,
bracket toes, and abrupt changes of structural sections.
Consideration is also to be given to the following analyses:
(1) The cumulated fatigue damage during the voyage from the fabrication or
previous site to the operation site is to be included in the overall fatigue
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
89
damage assessment.
(2) The stress range due to loading and unloading cycles is to be accounted for
in the overall fatigue damage assessment, if it is significant. For any
structural detail, a minimum criterion for computing the stress range is to
consider the tanks at 90 percent full load capacity and at its residual capacity,
with adjacent tanks also at their residual capacity. A maximum fluid specific
gravity of 0.9 is to be adopted for calculating the pressure range. The stress
range is also to account for pressure range variation due to sloshing of the
fluid inside the tank at the various filling levels, if it is significant.
1.2.7.4 Acceptance Criteria.
The total assessment of the structure is to be performed against the failure
modes of material yielding, buckling and ultimate strength and fatigue. The
reference acceptance criteria of each mode are given as follows:
(1) Material Yielding
The criteria are indicated in Appendix VI ,Part 9.
(2) Buckling and Ultimate Strength
The criteria are indicated in TCVN 6259-2:2003 .
(3) Fatigue
The required target fatigue life is 20 years.
In the absence of more detailed environmental data, stress ranges are to be
obtained in consideration of the unrestricted service environment. When the
site-specific wave environment is used and produces less severe fatigue demand
than the unrestricted service environment of the Steel Vessel Rules, credit can
be given to the less severe environment by increasing the expected fatigue life.
For site-specific environmental conditions producing more severe fatigue
demand than the Steel Vessel Rule basis, the site-specific environmental data
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
90
are to be used, and the calculated fatigue life is to be not less than 20 years
Due to the structural redundancy and relative ease of inspection inherent in
typical hull structures of ship-type vessels, there is no further need to apply
additional factors of safety above what is already built into the fatigue
classification curves cited in the above reference. However, for areas of the
structure which are non-inspectable or critical, such as in way of the
connections to the mooring or production systems ), additional factors of safety
should be considered.
For existing vessels that are employed in floating installation service, the
estimated remaining fatigue lives of the critical structural details are to be
assessed and the supporting calculations submitted for review. Special
consideration is to be given to the effects of corrosion and wastage on the
remaining fatigue life of existing structures.
Any areas determined to be critical to the structure are to be free of cracks. The
effects of stress risers should be determined and minimized. Critical areas may
require special analysis and survey.
1.2.8 Analysis and Design of Other Major Hull Structural Features
The analysis and design criteria to be applied to the other pertinent features of the
hull structural design are to conform to recognized practices acceptable to the
Bureau. For many ship-type installations, there will be a need to consider in the hull
design the interface between the position mooring system and the hull structure or
the effects of structural support reactions from deck mounted (or above deck)
equipment modules or both. When it is permitted to base the design of the ship-type
offshore installation on site-specific environmental conditions, reference is to be
made to 1.2.6 and Appendix 2, Part 9 regarding how load components can be
adjusted.
Criteria applicable to the position mooring (e.g., turret) structure itself is given in
1.4, Section 4, and the above (or on) deck equipment or module structure is
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
91
referred to in 1.7,Section 5
1.2.8.1 Position Mooring/Hull Interface
(1) Mooring/Hull Interface Modeling
A FEM analysis is to be performed and submitted for review. The modeling
technique employed should conform to that described in recognized standards.
(a) If the mooring system is of the turret or SPM type, external to the vessels
hull, the following applies:
1) Fore end mooring. The minimum extent of the model is from the fore end
of the vessel, including the turret structure and its attachment to the hull, to
a transverse plane after the aft end of the foremost cargo oil tank in the
vessel. The model can be considered fixed at the aft end of the model. The
loads modeled are to correspond to the worst-case tank loads, seakeeping
loads as determined for both the transit case and the on-site case, ancillary
structure loads, and, for the on-site case, mooring loads.
2) Aft end mooring. The minimum extent of the model is from the aft end of
the vessel, including the turret structure and its attachment to the hull, to a
transverse plane forward of the fore end of the aftmost cargo oil tank in the
hull. The model can be considered fixed at the fore end of the model. The
loads modeled are to correspond to the worst-case tank loads, seakeeping
loads as determined for both the transit case and the on-site case, ancillary
structure loads, and, for the on-site case, mooring loads.
(b) If the mooring arrangement is internal to the vessel hull (turret moored), the
following applies:
1) Fore end turret. The model is to extend from the fore end of the vessel into
the cargo tank or hold aft of the one containing the turret. The model can be
considered fixed at the aft end of the model. The loads modeled are to
correspond to the worst-case tank loads, seakeeping loads as determined for
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
92
both the transit case and the on-site case, ancillary structure loads, and for
the on-site case, mooring loads.
2) Midship turret. The model can be a 3-tank model similar to that described
in Appendix IV,Part 9 where the turret is located in the center tank of the
model. Hull girder loads are to be applied to the ends of the model. The
other loads that are modeled are to correspond to the worst-case tank loads,
seakeeping loads as determined for both the transit case and the on-site
case, ancillary structure loads, and, for the on-site case, mooring loads.
(c) For spread moored vessels
1) The local foundation structure and vessel structure are to be checked for the
given mooring loads using an appropriate FEM analysis. The mooring loads to
be used in the analysis are to be based on the breaking strength of the mooring
lines
(2) Net Scantlings for Mooring Interface Structure
A net thickness or scantling corresponds to the minimum strength capability
acceptable for classification, regardless of the design service life of the vessel, prior
to the addition of the Rules-specified design corrosion margin. The mooring
interface/hull structure analysis model is to use the design corrosion margin 10
percent of each of the as-built, gross scantlings, but need not exceed 1.5 mm. These
design corrosion margins are for use with the mooring/hull interface model and are
minimum values. They are different from the corrosion margins to be used in the
analyses specified in 1.2.7 . Should the design incorporate increased corrosion
margins, their beneficial effects can be appropriately accounted for in the design
evaluation.
The required net scantlings determined using these corrosion margins only apply in
way of the mooring structure, bounded transversely and longitudinally by watertight
bulkheads or shell plate. The net scantlings can be used for obtaining stress levels
for structure that is in way of any ancillary structure, such as flare towers or
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
93
production decks. All other areas are to be in compliance with TCVN 6259-2:2003
and applied section , 1.2.6 and 1.2.7 of this Guide .
(3) Acceptance Criteria Mooring/Hull Interface
The total assessment of the structure is to be performed against the failure modes of
material yielding, buckling and ultimate strength, and fatigue. The reference
acceptance criteria of each mode is given as the following:
(a) Material Yielding. The criteria are indicated in Appendix VI, Part 9
(b) Buckling and Ultimate Strength. The correlative criteria are indicated in TCVN
6259-2:2003.
(c) Fatigue: Mooring/Hull Interface. The required target fatigue life is 20 years.
However, due to the critical nature of these connections, additional factors of
safety may be needed. (Also see 1.4.7,Part 4.) The fatigue life of the hull
structure is to be investigated in accordance with recognized fatigue calculating
guideline and submitted for review as described below:
1) For vessels with a forward end mooring, the fatigue life of the vessel should
be investigated from the watertight bulkhead aft of the mooring to the fore end
of the vessel.
2) For vessels with mid body mooring, a three-tank analysis, where the mooring
is in the middle hold, is to be investigated
3) For aft end mooring, the fatigue life should be investigated from the watertight
bulkhead forward of the mooring to the aft end of the vessel.
Structural members in way of the turret structure or other mooring structure
are to be effectively connected to the adjacent structure in such a manner as to
avoid hard spots, notches and other harmful stress concentrations.
Special attention is to be given to cutouts, bracket toes and abrupt changes of
structural sections. These areas are considered to be critical to the vessel and
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
94
are to be free of cracks. The effects of stress risers in these areas are to be
determined and minimized.
1.2.8.2 Hull Structure to Resist Equipment Reaction Forces
The forces to be resisted by the hull structural elements in way of the equipment
supports are to be established by an acceptable method that accounts for the static
and expected motion (seakeeping) induced and other applicable load effects and the
appropriate combinations of these load components and effects. The strength of the
hull structural elements is to be based on the applicable criteria of the Steel Vessel
Rules. For vessels 150 meters (492 feet) in length and greater, the required strength is
specified in Appendix VI, Part 9 , and for vessel less than 150 meters in length,
reference is to be made to recognized Standards .
1.2.9 Marine Piping Systems
Marine piping systems are those systems that are required to conduct marine
operations and are not associated with the process facilities. These systems include,
but are not limited to, bilge, ballast, tank venting, sounding and fuel oil. Marine
piping systems on ship-type installations are to be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of TCVN 6259:2003.
1.2.10 Electrical Systems
Electrical Systems on ship-type installations are to comply with the applicable
requirements of TCVN 6259-4:2003 and applicable requirements in Appendix VII .
For area classification requirements, refer to Appendix VI, Part 9 of this Guide
1.2.10.1 Degree of protection for enclosure
Degree of protection of electrical equipment is against foreign bodies and liquid,
type of enclosure required for protection of equipment is to be suitable for the
intended location. Minimum degree of protection is shown as Table 3 3.
In order to define degree of protection shown in Table 3 3 , following regulation is
given. Degree of protection relating to protecting electrical equipment from falling of
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
95
foreign bodies and liquid into inside is defined by IP numeral with two followed
number.The first IP numeral indicate degree of protection of equipment from solid
object, the second IP numeral indicate degree of protection of equipment from liquid.
Details are given in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2.
Table 3-1 Degree of Protection Indicated by the first characteristic numeral
First IP
Numeral
Short Description Definition
0 Non-protected No special protection
1 Protected against solid
objects greater than 50 mm
Solid object exceeding 50 mm in diameter.
Solid object exceeding 50 mm in diameter.
objects greater than 2,5 mm
Tools, wires, etc., of diameter or thickness greater
than 2.5 mm.Solid objects exceeding 2.5 mm in
diameter.
Wires or strips of thickness greater than 1 mm.
Solid objects exceeding 1 mm in diameter.
5 Dust protected

Ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust
does not enter in sufficient quantity to interfere with
satisfactory operation of the equipment.
6 Dust-tight No ingress of dust

TCVN 6474 -3:2007
96
Table 3-2 Degree of Protection Indicated by the second characteristic numeral
Second
IP
Numeral
Short Description Definition
0 Non-protected No special protection
1 Protected against dripping
water
Dripping water (vertically falling drops) is to have
no harmful effect.
2 Protected against dripping
water when tilted up to 15
deg.
Vertically dripping water is to have no harmful
effect when the enclosure is tilted at any angle up to
15 deg. from its normal position.
3 Protected against spraying
water
Water falling as spray at an angle up to 60 deg.
from the vertical is to have no harmful effect.
4 Protected against splashing
water
Water splashed against the enclosure from any
direction is to have no harmful effect.
5 Protected against water jets Water projected by a nozzle against the enclosure
from any direction is to have no harmful effect.
6 Protected against heavy
seas
Water from heavy seas or water projected in
powerful jets is not to enter the enclosure in harmful
quantities.
7 Protected against the
effects of immersion
Ingress of water in a harmful quantity is not to be
possible when the enclosure is immersed in water
under defined conditions of pressure and time.
8 Protected against
submersion

The equipment is suitable for continuous
submersion in water under conditions which are to
be specified by the manufacturer.
Note: Normally, this will mean that the equipment
is hermetically sealed. However, with certain types
of equipment, it can mean that water can enter but
only in such a manner that it produces no harmful
effects.

TCVN 6474 -3:2007
97
TABLE 3-3 :Minimum Degree of Protection
Example Of Location Condition of Location
Switchboards, distribution boards, motor control
centers & controllers

Generators

Motors
Transformers, Converters
Lighting fixtures
Heating appliances
Accessories
(2)
Dry accommodation space Danger of touching live parts
only
IP20 - IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Control rooms Danger of dripping liquid
and/or moderate mechanical
damage

IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22
Machinery spaces above floor
plates
(5)
IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44

Steering gear rooms IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
Refrigerating machinery rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
Emergency machinery rooms IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
General store rooms IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22
Pantries IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP44
Provision rooms IP22 - IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22 IP22
Bathrooms & Showers Increased danger of liquid
and/or mechanical damage

- - - - IP34 IP44 IP55
Machinery spaces below floor
l t
- - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55
(3)
Closed fuel oil or lubricating oil
t
IP44 - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55
(3)
Ballast pump rooms Increased danger of liquid
and/or mechanical damage

IP44 - IP44 IP44 IP34 IP44 IP55
Refrigerated rooms - - IP44 - IP34 IP44 IP55
Galleys and Laundries IP44 - IP44 IP44 IP34 IP44 IP44
Open decks Exposure to heavy seas IP56 - IP56 - IP55 IP56 IP56
Bilge wells Exposure to submersion - - - - IPX8 - IPX8
Notes
1. Empty spaces shown with indicate installation of electrical equipment is not
recommended.
2. Accessory includes switches, detectors, junction boxes, etc.
3. Socket outlets are not to be installed in machinery spaces below the floor plates,
enclosed fuel and lubricating oil separator rooms or spaces requiring certified safe
type equipment.
1.2.11 Fire Fighting Systems and Equipment
Fire fighting systems and equipment for vessel service functions not associated with
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
98
the process facilities are to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
TCVN 6259-5:2003 . Fire fighting systems and equipment for protection of
hydrocarbon process and associated systems are to be in accordance with Appendix
VII, Section 9 .
1.2.12 Machinery
Machinery and equipment not associated with the process facilities are to be in
accordance with the applicable requirements of TCVN 6259-3:2003 . Machinery
forming a part of the hydrocarbon processing facilities are to be in accordance with
applicable requirements of Appendix VII, Part 9 . Refer to Section 5 of this Guide
regarding process related machinery.
1.2.13 Equipment
Equipment not associated with the process facilities are to be in accordance with the
applicable requirements of TCVN 6259-7B:2003 and TCVN 6259-2:2003 .
Equipment forming a part of the hydrocarbon processing facilities are to be in
accordance with applicable requirements of Appendix VII, Part 9 . Refer to Section 5
of this Guide regarding process related equipment .
1.2.14 Safety Equipment
See requirements in TCVN 6278:2003 and Appendix VII, Part 9 .
1.3 Column-stabilized Vessels
1.3.1 General
The design and construction of the lower hull, columns, deck and deckhouses of
column-stabilized type installations are to be based on all applicable requirements of
TCVN 5309-5319:2001 . However, the design criteria, as given in TCVN 5309-
5319:2001, can be modified to reflect the different structural performance and
demands expected of a vessel in ocean service, compared to a vessel positioned at a
particular site on a long-term basis.
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
99
1.3.2 Definitions
See Section 1 for the definition of criteria that constitute a column-stabilized vessel.
For vessels that are considered column-stabilized type, the definitions of primary
vessel characteristics can be found in TCVN 5309:2001.
1.3.3 Loading Criteria
A vessels modes of operation should be investigated using anticipated loads,
including gravity loads together with relevant environmental loads due to the effects
of wind, waves, currents, and, where deemed necessary by the Owner or designer,
the effects of earthquake, temperature, fouling, ice, etc.
A loading plan is to be prepared for each design. This plan is to show the maximum
uniform and concentrated loadings to be considered for all areas for each mode of
operation. The minimum deck loadings is shown in TCVN 5310:2001.
1.3.4 Wave Clearance
Unless deck structures are satisfactorily designed for wave impact, reasonable
clearance between the deck structures and the wave crests is to be ensured for all
afloat modes of operation, taking into account the predicted motion of the vessel
relative to the surface of the sea. Calculations, model test results or prototype
experiences are to be submitted for consideration.
1.3.5 Structural Design
The design of the vessel is to be based on the applicable portions of TCVN 5309-
5319:2001. Where the conditions at the installation site are less than those for full
ocean service that are the bases of the Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit Rules, the
design criteria for various components of the vessel structure may be reduced to
reflect these differences. However, when the installation site conditions produce
more arduous demands, it is mandatory that the design criteria be increased
appropriately.
1.3.5.1 Scantlings
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
100
Vessels scantlings, including deck (upper structure), columns and lower hulls are to
be designed in accordance with TCVN 5309-5319:2001 , with special attention to the
effects and control of corrosion.
1.3.5.2 Deckhouses
The design of the deckhouse is to comply with the requirements of TCVN 6259-2:
2005.
1.3.5.3 Helicopter Deck
The design of the helicopter deck is to comply with the requirements of TVCN
5310:2001and technical Regulation for helicopter deck on offshore installation.
1.3.5.4 Protection of Deck Openings
All deck openings, hatch covers and companionway sills are to comply with TCVN
6259-2:2005 .
1.3.5.5 Guards and Rails
Guards and rails are to comply with the requirements of TCVN 6259-2:2003 and
latest modifications.
1.3.5.6 Machinery and Equipment Foundations
Foundations for equipment subjected to high cyclic loading, such as mooring
winches, chain stoppers and foundations for rotating process equipment, are to be
analyzed to ensure satisfactory strength resistance. Local structure in way of
fairleads, winches, etc., forming part of the position mooring system is to be capable
of withstanding forces equivalent to the breaking strength of the mooring line.
1.3.5.7 Materials and Welding
Column stabilized vessels are to be constructed from steel selected in accordance
with TCVN 5317:2001 , including the topsides facilities (strength deck) where the
deck contributes to the strength of the vessel.
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
101
All fabrication and welding are to comply with the requirements in TCVN
5318:2001. The weld type and sizing are to be shown on the scantling drawings or in
the form of a welding schedule and are to comply with the Rules that govern the steel
selection.
1.3.6 Engineering Analysis of the Vessels Primary Structure
1.3.6.1 General
Document necessary to verify the structural strength of the vessel is to be submitted
for review. The criteria in this Subsection relate to the analyses required to verify the
scantlings selected in the basic design in 1.3.5 . Except as provided in TCVN 5309-
5319:2001, the results of analysis that are required in this subsection cannot be used
to reduce the scantlings established from 1.3.5 . Depending on the specific features of
the offshore installations, additional analyses to verify and help design other portions
of the vessel structural components will be required. Such additional analyses
include those for the deck structural components supporting deck-mounted
equipment and the vessel structure interface with the position mooring system.
Analysis criteria for those two situations are given in 1.3.7.
1.3.6.2 Strength Analysis of the Vessels Primary Structure
The primary structure of the vessel is to be analyzed using the loading and
environmental conditions stipulated below. Conditions representative of all modes of
operation are to be considered to determine critical cases. Calculations for critical
conditions are to be submitted for review. The analysis is to be performed using
recognized calculation methods and is to be fully documented and referenced. The
environmental loads are to be developed in accordance with 1.3 and 1.4 , Part 2
In the design of the vessels in-place strength, the following design environmental
conditions should be considered:
Severe Storm Condition
Environmental condition which produces a maximum response with a return
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
102
period up to and including 100 years. The design responses of a column-
stabilized vessel are prying/squeezing forces, torsion moments, longitudinal
shear forces between lower hulls and deck accelerations.
Normal Operations Condition
Environmental conditions that are expected to occur frequently during the service
life.
The possibility of fatigue damage due to cyclic loading is to be considered in the
design of the primary structures of a column-stabilized vessel. Special attention is to
be given to the major connections between the bracing members, column and deck.
Attention should also be given to structural notches, cutouts, brackets, toes and
abrupt changes of structural sections. A fatigue analysis using an appropriate loading
is to be performed to predict the service life of the vessel and determine the most
effective inspection plan.
1.3.6.4 Acceptance Criteria
The total assessment of the structure and details is to be performed against the failure
modes of material yielding, buckling and ultimate strength and fatigue. The
reference acceptance criteria of each mode is given as follows.
The criteria indicated in TCVN 5310:2001 should be used.
The criteria indicated in TCVN 6259-2:2003 should be used. Alternatively, the
criteria specified in other recognized standards can be used.
(3) Fatigue
The minimum allowable fatigue life is to be FS times the design service life,
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
103
where FS is the factor of safety. FS depends on the inspectability of the structure,
as well as the criticality of the structure. The FS values to be used in calculating
the minimum fatigue life are as follows:
FS =3.00 For areas that are easy to inspect and are non-critical areas.
FS =10 For areas that are non-inspectable or critical areas. The word critical
implies that failure of these structural items would result in progressive failure of
the structure and may lead to catastrophe.
For existing vessels, the remaining fatigue life of the vessels is to be assessed and
the supporting calculations submitted for review. Special consideration is to be
given to the effects of corrosion and wastage on the remaining fatigue life of
existing structures.
Any areas determined to be critical to the structure are to be free of cracks, and the
effects of stress risers is to be determined and minimized. Critical areas may
1.3.7 Analysis and Design of Other Major Structures
The analysis and design criteria to be applied to the other pertinent features of the
vessel structural design are to conform to recognized practices acceptable to the
Bureau. For the column-stabilized vessel, the following will need to be considered in
the vessel structure design: the interface between the position mooring system and
the vessel structure or the effects of the structural support reactions from deck-
mounted equipment modules.
1.3.7.1 Position Mooring/Vessel Interface
The local foundation structure and vessel structure is to be checked for the given
mooring loads using an appropriate FEA model. The mooring loads to be used in the
analysis are to be the breaking strength of the mooring lines. The interface structure
between the deck equipment or module structure and the vessel is to comply with the
requirements in 1.7, Part 5.
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
104
1.3.8 Stability
1.3.8.1 Transit Voyage Stability
During transit voyages to and from the operational site, the vessel is to meet the
stability requirements of TCVN 5309-5319:2001 .
1.3.8.2 On-Site Stability
All vessels are to have positive metacentric height ( GM) in calm water equilibrium
position for all afloat conditions, including temporary positions during fabrications,
installations, ballasting and deballasting.
All vessels are to have sufficient stability at intact, as well as damage, condition. The
intact and the damage stability to withstand the overturning effect of the force
produced by the defined operating intact wind, severe storm intact wind and
damaged wind are to be investigated in accordance with TCVN 5309-5319:2001
under which the vessel was classed. The wind velocities for calculating the wind
overturning moments are to be established using the site-specific environmental
report and are to be identified in the design basis. The wind velocities used in TCVN
5309-5319:2001 for unrestricted service are quoted below for reference.
Table 3.4 The wind velocities for unrestricted area
Conditions Minimum Wind Velocity
Damaged 25.8 m/s ( 50 knots)
Operating Intact 36.0 m/s ( 70 knots)
Severe Storm Intact 51.5 m/s (100 knots)
For the purpose of determining compliance with these stability requirements, it is to
be assumed that the vessel is floating free of mooring restraints. However,
detrimental effects of catenary mooring systems or of the thrusters for dynamically
positioned vessels are to be considered.
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
105
Vessels designed to ballast or deballast through designated draft ranges or zones
need only comply with the above positive metacentric height requirement when
ballasting or deballasting through these designated zones.
The Owner is responsible for ensuring that such operations are performed only with
proper loading conditions and during periods of acceptable weather.
Alternative stability criteria may be considered acceptable by the Bureau.
1.3.9 Marine Piping Systems
Marine piping systems are those systems (such as bilge, ballast, fuel oil and tank
venting) that are required to conduct marine operations and are not associated with
process facilities. Marine piping systems are to comply with TCVN 5309-
5319:2001.
Electrical systems are to comply with TCVN 5316:2001 and Appendix VII ,Part 9 .
For area classification requirements, refer to Appendix VII , Part 9 of this Guide.
1.3.11 Fire Fighting Systems and Equipment
Fire fighting systems and equipment for vessel service functions not associated with
the process facilities are to be in accordance with TCVN 5314:2001 . Fire fighting
systems and equipment for protection of hydrocarbon process and associated systems
are to be in accordance with Appendix VII , Section 9 .
1.3.12 Machinery and Equipment
Machinery and equipment not associated with the process facilities are to be in
accordance with the applicable requirements of TCVN 5311 and 5315:2001 .
Machinery and equipment forming a part of the hydrocarbon processing facilities are
to be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Appendix VII , Part 9 .See
Part 5 of this Guide regarding machinery and equipment associated with the process
facilities .
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
106
1.3.13 Safety Equipment
See requirements in TCVN 5319:2001 and Appendix VII, Part 9 .
1.4 Existing Tanker Hull Structures (Ordinary Conversions)
1.4.1 Introduction
Regulation 1.1 and 1.2 apply to a new-build hull structure or a major conversion of
an existing vessel. Major conversion is conversion that affects a principal dimension
of the hull. Regulation 1.4 is applied for the typically more common conversion of
an existing tanker to a ship-type FPI .
The direct application of the criteria contained in 1.1 and 1.2 as the basis of
acceptance of the hull structure of an existing tanker for FPI service is fully
permissible . However, modified acceptance criteria, given in 1.4, may be used for
some aspects of the vessels structural design as an Ordinary Conversion for FPI
service. Regulation 1.4 applies to both the Change of Class Designation and
Transfer of Class situations where the acceptance of the existing vessels hull
structure as an Ordinary Conversion is pursued. Change of Class Designation
refers to an existing tanker classed by the Bureau which is being converted to FPI
service. Another situation, the Transfer of Class, refers to a vessel transferring into
the Bureaus classification from another Society.
1.4.2 General
All applicable criteria contained in this FPI Guide are to be used in the classification
of an Ordinary Conversion, except that some criteria (primarily in1.1 and 1.2 ) can
be modified. Specific modifications are given below for the affected criteria.
The major criteria differences for the Ordinary Conversion arise in the acceptance
of the basic design of the hull structure. The basic design of the hull structure
relates to hull girder longitudinal strength and local scantling selection.
The minimum target fatigue life of the hull structure is also fundamentally different
for a converted tanker . For a new-build, the minimum target fatigue life is 20 years;
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
107
for an existing vessel to be converted to FPI service, the minimum target fatigue life
can be less than 20 years .
1.4.3 Alternative Acceptance Criteria for the Basic Design of the Hull Structure
1.4.3.1 General
For a vessel being converted from a tanker to FPI service, the design and
construction of the existing hull, superstructure and deckhouses are to meet the
applicable criteria of TCVN 6259 at the time of original build, or as applicable, the
criteria presented in 1.4.7 below. In order to be eligible to apply this approach,Two
flowing condition is to be satisfied, as described in Appendix 1,Section 9 of this
Guide (which reflect expected conditions from the long-term mooring of the vessel at
an offshore site), are 1.0 or less, and 1.2.5 on the required hull girder longitudinal
strength is satisfied. If either of these conditions is not met, then the application of
this alternative approach is not considered valid. In that case, the unmodified FPI
Guide (i.e., Regulation 1.1 and 1.2 ) criteria or an alternative determined in
consultation with the Bureau is to be applied.
In addition, it is expected that the applicable and most recent versions of the criteria
contained in the Load Line, SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions issued by the
International Maritime Organization are to be considered.
1.4.3.2 Structural Design of the Hull
Steel renewals to be performed at the time of conversion must be carefully
considered. Estimation of corrosion rates are to be made, taking into account any
future corrosion protection measures to be used, previous service experience, the
type and temperatures of stored fluids and the other variables significantly affecting
the corrosion rate. The anticipated corrosion predicted to occur over the proposed
on-site life of the FPI is to be considered in the design.
The loads arising from the static tank testing condition are also to be directly
considered in design. It should be noted that in some instances such cases might
control the design, especially when the overflow heights are greater than normally
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
108
encountered in oil transport service or the severity of environmentally-induced load
components and cargo-specific gravity are less than usual.
1.4.3.3 Engineering Analyses of the Hull Structure
(1) General
Documentation necessary to verify the structural adequacy of the vessel is to be
submitted for review.
Depending on the specific features of the offshore installation, additional analyses to
verify and to help design other portions of the hull structure will be required. Such
additional analyses include those for the deck structural components supporting
deck-mounted equipment and the hull structure interface with the position mooring
system. Analysis criteria for these two situations are given in Part 6.
Provided a scantling of the existing tanker is not below its renewal limit, or if it is to
be renewed at the time of conversion, then it can be modeled in the structural
analyses in the conventional SafeHull manner. That is, use the net scantling,
which is the as-built value minus the current Rule (SafeHull based) specified
nominal design corrosion value.
(2) Strength Analysis of the Hull Structure
Steel renewals to be performed at the time of conversion must be carefully
considered. Estimation of corrosion rates are to be made, taking into account any
future corrosion protection measures to be used, previous service experience, the
type and temperatures of stored fluids and the other variables significantly affecting
the corrosion rate. The anticipated corrosion predicted to occur over the proposed
on-site life of the FPI is to be considered in the design.
For vessels of 150 meters (492 feet) in length and above, the extent of Finite Element
Method (FEM) strength analysis requirements are indicated in Appendix III,Part 9
of the Steel Vessel Rules. For vessels less than 150 m in length of double hull
construction or of unusual design, see Steel Vessel Rules for Finite Element Method
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
109
(FEM) analysis requirements. When it is permitted that the design can be based on
site-specific environmental conditions, the load components from the Steel Vessel
Rules to be used in the strength analyses can be adjusted as explained in 1.2.6 and
Appendix 2, Part 9.
Generally, the strength analysis is carried out to determine the load distribution in the
structure. An appropriate three-dimensional FEM model is to be analyzed for this
purpose. To determine the stress distribution in major supporting structures,
particularly at intersections of two or more members, two-dimensional fine mesh
FEM models are to be analyzed using the boundary displacements and load from the
3D FEM model. To examine stress concentrations such as at intersections of
longitudinal stiffeners with transverses and at cut outs, fine mesh 3D FEM models
are to be analyzed.
In the strength analyses, the following loading conditions are to be considered:
i. General Cargo Load Patterns : as mentioned above, when the basic
design of the vessel is accepted as an Ordinary Conversion, this analysis
may not be required. Where it is intended to perform this analysis, see the
unmodified text of this paragraph appearing in 1.2.7.
ii. Tank Test Conditions : analysis for these conditions is required; see the
unmodified text of this paragraph appearing in 1.2.7.2. (4)
iii. Transit Condition : analysis to demonstrate the adequacy of the hull
structure during the transit to the installation site is required; see the
unmodified text of this paragraph appearing in 1.2.7.2.(8).
For all vessels of 150 m and above, the extent of fatigue analysis required is
indicated in Appendix, Part 5 of the Steel Vessel Rules. For vessels of less than 150
m, the requirements are indicated in Appendix, Part 5 of the Steel Vessel Rules.
The fatigue strength of welded joints and details at terminations, which may or may
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
110
not be located in highly stressed areas are to be assessed, especially where higher
strength steel is used. These fatigue and/or fracture mechanics analyses, based on the
combined effect of loading, material properties, and flaw characteristics are
performed to predict the service life of the structure and determine the most effective
inspection plan. Special attention is to be given to structural notches, cutouts,
bracket toes, and abrupt changes of structural sections.
Consideration is also to be given to the following analyses:
(1) The cumulated fatigue damage during the voyage from the fabrication or
previous site to the operation site is to be included in the overall fatigue
damage assessment.
(2) The stress range due to loading and unloading cycles is to be accounted for in
the overall fatigue damage assessment, if it is significant. For any structural
detail, a minimum criterion for computing the stress range is to consider the
tanks at 90 percent full load capacity and at its residual capacity, with
adjacent tanks also at their residual capacity. A maximum fluid specific
gravity of 0.9 is to be adopted for calculating the pressure range. The stress
range is also to account for pressure range variation due to sloshing of the
fluid inside the tank at the various filling levels, if it is significant.
1.4.3.5 Acceptance Criteria
The total assessment of the structure is to be carried out against the failure modes of
acceptance criteria of each mode are given as follows.
Criteria is given in Appendix VI ,Section 9 .
Criteria given in TCVN 6259-2:2003 is applicable.Criteria in recognized standard
is applicable
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
111
(3) Fatigue
For existing vessels that are employed in FPI service, the estimated remaining
fatigue lives of the critical structural details are to be assessed and the supporting
calculations submitted for review. Consideration is to be given to the effects of
corrosion and wastage on the remaining fatigue life of existing structures.
The required design fatigue life is 20 years. This design fatigue life can be
modified for existing classed tankers converting to FPI service. The minimum
acceptable design fatigue life for the FPI is the greatest of:
The on-site design life of the FPI,
The time to the next Special Survey or five years.
In the absence of more detailed environmental data, stress ranges are to be
obtained in consideration of the unrestricted service environment.
The fatigue strength is based on a cumulative damage theory, which infers that the
structure is likely to experience a fatigue failure after a finite number of stress
cycles occur. This is especially important when looking at FPI conversions. The
vessel has already experienced cycles of stress during the ship phase of its life
and it will experience additional cycles during the FPI phase of its life. The
basic concept is to keep the total number of cycles below the number that results
in failure.
For FPIs converted from tankers, an analysis procedure accounting for both the
ship and FPI phases of the total fatigue life is acceptable. First, the historical
cumulative fatigue damage up to the time of conversion is to be calculated through
realistic temporal weighting of wave environments experienced along the service
routes during the service life of the vessel. This will provide an estimate of the
remaining fatigue life of the structural members at the time of conversion.
Second, the expected cumulative fatigue damage is to be calculated using site-
specific wave environment and operational conditions. This will establish the
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
112
basis for comparison of expected fatigue life of the hull structure and the
remaining life of the members being investigated.
When the route and site-specific wave environments are used and they produce
less severe fatigue demands than the unrestricted service environment of the Steel
Vessel Rules, credit can be given to the less severe environment by increasing the
expected fatigue life. For site-specific environmental conditions producing more
severe fatigue demand than the Steel Vessel Rule basis, the site-specific
environmental data are to be used.
Due to the structural redundancy and relative ease of inspection inherent in typical
hull structures of ship-type vessels, there is no further need to apply additional
factors of safety above what is already built into the fatigue classification curves
cited in the above reference. However, for areas of the structure which are non-
inspectable or critical, such as in way of the connections to the mooring or
production systems additional factors of safety should be considered.
Any areas determined to be critical to the structure are to be free of cracks, and the
effects of stress risers should be determined and minimized. Critical areas may
For an existing classed tanker being converted to FPI service, the minimum
fatigue lives of the structural components covered in 1.4.3.6 and 1.4.3.7 can be
changed from 20 years to the alternative controlling value mentioned above .
1.4.3.6 Acceptance Criteria Mooring/Hull Interface
The total assessment of the structure is to be performed against the failure modes of
acceptance criteria of each mode is given as the following:
Criteria is given in Appendix VI ,Part 9 .
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
113
Criteria given in TCVN 6259-2:2003 is applicable .Recognized standard is
applicable .
(3) Fatigue
The required target fatigue life is 20 years. However, due to the critical nature
of these connections, additional factors of safety may be needed. (Also see
Part 7.) The fatigue life of the hull structure is to be investigated in accordance
with recognized standard and submitted for review as described below:
i. For vessels with a forward end mooring, the fatigue life of the vessel
should be investigated from the watertight bulkhead aft of the mooring to
the fore end of the vessel.
ii. For vessels with mid body mooring, a three-tank analysis, where the
mooring is in the middle hold, is to be investigated.
iii. For aft end mooring, the fatigue life should be investigated from the
watertight bulkhead forward of the mooring to the aft end of the vessel.
Structural members in way of the turret structure or other mooring structure are
to be effectively connected to the adjacent structure in such a manner as to avoid
hard spots, notches and other harmful stress concentrations.
Special attention is to be given to cutouts, bracket toes and abrupt changes of
structural sections. These areas are considered to be critical to the vessel and are
to be free of cracks. The effects of stress risers in these areas are to be determined
and minimized.
1.4.3.7 Turret Mooring
A turret mooring system is one type of station keeping system for a floating
installation and can either be installed internally or externally. Both internal and
external turret mooring systems will allow the vessel to weathervane around the
turret. The mooring lines are fixed to the sea bottom by anchors or piles.
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
114
For an internal turret system, the turret is supported in the vessel by a system of
bearings. The loads acting on the turret will pass through the bearing system into the
vessel. Typically, a roller bearing is located near the vessel deck level, and radial
sliding bearing is located near the keel of the vessel.
For an external turret mooring system, the vessel is extended to attach the turret
mooring system at the end of the vessel.
The loads acting on an internal turret system include those basic loads induced by the
mooring lines, risers, gravity, buoyancy, inertia and hydrostatic pressure. Other
loads, such as wave slam and loads resulting from misalignment and tolerance, that
may have effect on the turret should also be considered in the design. In establishing
the controlling turret design loads, various combinations of vessel loading conditions
ranging from the full to minimum storage load conditions, wave directions, and both
collinear and non-collinear environments are to be considered. The mooring loads
and loads applied to the external turret structure are transferred through its bearing
system into the vessel. The load range and combinations to be considered and
analysis methods are similar to those stated for an internal turret mooring system,
with additional consideration of environmentally-induced loads on the turret
structure
A structural analysis using finite element method is required to verify the sufficient
strength of the turret structure. The allowable von Mises stress of the turret structure
is to be 0.6 of the yield strength for the operational intact mooring design conditions,
as specified in 1.3,Part 2. A one-third increase in the allowable stress is allowed for
the design storm intact mooring design conditions and for the design storm one-line
broken mooring condition to verify the turret structure mooring attachment locations
and supporting structure.
(Note: the yield strength is to be based on the specified minimum yield point or 72
percent of the specified minimum tensile strength, whichever is the lesser.)
The buckling strength check for the turret structures is to be performed using
requirement in TCVN 6259-2:2003 or recognized standard . A fatigue evaluation of
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
115
the turret system using a spectral method or other proven approaches is needed to
determine the fatigue lives for the turret components. Fatigue life of the turret should
not be less than three times the design life for inspectable areas and 10 times for
uninspectable areas.
1.4.4 Assessing the Basic Design of the Hull Structure
1.4.4.1 General
The Ordinary Conversion approach relies on a review of the hulls basic design.
The review consists of an assessment of the hull girder strength and midship region
scantling review of local plating and plating stiffeners that directly contribute to the
hull girder strength. Two major purposes for this review are to assess the adequacy
of the hull girder and local strength, and to benchmark the values upon which local
scantling renewals are to be based
1.4.4.2 Basic Design Review Acceptance Criteria
The review of the basic design of an existing hull structure, which is applicable to a
tanker classed for unrestricted service, does not account for the increased or reduced
local structural element strength requirements that could result from the long-term,
moored operation of the vessel at an offshore site. The approach to the design review
also allows variations in the acceptance criteria that can be based on:
The Bureaus Rules from the year of build of the vessel with the Bureaus
permissible corrosion limits for renewal; or
The Bureaus Current Rules with the Bureaus permissible corrosion limits for
renewal; or
The prior IACS members approved scantlings using that societys permissible
corrosion limits.
The combination of the variety of ways to review local scantlings and the
permissibility to account for site-dependent effects on global and local hull structural
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
116
strength requirements can lead to a range of acceptable procedures.
If it is desired to account for the on-site environmental effects and how these affect
the required scantlings, it will be necessary to compute the required scantlings on this
basis.
1.4.5 Optional: Time to Steel Renewal Assessment
The reviews and assessments described above will establish: the notional
acceptability of hull girder strength and existing scantlings, structural areas and
components requiring renewal and the limits to which structural areas and
components may corrode before requiring renewal. However, these review and
analysis procedures in themselves do not predict how much time in operation it may
take before structural steel renewal limits could be reached. In a case where the
design operational life is relatively long, the assumed corrosion rate is relatively fast
or there are only small differences between the actual scantlings and the renewal
limits, it could be very important to the Operator to pursue a hull structure life
assessment. This should be done to better assure freedom from disruption in
operation that might arise over the need to perform steel renewals during the
operational life of the FPI. It should be noted that this type of analysis is suggested,
but is not required for classification.
1.4.6 Survey Requirements for an Ordinary Conversion
1.4.6.1 Conversion Survey Requirements
(1) Drydocking Survey
The vessel is to be placed on drydock and surveyed in accordance with the
requirements of 1.4, Part 8.
(2) Special Survey of Hull
A Special Periodical Survey of Hull, appropriate to the age of the vessel, is
to be carried out in accordance with 1.7, Part 8. All requirements for Close-
up Survey and thickness measurements are to be applied.
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
117
(3) Modifications
All modifications to the vessel are to be carried out in accordance with VR-
approved drawings and to the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor. In
general, the IACS Shipbuilding and Repair Quality Standard (SARQS)
requirements are to be followed unless a recognized shipyard or national
standard is already established in the shipyard.
1.4.6.2 Structural Repairs/Steel Renewal
All renewed material should be replaced by steel of the same or higher grade and to
the approved design scantling or greater.
1.4.6.3 Bottom Plate Pitting repair
The following repair recommendations apply to pitting found in both ballast and
cargo tank bottom plating.
(1) Repair Recommendations
There are four main approaches used for dealing with severe bottom pitting.
Partially Crop and Renew Affected Bottom Plating. Partial cropping and
renewal is primarily a matter of: proper welding technique, selection of an
adequately sized plate insert and the appropriate nondestructive
examination (NDE) of repaired areas.
Clean Pitted Areas and Cover with Special Coating. Cleaning out and
covering with special coating without use of filler or weld build-up need
only be limited by the maximum allowable depth of the pits (or allowable
minimum remaining thickness of the bottom plating) permitted from a
strength or pollution risk standpoint. The allowable loss of bottom cross-
sectional area must also be considered.
Clean Pitted Areas and Fill with Plastic Compound. Use of plastic
compound filler, such as epoxy, can be considered similar to above
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
118
method.
Fill by welding. Filling with welding warrants more serious
consideration. Suggested welding practices for bottom plating are noted
below.
(2) Pitting up to 15% of Bottom Plating Thickness
No immediate remedial action is necessary, however, if the surrounding tank
bottom is specially coated, corrosion progress in the pitted areas may be very
rapid due to the area ratio effect of protected versus non-protected surfaces,
therefore, as applicable, the coating is to be repaired.
(3) Scattered Pitting Up To 33% (1/3t) of Bottom Plating Thickness
Those pitting may be filled with epoxy or other suitable protective
compounds, provided the loss of area at any transverse section of the strake in
question does not exceed 10%. Any areas that have been repaired by this
method must be mapped and noted for close-up survey in the Survey and
Inspection Plan .
(4) Pitting of Any Depth may be Welded, Provided :
Pitting may be welded, provided there is at least 6 mm (0.25 in.) remaining
original plating thickness at the bottom of the cavity and there is at least 75
mm (3 in.) between adjacent pit welding areas. The maximum nominal
diameter of any pit repaired by welding may not exceed 300 mm (12 in.).
(5) Requirements for the Welding of Pits
Pit Welding. It is recommended that pit welding in bottom plating be built
up at least 3 mm (0.125 in.) above the level of the surrounding plating and
then ground flush.
Surface Preparation. Pitted areas are to be thoroughly cleaned of rust, oil
and cargo residues prior to welding.
TCVN 6474 -3:2007
119
Filler Metal. When welding, the filler metal grade appropriate to the pitted
base metal and preheating, if applicable, are to be employed.
Layer of Welding Metal. A layer of weld metal is to be deposited along a
spiral path to the bottom center of the pitted excavation. The slag is to be
completely removed and the next successive layer is to be similarly
deposited to build up the excavation at least 3 mm
Nondestructive Examination. All welds to pitted areas in bottom plating
are to be subject to nondestructive examination with particular attention to
boundaries of the welded areas and at intersections of the welded areas
and existing structural welding. Also, for welds of higher-strength steels,
the NDE method is to be suitable for detecting sub-surface defects
Doublers. Fitting of a doubler over pits is not considered a satisfactory
repair.
1.5 Tension Leg Platforms
Tension Leg Platforms is to be designed according to recognized Standards .
1.6 Spar Vessels
Spar Vessels is to be designed according to recognized Standards .

TCVN 6474 -3:2007
120

BLANK PAGE
121

Second Edition

PART 4: POSITION MOORING SYSTEM

Reference documents and definitions: See Part 1, TCVN 6474-1:2007 and this Part
The position mooring system includes the mooring, anchoring and dynamic
positioning (if any) systems. The purpose of the position mooring system is to keep
the Floating Installation on station at a specific site. The Position Mooring System
includes mooring lines, connectors and hardware, winches, piles, anchors and
thrusters. For a single point mooring system, the turret, turntable, disconnecting
system, buoy, anchoring legs, etc., are also part of the system.
1. Mooring system
1.1. Definitions
Typically, there are two types of position mooring systems: conventional spread
mooring and single point mooring, as defined in Part 1. Thruster-assisted systems
are defined in Part 1, Item 2.5.4.
1.1.1. Spread Mooring
A spread mooring is a system with multiple catenary mooring lines anchored to
piles or drag anchors at the sea bed. The other end of each line is individually
attached to winches or stoppers on the vessel through fairleads as necessary. A
catenary mooring line may have one or more line segments, in-line buoy(s) (spring
TCVN 6474-4:2007
122

buoy) or sinker(s) (clumped weight) along the line.
1.1.2. Single Point Mooring (SPM)
A single point mooring allows the vessel to weathervane. Three typical types of
single point mooring systems that are commonly used are described below:
1.1.2.1. CALM (catenary anchor leg mooring): A catenary anchor leg mooring system
consists of a large buoy anchored by catenary mooring lines. The vessel is moored
to the buoy by soft hawser(s) or a rigid yoke structure.
1.1.2.2. SALM (single anchor leg mooring): A single anchor leg mooring system consists
of an anchoring structure with built-in buoyancy at or near the water surface and is
itself anchored to the seabed by an articulated connection.
1.1.2.3. Turret Mooring: A turret mooring system consists of a number of mooring legs
attached to a turret that is designed to act as part of the vessel, allowing only
angular relative movement of the vessel to the turret, so that the vessel may
weathervane. The turret may be mounted internally within the vessel or externally
from the vessel bow or stern. Typically, a spread mooring arrangement connects
the turret to the seabed.
1.1.2.4. Yoke Arm: A yoke arm is a structure at the end of the vessel that only allows
angular relative movement between the vessel and the mooring attachment to the
seabed.
The above mentioned types of single mooring system are illustrated in Part 1.
1.2. System Conditions
The various conditions of a Floating Installation which are important for the
designer to consider are as follows:
1.2.1. Intact Design
A condition with all components of the system intact and exposed to an
environment as described by the design environmental condition (DEC).
TCVN 6474-4:2007
123

1.2.2. Damaged Case with One Broken Mooring Line
A condition with any one mooring line broken at the design environmental
condition (DEC) that would cause maximum mooring line load for the system. The
mooring line subjected to the maximum load in intact extreme conditions when
broken might not lead to the worst broken mooring line case. The designer should
determine the worst case by analyzing several cases of broken mooring line,
including lead line broken and adjacent line broken cases. For a disconnectable
mooring system with quick release system, the mooring analysis for a broken line
case may not be required. For unusual (non-symmetric) mooring pattern, mooring
analysis for the broken line case for the disconnectable environmental condition
may be required.
For a system utilizing the SALM concept, the case with one broken mooring line is
not relevant. A case considering loss of buoyancy due to damage of a compartment
of the SALM structure should be analyzed for position mooring capability.
The loss of thruster power or mechanical failure on thruster-assisted position
mooring systems will be considered on a case-by-case basis.
1.2.3. Transient Condition with One Broken Mooring Line
A condition with one mooring line broken (usually the lead line) in which the
moored vessel exhibits transient motions (overshooting) before it settles at a new
equilibrium position. The transient condition can be an important consideration
when proper clearance is to be maintained between the moored vessel and nearby
structures. An analysis for this condition under the design environmental condition
(DEC) is required. The effect of increased line tensions due to overshoot upon
failure of one mooring line (or thruster or propeller if mooring is power-assisted)
should also be considered.
1.3. Mooring Analysis
The analysis of a mooring system of a Floating Installation includes the
TCVN 6474-4:2007
124

determination of mean environmental forces and the extreme response of the vessel
in the DEC (design environmental condition, see in Part 2, Item 1.4) and the
corresponding mooring line tension. A moored system is a dynamic system that is
subjected to steady forces of wind, current and mean wave drift force, as well as
wind and wave-induced dynamic forces. Calculations of the maximum mooring
system loading are to consider various relative directions of the wind, wave and
current forces.
Depending on the level of sophistication and analysis objectives, quasi-static,
quasi-dynamic (begins with calculating the low-frequency responses of the moored
vessel followed by superposition of the wave-frequency motions) and dynamic
analysis methods may be used. Both frequency and time domain approaches are
acceptable. The designer should determine the extreme vessel offset and line
tension in a manner consistent with the chosen method of analysis.
For the final design of a permanent mooring system, the dynamic analysis method
is to be employed to account for mooring line dynamics. For deepwater operations
with large numbers of production risers, the mooring system analysis should take
into account the riser loads, stiffness and damping due to significant interactions
between the vessel/mooring system and riser system.
1.3.1. Mean Environmental Forces and Moments
The calculation of steady forces and yawing moments due to wind and current are
outlined in Part 2. The available methods of calculating hydrodynamic
characteristics and hydrodynamic loading are also indicated. The drift forces and
yawing moments on a moored vessel consist of a mean wave drift force, along with
the slowly varying oscillatory drift force at or near the natural period of the spring-
mass system of the moored vessel. The mean and oscillatory low frequency drift
forces may be determined by model tests or using hydrodynamic computer
programs benchmarked against model test results or other data.
Designers may use API RP 2SK for estimating purposes, if applicable, that
TCVN 6474-4:2007
125

provides mean drift force charts for ship type vessels with lengths from 122 m (400
feet) to 165 m (540 ft) and less general information for column stabilized vessels.
Vessel-specific information is to be provided based on appropriate analysis or
model testing or both.
1.3.2. Maximum Offset and Yaw Angle of the Vessel
The wave-induced vessel dynamic responses can be calculated by the methods
outlined in Part 2, Item 1.4.5.2. The maximum offset consists of static offset due to
wind, current and wave (steady drift), and both wave and wind-induced dynamic
motions (high and low frequency). The maximum responses of surge, sway and
yaw are to be determined, as follows, in accordance with API RP 2SK:
(max) ( )
max
( ) (max)
max
mean lf wf sig
mean lf sig wf
S S S
S
S S S
+ +
=

+ +

trong :
S
mean
= mean vessel offset due to wind, current and mean (steady) drift
force (m)
S
lf(sig)
= significant single amplitude low frequency motion (m)
S
lf(max)
= maximum values of low frequency motion (m)
S
wf(sig)
= significant single amplitude wave frequency motion (m)
S
wf(max)
= maximum values of wave frequency motion (m)
Alternatively, the maximum excursion can be determined through model tests.
The maximum values of low frequency motion, S
lf(max)
and wave frequency motion,
S
wf(max)
are typically calculated by multiplying the corresponding significant single
amplitude values by a factor C that is to be calculated as follows:
1
2
2ln
a
C N
T
N
T
=
=

where:
TCVN 6474-4:2007
126

T = specified storm duration (seconds), minimum of 10,800 seconds
(i.e., 3 hours). For areas with longer storm duration (e.g., a
monsoon area), a higher value of T may need to be considered.
T
a
= average response zero up-crossing period (seconds).
For low frequency components, T
a
can be taken as the natural period, T
n
of the
vessel with mooring system. T
n
can be estimated from the vessel mass (or mass
moment of inertia for yaw motion), m (including added mass or mass moment of
inertia for yaw motion), and mooring system stiffness, k for lateral and yaw
motions at the vessel's mean position and equilibrium heading as follows:

The quantities m and k are to be in consistent units.
Note: The above formula may not be applicable for C for estimating either wave
frequency or low frequency motions. Refer to API RP 2SK for statistical limits on
the value of C and applicable recognized industry standards.
Other parameters affecting the low frequency motions, such as system stiffness and
damping forces, are to be calibrated and the supporting data submitted to VR for
review.
1.3.3. Maximum Line Tension
The mean tension in a mooring line corresponds to the mean offset and equilibrium
heading of the vessel. The design (maximum) mooring line tension, T
max
is to be
determined as outlined in API RP 2SK and is summarized below:
(max) ( )
max
( ) (max)
max
mean lf wf sig
mean lf sig wf
T T T
T
T T T
+ +
=

+ +

where:
T
mean
= mean mooring line tension due to wind, current and mean
2
n
m
T
k
=
TCVN 6474-4:2007
127

(steady) drift force (N)
T
lf(sig)
= mean mooring line tension due to wind, current and mean
(steady) drift force (N)
T
wf(sig)
= significant single amplitude wave frequency tension (N)
The maximum values of low frequency tension, T
lf(max)
and wave frequency tension,
T
wf(max)
are to be calculated in the same procedure as that of obtaining the motions
at wave frequency and low frequency described in Item 1.3.2.
1.3.4. Mooring Line Fatigue Analysis
The fatigue life of mooring lines is to be assessed using the T-N approach, using a
T-N curve that gives the number of cycles, N to failure for a specific tension range,
T. The fatigue damage ratio, D
i
for a particular sea state, i is estimated in
accordance with the Miner's Rule, as follows:
i
i
i
n
D
N
=

where:
n
i
= number of cycles within the tension range interval, i for a given
sea state
N
i
= number of cycles to failure at tension range, i as given by the
appropriate T-N curve
The cumulative fatigue damage, D for all of the expected number of sea states, NN
(identified in a wave scatter diagram), is to be calculated as follows:
1
NN
i
i
D D
=
=

D is not to exceed unity for the design life, which is the field service life multiplied
by a factor of safety, as specified in Table 4-4.
It is recommended that a detailed fatigue analysis following the procedure outlined
in Part 7.5 of API RP 2SK be performed for the permanent mooring system.
TCVN 6474-4:2007
128

The fatigue life of each mooring line component is to be considered. T-N curves for
various line components are to be based on fatigue test data and a regression
analysis.
1.4. Mooring Line Design
The mooring lines are to be designed with the factors of safety specified in Table 4-
4 with respect to the breaking strength and fatigue characteristics of mooring lines.
These factors of safety are dependent on the design conditions of the system, as
well as the level of analyses. Allowances for corrosion and abrasion of a mooring
line should also be taken into consideration.
Table 4-4: Factor of Safety for Anchoring Lines
Factor of Safety
All Intact
Dynamic Analysis (DEC) 1.67
Quasi-Static (DEC) 2.00
One broken Line (at New Equilibrium Position)
One broken Line (Transient)
Mooring Component Fatigue Life w.r.t. Design Service
Life
Inspectable areas 3.00
Non-inspectable and Critical Areas 10.00
1.5. Hawser Loads
Hawsers that are used to temporarily secure vessels to the component which is
permanently anchored to the seabed are to meet the requirements of TCVN
6809:2001.
TCVN 6474-4:2007
129

1.6. Dynamic Positioning Systems
Dynamic positioning systems installed for position mooring purposes will be
subject to approval in accordance with the requirements of TCVN 5311:2001 or
applicable recognized standards.
1.7. Thruster Assisted Mooring Systems
Where Floating Installations are equipped with thrusters to assist the mooring
system, the thrusters are subject to approval by VR or applicable recognized
standards. The contribution of the thrusters in the mooring system design will be
reviewed on a case-by-case basis.
1.8. Mooring Equipment
Mooring equipment for Floating Installations includes winches, windlasses, chain,
wire rope, in-line buoys and fairleads. Anchors and single point mooring
mechanical systems are addressed elsewhere in this Part.
For the review of mooring equipment, VR will apply the requirements in published
TCVN/ relevant Guide for such equipment, are listed below:
Buoyancy Tanks ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
Chain TCVN 6259-7B:2003 and TCVN 5311:2001
Winches and Windlasses TCVN 5311:2001
Wire Rope API Spec 9A and RP 9B
In general, the design load for the fairlead and its connection to the vessel is the
breaking strength of the mooring line.
Chain stoppers used in position mooring systems are to be designed for the
breaking strength of the mooring line. The fatigue life for inspectable chain
stoppers is not to be less than three times the service life. For chain stoppers that
cannot be readily inspected, the fatigue life is to be at least 10 times the service life.
TCVN 6474-4:2007
130

The chain stoppers are to be function tested at the specified proof load to the
satisfaction of the attending Surveyor.
2. Anchor Holding Power
Different types of foundation systems used for floating installations are drag
anchors, pile anchors, vertically loaded anchors (VLAs) and suction piles. Gravity
boxes, grouted piles, templates, etc., may also be used and are considered to be
within the scope of classification.
2.1. Drag Anchor
For a mooring system with drag anchors, the mooring line length should be
sufficiently long such that there is no angle between the mooring line and the
seabed at any design condition, as described in Part 2, Item 1.3.1.
Drag anchor holding power depends on the anchor type, as well as the condition of
the anchor deployed in regard to penetration of the flukes, opening of the flukes,
depth of burial, stability of the anchor during dragging, soil behavior of the flukes,
etc. The designer should submit to the Bureau the performance data for the specific
anchor type and the site-specific soil conditions for the estimation of the ultimate
holding capacity (UHC) of an anchor design. Because of uncertainties and the wide
variation of anchor characteristics, exact holding power is to be determined after
the anchor is deployed and test loaded.
The maximum load at anchor, F
a
is to be calculated, in consistent units, as follows:
a line sub f
f sl bed sub
F P W WD F
F f L W
=
=

where:
P
line
= maximum mooring line tension (N)
WD = water depth (m)
f
sl
= frictional coefficient of mooring line on sea bed at sliding
TCVN 6474-4:2007
131

L
bed
= length of mooring line on seabed at the design storm condition,
not to exceed 20 percent of the total length of a mooring line(m)
W
sub
= submerged unit weight of mooring line (N/m)
Note: The above equation for F
a
is strictly correct only for a single line of constant,
W
sub
without buoys or clump weights. Appropriate adjustments will be required for
other cases.
The coefficient of friction f
sl
depends on the soil condition and the type of mooring
line. For soft mud, sand and clay, the following values of f
sl
along with the
coefficient of friction at start f
st
for wire rope and chain may be considered
representative in Table 4-5:
Table 4-5: Coefficient of Friction
Coefficient of Friction, f
Starting (f
st
) Sliding (f
sl
)
Chain 1.00 0.70
Wire Rope 0.60 0.25
2.2. Conventional Pile
Conventional pile anchors are capable of withstanding uplift and lateral forces at
the same time. Analysis of the pile as a beam column on an elastic foundation is to
be submitted to VR for review. The analyses for different kinds of soil using
representative soil resistance and deflection (p-y) curves are described in API RP
2A and API RP 2T, as applicable. The fatigue analysis of the pile should be
2.3. Vertically Loaded Drag Anchors (VLA)
VLAs can be used in a taut leg mooring system with approximately a 35 to 45
degree angle between the seabed and the mooring lines. These anchors are
designed to withstand both the vertical and horizontal loads imposed by the
mooring line. The structural and geotechnical holding capacity design of the VLA
TCVN 6474-4:2007
132

are to be submitted for review. This is to include the ultimate holding capacity and
the anchor's burial depth beneath the seabed. Additionally, the fatigue analysis of
the anchor and the connectors joining the VLA to the mooring line should be
The safety factors of VLA anchors' holding capacity are specified in Table 4-6
Table 4-6: Factor of Safety for Anchor Holding Capacities
Factor of Safety
Drag Anchors
Intact Design (DEC) 1.50
Broken Line Extreme (DEC) 1.00
Vertically Loaded Anchors (VLAs)
Intact Design (DEC) 2.00
Broken Line Extreme (DEC) 1.50
One broken Line (Transient)
Pile Anchors
Refer to API RP 2A, API RP 2T as applicable
Suction Piles
Intact Design (DEC) 1.5 to 2.0*
Broken Line Extreme (DEC) 1.2 to 1.5*
* The safety factor to be used in the design should be based on the extent of the
geotechnical investigation, confidence in the prediction of soil-pile behavior,
experience in the design and behavior of suction piles in the area of interest, and
the inclination of the mooring line load.
2.4. Suction Piles
Suction pile anchors are caisson foundations that are penetrated to the target depth
by pumping out the water inside of the pile to create underpressure within the pile.
TCVN 6474-4:2007
133

They may typically consist of a stiffened cylindrical shell with a cover plate at the
top and an open bottom and generally have larger diameters and are shorter in
length than conventional piles. These piles can be designed to have a permanent top
or a retrievable top depending on the required vertical holding capacity. The
padeye for the mooring line connection can be at the top or at an intermediate level
depending on the application of the suction pile.
Suction pile anchors are capable of withstanding uplift and lateral forces. Due to
the geometry of the suction piles, the failure modes of the soils may be different
than what are applicable for long slender conventional piles. The safety factors for
the suction piles' holding capacity are specified in Table 4-6.
Geotechnical holding capacity and structural analyses for the suction piles are to be
submitted to verify the adequacy of the suction piles to withstand the in-service and
installation loads. Additionally, fatigue analysis of the suction piles are to be
submitted to verify the adequacy of the fatigue life of the critical locations.
Installation analyses are to be submitted to verify that the suction piles can be
penetrated to the design penetration and that the suction piles can be retrieved, if
necessary. It is suggested that a ratio of at least 1.5 between the force that would
cause uplift of the soil-plug inside of the pile and the effective pile installation
force be considered in the penetration analysis.
2.5. Factor of Safety
The factors of safety for anchor holding capacity in the design of drag anchors,
VLAs and suction piles are specified in Table 4-6. The required ultimate holding
capacity should be determined based on mooring line loads derived from a dynamic
analysis to account for mooring line dynamics. Conventional pile anchors should
meet the recommended factors of safety as specified in API RP 2A, and API RP
2T, as applicable.
3. Field Test
TCVN 6474-4:2007
134

After the mooring system is deployed, each mooring line will be required to be
pull-tested. During the test, each mooring line will be pulled to the maximum
design load determined by dynamic analysis for the intact design condition and
held at that load for 30 minutes. For certain high efficiency drag anchors in soft
clay, the test load may be reduced to not less than 80 percent of the maximum
intact design load. For all types of anchors, the attainment of design-required
minimum soil penetration depth is to be verified at the site.
VR will determine the necessity of a maximum intact design tension pull test
depending on the extent of the geotechnical investigation, the magnitude of
loading, analytical methods used for the geotechnical design and the experience
with the soils in the area of interest. For suction piles, VR will also review the pile
installation records to verify the agreement between the calculated suction
pressures and the suction pressure used to install the suction piles. For conventional
piles, VR will review the pile installation records to verify the agreement between
the calculated pile driving blow counts and the actual blow counts required to drive
the piles to the design penetration.
If the maximum intact design tension pull tests are waived, VR will require
preloading each anchor to a load that is necessary to develop the ultimate holding
capacity of the anchor, but not less than the mean intact design tension, and to
ensure the integrity and alignment of the mooring line.
For a disconnectable mooring system, the pull test load will be the greater of the
following two values:
(1) Maximum design load for "Disconnecting Environmental Condition
(DISEC)", i.e., the limiting extreme environmental condition at which the
vessel is to be disconnected.
(2) Maximum design load of mooring line for the "Design Environmental
Condition (DEC)" without the vessel, i.e., the disconnected mooring system
alone.
TCVN 6474-4:2007
135

4. Single Point Moorings - CALMs, SALMs, Turrets and Yokes
4.1. Design Loadings
The design of structural and mechanical components is to consider the most
adverse combination of loads, including, but not limited to, those listed below, and
is to be submitted for review:
(1) Dead Loads
(2) Dynamic Loads due to motions
(3) Mooring Loads
(4) Fatigue Loads
4.2. Structural Components
In general, structural components are to be designed to a recognized code or
standard. The structural and buoyancy elements of CALMs and SALMs are to
comply with the requirements of the Single Point Mooring Rules - TCVN
6809:2001. Minimum mooring turret and yoke arm scantlings are to comply with
TCVN 5310:2001, Item 4.5.3
4.3. Mechanical Components
Mechanical components of an SPM usually include the Product Distribution Unit
(PDU), bearings, driving mechanisms and various types of connectors. TCVN
6809:2001 are generally applicable to these components, and in cases where
specific requirements are not addressed in the TCVN 6809:2001, VR will review
those components for compliance with the following standards and codes:
Product Distribution Unit ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
AISC Steel Code
ANSI B31.3 (for Pipe Swivels)
TCVN 6474-4:2007
136

Bearings AFBMA Codes (Anti Friction Bearing
Manufacturers Association ASME 77-DE-39
Connectors: driving mechanisms ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
AISC Steel Code
API Standards as applicable
Ancillary mechanical components, such as structural connectors, uni-joints, chain
jacks, turret retrieval mechanisms, hoists, winches, quick connect and disconnect
devices, are to be designed in accordance with Vietnam (or International)
applicable industry standards, codes and published recommended practices if was
approved by VR.
4.4. Hazardous Areas and Electrical Installations
Requirements for hazardous areas and electrical installations are in TCVN
6809:2001.
4.5. Fire Fighting Equipment
Fire fighting equipment is to comply with TCVN 6809:2001. Additionally, for the
internal turret mooring arrangement, Appendix VII, Part 9 is applicable.
4.6. Product Piping Systems and Floating Hoses
Product piping systems and floating hoses are to comply with the applicable
requirements of TCVN 6809:2001 v , Appendix VII, Part 9.
4.7. Turret Mooring
A turret mooring system is one type of station keeping system for a floating
installation and can either be installed internally or externally. Both internal and
external turret mooring systems will allow the vessel to weathervane around the
turret. The mooring lines are fixed to the sea bottom by anchors or piles.
TCVN 6474-4:2007
137

For an internal turret system, the turret is supported in the vessel by a system of
bearings. The loads acting on the turret will pass through the bearing system into
the vessel. Typically, a roller bearing is located near the vessel deck level, and
radial sliding bearing is located near the keel of the vessel. For an external turret
mooring system, the vessel is extended to attach the turret mooring system at the
end of the vessel.
The loads acting on an internal turret system include those basic loads induced by
the mooring lines, risers, gravity, buoyancy, inertia and hydrostatic pressure. Other
loads, such as wave slam and loads resulting from misalignment and tolerance, that
may have effect on the turret should also be considered in the design. In
establishing the controlling turret design loads, various combinations of vessel
loading conditions ranging from the full to minimum storage load conditions, wave
directions, and both collinear and non-collinear environments are to be considered.
The mooring loads and loads applied to the external turret structure are transferred
through its bearing system into the vessel. The load range and combinations to be
considered and analysis methods are similar to those stated for an internal turret
mooring system, with additional consideration of environmentally-induced loads
on the turret structure.
A structural analysis using finite element method is required to verify the sufficient
strength of the turret structure. The allowable von Mises stress of the turret
structure is to be 0.6 of the yield strength for the operational intact mooring design
conditions, as specified in Item 4.3. A one-third increase in the allowable stress is
allowed for the design storm intact mooring design conditions and for the design
storm one-line broken mooring condition to verify the turret structure mooring
attachment locations and supporting structure.
Note: the yield strength is to be based on the specified minimum yield point or 72
percent of the specified minimum tensile strength, whichever is the lesse.)
The buckling strength check for the turret structures is to be performed using the
criteria in TCVN 6259-2:2003 or other applicable industry standards. A fatigue
TCVN 6474-4:2007
138

evaluation of the turret system using a spectral method or other proven approaches
is needed to determine the fatigue lives for the turret components. Fatigue life of
the turret should not be less than three times the design life for inspectable areas
and 10 times for uninspectable areas.
4.8. Turret/Vessel Structural Interface Loads
The vessel structure in the way of the turret mooring system interface is to be
capable of withstanding forces (obtained as the maximum of all the design
conditions considered) from the systems and is to be suitably reinforced.
Mooring forces transmitted to the vessel's supporting structure by the turret
mooring system are to be determined by an acceptable engineering analysis. The
transmission and dissipation of the resulting mooring forces into the vessel's
structure are required to be determined by an acceptable engineering method, such
as finite element analysis. The loads acting on the vessel's supporting structures due
to the turret system are mainly transmitted through the upper and lower bearings.
The loading conditions are chosen to cause the most unfavorable loads and the load
combinations that may occur. The derivation of mooring loads is to be determined
as described in the previous Subsection of the "Turret Mooring System." The
structural model used in the finite element analysis for the vessel's supporting
structure should extend to a reasonable distance of the vessel to minimize the
effects due to the boundary conditions.
5. Surveys During Construction
Items of equipment to be used in a mooring system are to be examined during the
fabrication process, and testing is to be performed to the satisfaction of the
attending Surveyor.
Components fabricated by welding are to meet the requirements of TCVN 6259-
6:2003 and are to be to the Surveyor's satisfaction. Specifications to be used for
chain, wire rope and connecting hardware are to be submitted for review. Physical
testing, including break, pull, dimensional and nondestructive testing, is required to
TCVN 6474-4:2007
139

be performed in accordance with the submitted specifications to the satisfaction of
the attending Surveyor.

TCVN 6474-4:2007
140

BLANK PAGE

141
NATIONAL STANDARD TCVN 6474-5 : 2007
Second edition

RULES FOR CLASSIFICATION AND TECHNICAL
SUPERVISION OF FLOATING STORAGE UNITS

PART 5 : HYDROCARBON PRODUCTION AND PROCESS SYSTEMS

Reference standards and definitions: see Part 1, TCVN 6474-1: 2007
1. Hydrocarbon Production and Process Systems
1.1. General requirements
Hydrocacbon production and procesing system are to comply with requirements of
Aoppendix VII, Part 9 and sections 1.2 to 1.11 below.
1.2. Application
This section is applicable to the following:
(1) Systems that process hydrocarbon liquids, gasses, or mixtures from completed
wells.
(2) Production support systems associated with the process system, such as water,
steam, hydraulics, pneumatics, and power supply to the process.
(3) Fire protection systems for the protection of the process equipment and the
process area
(4) Systems that are utilized for stimulation of a completed well, such as chemical,
gas, or water injection downhole through a Christmas tree.

TCVN 6474-5:2007
142
(5) Power generation systems for export purposes.
(6) Electrical systems and components associated with the process facilities.
(7) Systems other than those mentioned above, such as methanol production and/or
processing, and desalination, will be the subject of special consideration.
The scope of the hydrocarbon process system is defined in Regulation 2.4, Section 2 of this
Rule. The scope of the hydrocarbon process system may also include the controls for the
well head and subsurface safety valve, if these are included in the process safety shutdown
system.
1.3. Subsea Equipment.
1.3.1 Subse equipment is not a part of the classification boundaries as defined in 3.2, Part
1. However. subsea equipment may be classed if desired by the Owner, provided these
items are approved by the VR for compliance with the requirements of recognized
standards.
1.3.2 The VR is prepared to certify the subsea equipment if the manufacturers / Owner
wish to obtain VR Certification. The design, contruction, and testing of the subsea
equipment are to be accordance with Appendix VII, Part 9.
1.4. Use other standards
Use of other standards in the design and construction of the equipment and components is
subject to pror approval and acceptance by the VR. The standards being applied are to be
adhered to in its entirety.
1.5. Non-standard Equipment
Equipment not designed to a recognized standard may be accepted based on approval of
detailed design calculations and testing results that verify the integrity of the equipment.
1.6. Design and Construction
1.6.1 General
Hydrocarbon process systems and associated equipment are to be designed to minimize the
TCVN 6474-5:2007
143
risk of hazards to personnel and property. This criterion is implemented be showed in the
amendment VII, section 9. The implementation of this criterion is intended to:
(1) Prevent an abnormal condition from causing an upset condition.
(2) Prevent an upset condition from causing a release of hydrocarbons.
(3) Safely disperse or dispose of hydrocarbon gasses and vapors released.
(4) Safely collect and contain hydrocarbon liquids released.
(5) Prevent formation of explosive mixtures.
(6) Prevent ignition of flammable liquids or gasses and vapors released.
(7) Limit exposure of personnel to fire hazards.
1.6.2 Arrangements
General arrangement drawings are to be submitted for review in accordance with
Regulation 5.2, section 1. The arrangements depicted are to comply with Regulation 17.3.2
and 17.7.4 , Appendix VII, applicable Sections of TCVN 6259:2003 and 5309-5319:2001,
as applicable.
1.6.3 Structural Considerations
Structure that supports production facilities or forms an integral part of the equipment is to
be designed to a recognized standard. Plans and calculations are to be submitted for
reviewing. Process liquid weights and dynamic loads due to vessel motions and other loads,
such as wind imposed loads, are to be considered.
1.7. Process System
1.7.1 Submittals
The various data and plans that are to be submitted to the VR for review are listed
Regulation 5.2, section 1.
TCVN 6474-5:2007
144
1.7.2 Piping System and Manifolds
Piping of the process and process support systems are to comply with the requirements of
recognized standards (refer to API 14E and ASME/ANSI B31.3 and B31.1).
1.7.3 Pressure Relief and Depressurization Systems
Pressure relief and depressurization systems are to comply with the requirements of
recognized standards (refer to API RP 520 and API RP 521).
1.7.4 Process Equipment
Process equipments are to comply with the applicable requirements in Subsections
17.3.9 of Appendix VII, section 9.
1.7.5 Prime Movers
Internal combustion engines and gas or steam turbines are to comply with Subsections
17.4.2 of Appendix VII, section 9.
1.7.6 Safety Systems
Safety systems are to comply with Subsections 17.3.4 and 17.3.5 of Appendix VII, section
9. Specific items to be addressed are as follows:
(1) The process safety and shutdown system is to comply with the requirements of
recognized standards (refer to API RP 14C).
(2) Fire detection and gas detection is to comply with the requirements of recognized
standards (refer to API RP 14C and API RP 14G). The location of the fire and gas
detectors is to be to the satisfaction of the VR .
(3) The process safety shutdown system is required to shut down the flow of
hydrocarbon from all wells and process systems. The discharge of processed
hydrocarbons to the export lines is also to be controlled by the process safety
shutdown system. Redundancy is to be provided in the power source to the
TCVN 6474-5:2007
145
process safety shutdown system such that, upon failure of the main power source,
the secondary power source is brought online automatically.
1.7.7 Control System
Control systems, in general, are to comply with regulation 6 of Appendix VII, Section 9.
Additionally, computer based control systems are to comply with the following:
(1) The control system is to be totally independent of the alarm and monitoring
system.
(2) Where computers are utilized for monitoring, alarm, and control, the
arrangements are to be such that a fault in one of these functions will not impair
the capability of other functions.
(3) The computer system for monitoring alarms and control is to include redundancy
arrangements in order to maintain continued operation of the hydrocarbon process
system.
1.7.8 Quick Disconnect System
(1) Where the Floating Installation is fitted with a quick disconnect system, the
control of this system is to be .totally independent of the process safety shutdown
system required for the hydrocarbon process system. However, the source of
power for the process safety shutdown system and controls for the quick
disconnect system need not be totally independent, provided that the failure in
one system does not render the other system ineffective, e.g., failure through
leakage in the hydraulic or pneumatic control lines.
(2) Means are to be provided for the activation of quick disconnect system from the
control station and locally in the vicinity where the disconnect arrangements are
located.
(3) The disconnect arrangement is to be designed such that, upon its activation, all
process flow to the Floating Installation is automatically stopped immediately
without leakage of process fluids
TCVN 6474-5:2007
146
1.7.9 Electrical Installations
Electrical installations for the hydrocarbon process system are to comply with the
requirements regulation 5 of Appendix VII, Section 9.
1.8. Hazardous Area Classification
Hazardous areas are to be delineated and classified as required Regulation 3 of Appendix
VII, Section 9. In general, API RP 500 & API RP 501 is to be applied to process areas, and
the Steel Vessel Rules TCVN 6259:2003 or the Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit Rules TCVN
5309-5319:2001 are applied to non process areas.
1.9. Fire protection
Fire extinguishing systems and fire fighting equipment associated with the hydrocarbon
process facilities are comply with regulation 5 of appendix VII, Part 9.
1.10. Fabrication and testing
Inspection and testing of hydrocarbon process and associated equipment at the
manufacturers facility are to be in accordance with Table 17-1 of Appendix VII, Part 9.
Construction and fabrication is to be performed in accordance with approved planls and
procedures. Respresentative survey interventions are listed as follows.
1.10.1 Pressure Vessels, Accumulators, Heat Exchangers, Separators, and Manifolds.
(1) The construction, fabrication and material are accordance with design standard
shown on the approved plans.
(2) Witness weld procedure and welder performance qualification tests.
(3) Visual inspection of weld joints, witness non-destructive testing.
(4) Fit up and joining of all pipe connections and pipe supporting arrangement.
(5) Dimensional inspection during fit-up and after completion.
(6) Internal examination.
(7) Witness calibration of hydrostatic testing equipment.
TCVN 6474-5:2007
147
(8) Witness hydrostatic tests.
1.10.2 Pumps, Compressors and Diesel/Gas Engines
(1) Witness mechanical running tests.
(2) Witness testing of auxiliary equipment and protective devices (controls, filters,
coolers, oil pumps, alarms, trips, governors).
1.10.3 Motors and Generators
(1) Functional running test for machines greater than 100 kW.
(2) Witness testing of auxiliary equipment and protective devices.
1.10.4 Switchboards and Control Panels
1.10.4.1 Inspection and witness testing at the manufacturer's facility is not required for
switchboards and control panels. These components will be accepted for use, provided they
have been designed and constructed to a recognized national or international code or
standard.
1.10.4.2 Control and alarm panels for fire protection and safety systems are to be
function-tested at the manufacturer's facility. These tests are to be conducted in the presence
of the Surveyor.
1.10.5 Process and Process Support Piping
1.10.5.1 Fabrication, inspection and testing of process and utility piping is to be
performed to the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor.

TCVN 6474-5:2007
148
BLANK PAGE

149
Second edition
RULES FOR CLASSIFICATION TECHNICAL SUPERVISION OF
PART 6: IMPORT AND EXPORT SYSTEMS

Reference standards and definitions: see Part 1, TCVN 6474-1: 2007.
1. Import and export systems
1.1. General
This section applies to import and export systems utilized in Floating Installations. These
systems include rigid and flexible risers, connecting flow lines, submerged jumpers, and
floating offloading hoses.
1.1.1 Riser Classification Boundaries
1.1.1.1 The import/export system is assumed to consist of only rigid, flexible hose/pipe or a
combination of both rigid and flexible hose/pipe, and associated riser components, such as the
tensioning system, buoyancy modules, line buoys, permanent clamps, anchoring systems, and
safety control systems
1.1.1.2 In a typical Floating Installation import (or export) system, the applicable starting and
termination points are the riser's connection point to the PLEM and the riser's connection point
to the vessel or floating structure. The connection points are typically the discharge (or input)
flange of the PLEM and the input (or discharge) flange of the vessel or floating structure
1.1.1.3 The Import System: The Import System is to include the import risers starting from the
Import PLEM but not including the Import PLEM. For a typical flexible riser system, the
import riser may start at the PLEM/wellhead flanges and terminate at the input flange of the

TCVN 6474-6:2007

150
vessel or floating structure.
1.1.1.4 The Export System : The Export System is to include the export risers that may start
from the discharge flanges of the vessel or floating structure and terminate at the Export
PLEM but not including the Export PLEM
1.1.1.5 Where Import and/or Export Risers induce mooring restraint to the Floating Installation,
design, construction will require special consideration.
1.1.2 Basic Design Considerations
1.1.2.1 The import/export,'system is to be designed to maintain its integrity under the most
unfavorable combination of external environmental loads, internal loads due to fluid contents,
pressure and temperature, and accidental loads. This is accomplished by ensuring that riser
system design is consistent and compatible with the design philosophy used for the Floating
Installation.
1.1.2.2 The dynamic response of the import/export system is to be investigated to the level of
detail necessary to ensure that interference between the floating production vessel and the
associated mooring system does not affect the integrity of the vessel or the import/export
system.
1.1.2.3 The riser is to to be designed in confomity with the maximum vessel offset.
1.2. Submission of Plans and Design
Documentation outlining the design, manufacture, installation, and operating assumptions
applicable to the project is to be submitted for review at the initiation of the project. The
following summarizes the typical information that is required to help ensure that the design
basis and criteria selection is consistent with the design philosophy. In general, the
following are to be submitted for review:
(1) Site plan indicating bathymetric features, the location of obstructions to
be removed, the location of permanent manmade structures, and other important
TCVN 6474-6:2007

151
features related to the characteristics of the sea floor.
(2) Material specifications for the import/export system, its supports, and coatings.
(3) Pipe manufacture, testing, and quality control procedures.
(4) Flow diagrams indicating temperature and pressure profiles.
(5) Specifications and plans for installation, field testing, inspection,
anticipated component replacement, and continued maintenance of the riser system.
(6) Environmental and geotechnical report.
1.3. Environmental conditions.
Environmental loads are to be calculated in accordance with the method described in Part 2
1.4. System Design and Analysis
1.4.1 General requirements
1.4.1.1 The design of the import/export system should consider all modes of operating, testing,
survival, and accidental events. The import/export system should be analyzed to determine its
response to the design events. Each individual component should be examined for its strength
and suitability for the service conditions.
1.4.2 Rigid Risers
1.4.2.1 Design Analysis
The analysis of a rigid riser is to follow the appropriate sections of API RP 2RD and API RP
2T for all relevant design load cases. The establishment of the critical design condition must be
verified by a suitable verified program that properly simulates the dynamic response of the entire
system operating under the required design condition.
The following items, as applicable, are to be appropriately accommodated in the analysis:
TCVN 6474-6:2007

152
(1) Environmental conditions.
(2) Boundary conditions.
(3) Riser configuration.
(4) Riser joint properties.
(5) Buoyancy devices.
(6) Vessel motion (RAO's).
(7) Applicable site conditions.
(8) Effects of internal contents.
(9) Pressure testing and accidental conditions.
1.4.2.2 Design Limits
Rigid risers are to be designed against the following limits based on the design load cases being
investigated.
Maximum Stress, Stability, and Buckling . Allowable stresses in plain pipe are to be limited per
API RP 2RD. Overall stability of the riser and local pipe buckling should be evaluated.
Maximum Deflection. Acceptable limits of maximum deflection are to be determined
considering the inherent limitations of riser components, equipment used in the riser, and the
need to avoid interference with the Floating Installation.
Fatigue and Fracture. The riser system is to be designed to ensure that an adequate margin of
safety is available for critical components to counteract the effects of fatigue caused by cyclic
fluctuations (due to both internal and external loads) over the anticipated life of the system.
The cumulative damage calculated by the use of Miner's Rule is to be 0.1 or less for a critical
component, which cannot be easily inspected or repaired. For non-critical components, which
can be easily inspected, the cumulative damage should be 0.3 or less.
TCVN 6474-6:2007

153
1.4.3 Flexible Risers
1.4.3.1 place Analysis
(1) On-bottom stability for flexible flow lines
(2) Static and dynamic analysis for flexible riser
(3) A system dynamic analysis to ensure:
(a) Maximum tension and minimum radius of curvature are within the
manufacturer's
recommendations.
(b) Suspended portions of the flexible pipe (e.g., sag bends) are not allowed to
bounce on the sea floor or experience compression that might cause kinks.
(c) Suspended flexible pipes are not allowed to chafe against each other, the vessel
body, or mooring lines.
(4) Flow induced motion analysis
(5) Flexible pipe layer stress analysis.
(6) The stresses in the flexible pipe layers shall comply with the requirements of recognized
standards (refer to API SPEC 17J).
(7) Mechanical gripping devices should not cause damage to the weaker exterior layer.
(8) Service life analysis
(9) Corrosion protection system design.
1.4.3.2 Design Limits
Design limits established for the riser system are to be determined in accordance with
recognized standards (refer to API RP 17B) and confirmed by performance/acceptance testing
during the manufacture of the flexible riser and the associated components. Where sufficient test
TCVN 6474-6:2007

154
data and service history exist to confirm a component's capability, VR may consider the
acceptance of this documentation in lieu of performance/ acceptance testing.
1.4.4 Export Vessel Transfer System
This system may be classed if requested. Export of fluid to an export vessel is usually limited to
stabilized crude oil and is usually accomplished by:
Side-by-side transfer,
Tandem transfer, or
Single Point Moored Buoy via a floating hose or riser.
For certification of these systems, VR requires compliance to OCIMF Standards and
MARPOL. The OCIMF Standard is applicable for operating pressures not greater than 1.5
Mpa (15 bar gauge). In complying with these standards, VR requires the Owner to observe the
guidelines as given in The OCIMF Guide to Purchasing, Manufacturing, and Testing of
Loading and Discharge Hoses for Offshore Moorings. The operation and safety considerations
for transfer of crude are to be contained in the Floating Installation's operations manual and
consistent with the requirements outlined in The OCIMF Ship to Ship Transfer Guide and
Chapter 6.
1.4.5 System Components
All system components are to be designed in accordance with the appropriate criteria of
recognized standards. The specification for the design and manufacture of the components is
to be submitted. The specification is to include at a minimum the performance criteria
established from the riser design and analysis and give explicit acceptance criteria needed to
ensure the compliance to these criteria.
1.4.6 Installation Analysis
The installation analysis is to address all aspects of installation procedure discussed in 1.1.6 Part
TCVN 6474-6:2007

155
7. Calculations to demonstrate the structural integrity of the riser and its auxiliary components
are to be submitted for review.
The riser pipe is to be checked for all installation loads, tension and bending combination
(bending from chute, sleeve, roller, or drum), and loads caused by the installation of auxiliary
components.
Loads from mechanical gripping devices, such as clamps and tensioners, are to be checked and
are not to cause damage to the weaker exterior layer of the flexible pipe.

1.5. Material
1.5.1 Material for Rigid Risers
Material and dimensional standards for steel pipe are to be in accordance with recognized
standards (refer ANSI/ASME B31.4 and B31.8, API RP 2RD), for respect to chemical
composition, material manufacture, tolerances, strength, and testing requirements.
1.5.2 Material for Flexible Risers
Recognized standards may be used to assess the adequacy of the material standards for flexible
risers. (refer API RP 17B and API SPEC 17J)

TCVN 6474-6:2007

156

BLANK PAGE
157
Second Edition

PART 7: INSTALLATION, HOOK-UP AND COMMISSIONING
Reference documents and definitions: See Part 1, TCVN 6474-1:2007.
1. Installation, Hook-up, and Commissioning
1.1. General requirements
The requirements in this Part apply to the procedures to be submitted and the
surveys to be performed by VR for all VR-classed Floating Installations. Prior to
carrying out the installation, the installation procedures are to be submitted to VR.
The installation procedures to be submitted are to include the following, where
applicable.
1.1.1. General Description
General description of the entire layout of the mooring system and of the Floating
Installation with risers, subsea pipelines and, as applicable, pipeline end manifolds
(PLEMs).
1.1.2. Pre-installation Verification
Pre-installation verification procedures for the seabed condition in way of the
installation site and contingency procedures for removing any obstacles found on
site.
1.1.3. Pile or Anchor and Mooring Line Installation
Pile or anchor and mooring line installation procedures which are to include, but
TCVN 6474-7:2007
158
are not limited to, the following:
- General preparations for installation.
- Rigging arrangements for piles, chaser pile and driving hammers.
- Work barge setup during the various phases of installation, taking into
consideration the prevailing weather conditions.
- Anticipated pile driving resistance.
- Pile penetration acceptance criteria established by design and pile refusal and
overdrive contingency procedures.
- Procedure for positioning of the pile orientation toward the center of the
Position Mooring System and the criteria for allowable deviations of position
and orientation.
- Procedure for installation of the mooring line and the precautions to be taken
in order toprevent any twisting of the mooring chains during installation.
- Procedure for installation of anchors, including piggyback anchors, if
applicable, and procedure for determining the installed positions and
orientations of the anchors. Criteria for allowable deviations in positioning and
orientation are also to be included.
1.1.4. Tensioning and Proof Load Testing
Tensioning and proof load testing procedures of the anchor piles or anchors and
chain system are to include the following:
- Rigging arrangements for proof load tension testing of the mooring chains,
anchor or pile system.
- Work barge setup to perform the proof load testing of the chains and anchor or
pile system.
TCVN 6474-7:2007
159
- Detailed tensioning procedure, including type of tensioning device to be
utilized and tensioning operations.
- Chain retrieval and abandonment procedures during tensioning.
- Procedure for chain proof load tensioning by ballasting the Floating
Installation, if applicable.
1.1.5. Hook-up of the Anchor Chain System
Procedure for hook-up of the anchor chain system to the Floating Installation,
which is to include the following:
- Rigging and towing procedures for positioning of the Floating Installation for
hook-up to the mooring system.
- Preferred ballast condition of the Floating Installation prior to the hook-up.
- Procedure for sequential hook-up of the chains, repositioning of the Floating
Installation and tensioning of the chains.
- Method of determining the correct tension of the chains and the acceptable
design tolerance.
- Procedure for determining the positioning of the SPM system relative to the
PLEM or wellhead and the acceptable design tolerance for the position of the
SPM center relative to the PLEM or wellhead.
- Method of securing the chain turntable from movement and the overall safety
precautions for the entire hook-up installation.
- Procedure for chain tensioning by ballasting the Floating Installation, if
applicable.
1.1.6. Import/Export System Installation
The Import/Export System Installation Procedure is to be submitted for review in
TCVN 6474-7:2007
160
conjunction with the design review so that it can be verified that all appropriate
installation loadings have been considered. The manual is to describe procedures to
be employed during the installation of the import/export systems. In addition, the
manual is to include a list of allowable environmental limits under which system
installation may proceed. Abandonment procedures, retrieval procedures and repair
procedures are to be supplied, when deemed necessary.
1.1.6.1. Rigid and Flexible Risers
The procedure to hook-up the import/export risers to the Floating Installation is to
include the following items, where applicable:
(1) Handling and rigging of the rigid and flexible riser during installation.
(2) Positioning of the work barge for the various phases of the installation.
(3) Procedure for installation of the buoyancy tank and arch support and clump
weight, if applicable, including steps to avoid riser interference and
precautions against damaging the riser during installation.
(4) Tie-in rigging technique for hook-up of both ends of the risers.
(5) Procedure for hydrostatic testing of the risers. Hydrotest pressure and test
duration are to be in accordance with API or other recognized code of
practice.
1.1.6.2. Export Vessel Transfer System
The procedure for installing the export system is to include the following items, as
applicable.
(1) Rigging, handling and make-up of the export hose system and precautions
against damage during installation.
(2) Fitting of all the necessary accessory and navigational aids.
(3) Procedure for paying out of the hose string into the sea.
TCVN 6474-7:2007
161
(4) Procedure for filling and testing the hose string. The required design and
testing pressure and testing duration are to be provided.
1.1.7. Disconnecting Procedure
For disconnectable mooring systems, the procedures for the disconnecting and
connecting of the Floating Installation's mooring system are to be submitted. These
procedures are to include the abandonment and retrieval of the import and export
systems. (Also see Operating Manual requirements.)
1.2. Hook-Up Procedures Submittal
Any system component installation intentionally left incomplete to ease the
installation of the Floating Installation at site is to be documented and a procedure
for site hook-up and testing is to be submitted to VR.
1.3. Start-Up and Commissioning Procedures Submittal
Start-up and commissioning procedures for the production system are to be
submitted for review in Appendix VII, Part 9.
1.4. Surveys during Installation of the Mooring Systems
During installation, the requirements as contained in the following paragraphs are
to be verified or witnessed, where applicable, by the attending Surveyor.
1.4.1. All mooring components are to be examined for transit damages prior to
installation. Any damages found are to be dealt with to the satisfaction of the
attending Surveyor.
1.4.2. All applicable components required to be certified at the manufacturers' facilities
have received certification.
1.4.3. The area at and in the vicinity of the mooring site is to be surveyed by divers or
remotely operated vehicles (ROVs) to ensure that there are no obstructions or
debris prior to installation.
1.4.4. During the installation of the anchors or anchor piles, the following are to be
verified in order, where applicable:
TCVN 6474-7:2007
162
(1) Proper locking of all connecting shackles from chains to piles or anchors and
chains to chains.
(2) Sealing of all kenter shackle locking pins.
(3) All complements of anchor chains for correct sizes and lengths.
(4) All anchor pile or anchors are installed in the designed positions and
orientations and are within the allowable design tolerance.
1.4.5. The paying out of the anchor chains after the installation of the piles is to be
performed in accordance with the approved procedures.
1.4.6. Unless otherwise approved by the attending Surveyor, the first pair of anchor
chains to be cross-tensioned is the first pair to be installed.
1.4.7. The cross-tensioning is to be verified to ensure all pretensioning loads are in
accordance with the design and there is no movement or pullout of the anchor piles.
1.4.8. Upon successful completion of the pretensioning, the subsequent hooking up of all
of the chain legs to the chain stoppers in the turntable is to be verified.
1.4.9. During tensioning of the chains for the position mooring system, the relative
position of the mooring system's center to the PLEM is to be verified for
compliance with the design specifications and tolerance.
1.4.10. Upon completion, the chain tension is to be verified by measuring the catenary
angles of the chains for compliance with the design specifications and tolerance.
Any excess length of chain above the chain stoppers is to be removed, unless it is
designed to be retained in the chain well.
1.5. Surveys During Installation of the Import/Export System
During installation of the import/export system, the following items are to be
witnessed by the Surveyor, as applicable.
1.5.1. The riser is to be examined for damage as it is being paid out, and sufficient tension
is to be maintained to ensure the riser is free of deformations or buckles. The
buoyancy tank and arch support are to be verified as being installed in the correct
position relative to the water surface end of the riser.
TCVN 6474-7:2007
163
1.5.2. The installation of the riser clamps on the buoyancy tank and arch support are to be
monitored to ensure that the riser is adequately secured and not damaged due to
excessive tightening of the clamps.
1.5.3. The installation of the end flanges of the riser is to be monitored for compliance
with the approved procedures.
1.5.4. Upon completion of installation, the entire underwater complement of components
is to be generally examined and verified by divers or ROVs for compliance with
the reviewed design specifications and configurations. At a site with limited
visibility, alternative means of verifying the installation are to be submitted for
review and are to be performed to the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor.
1.5.5. Hydrotesting of the import/export system is to be performed in accordance with the
approved procedure. The test pressure and duration of the hydrotest should follow
the appropriate codes, such as ANSI/ ASME B31.8, API RP 2RD and RP 17B.
1.5.6. The make-up of the export floating hose string is to be verified for compliance with
the approved procedures. Suitable gaskets for the hose flanges, positioning of all
navigational aids, correct location of the breakaway couplings and tightening of the
flange bolts are also to be verified.
1.5.7. During the paying out of the hose string, verification is to be made that the hose
string bend radii are not smaller than the manufacturer's recommended limits.
1.5.8. Upon completion of installation, the entire export hose string is to be
hydrostatically tested in accordance with the approved procedure and codes.
1.5.9. Subsea controls, if installed, are to be satisfactorily tested.
1.5.10. All navigational aids are to be functionally tested and proven in working order.
1.6. Surveys during Hook-Up
Survey during hook-up is to be performed following reviewed procedures and is to
include the following, where applicable:
1.6.1. Piping hook-up is to be verified for compliance with the reviewed drawings and
procedures. Welds are to be visually inspected and nondestructive testing (NDT)
performed as required. Upon completion of hook-up, the affected sections are to be
hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the design working pressure and proven tight.
TCVN 6474-7:2007
164
1.6.2. Electrical hook-up is to be verified for compliance with the approved drawings and
procedures. Proper support for cables and proper sealing of cable entries to
equipment are to be verified. Upon completion of the hook-up, the affected sections
of the equipment and cabling are to be insulation tested and proven in order. All
grounding is also to be verified as being in order.
1.6.3. Instrumentation hook-up is to be verified for compliance with the reviewed
drawings and procedures. Tubing supports are to be verified. Upon completion, all
systems are to be functionally tested and proven as being in order. The
manufacturer's limits on bend radii for any component of the instrumentation
system are to be observed.
1.6.4. Mechanical equipment hook-up is to be verified for compliance with the reviewed
drawings and procedures, including the grounding of the equipment. Upon
completion, all equipment is to be functionally tested and proven as being in order.
1.7. Demonstration of the Disconnectable Mooring System
1.7.1. For a disconnectable mooring system, the system's capability to disconnect free
from its mooring system is to be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the attending
Surveyor, in accordance with approved test procedures.
1.7.2. During the disconnect operation, the time taken to effectively free the Floating
Installation from the mooring system is to be recorded in the Operation Manual.
1.8. Surveys During Start-Up and Commissioning
The start-up and commissioning of hydrocarbon production systems are to be
verified by the attending Surveyor. The scope of the start-up and commissioning to
be verified by the Surveyor is to include the following items:
1.8.1. The start-up and commissioning operations are to be in accordance with the
reviewed procedures.
1.8.2. Verify precautions for safety of personnel during commissioning, including checks
of operational readiness of all life saving equipment, fire and gas detection systems,
fire fighting equipment, Emergency Shutdown systems and unobstructed escape
routes.
TCVN 6474-7:2007
165
1.8.3. Verify establishment of communication procedures prior to the start of
commissioning operations.
1.8.4. Verify that emergency procedures are provided to deal with contingencies, such as
spillage, fire and other hazards.
1.8.5. Verify start-up and testing of all support utility systems, including main and
auxiliary sources, for the process system prior to commissioning.
1.8.6. Verify proper hook-up and testing of the entire process system prior to
commissioning, including the testing of entire system for leaks, the process control
functions and emergency shutdown system.
1.8.7. Verify purging of the entire production system of oxygen to an acceptable level
prior to the introduction of hydrocarbons into the production system.
1.8.8. Verify the introduction of hydrocarbon into the process system and the system's
capability to control the flow of the well effluent in the system in a stabilized
manner without undue control upsets.
1.8.9. Verify the start-up of the flare system, if applicable, including the necessary
precautions taken to eliminate the risk of explosion or fire. The functional
capability of the flare system is to be verified.
1.8.10. Verify that the post-commissioned process system is functioning satisfactorily for a
duration of at least 12 hours. Equipment required to be verified but not used during
the initial start-up and commissioning is to be identified for verification at the next
Annual Survey.

TCVN 6474-7:2007
166

BLANK PAGE
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
167
Second edition

PART 8: SURVEYS AFTER INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

Reference standards and definitions: see Part 1, TCVN 7474-1: 2007
1 Class maintenance surveys
1.1 Periodical surveys
1.1.1 General
1.1.1.1 All units classed with the VR are to be subjected to the following Periodical
surveys:
(1) Annual surveys ;
(2) Docking Surveys;
(3) Intermediate surveys;
(4) Special surveys;
(5) Boiler surveys and Thermal oil Heater survey;
(6) Propeller shaft and stern tube shaft survey .
(7) Automation system and remote control survey
(8) Inert gas system survey
1.1.1.2 All examinations and tests in accordance with the requirements in 1.3 to 1.17 are to
be carried out to the satisfaction of the Surveyor.
1.1.2 Modification of Requirements
At the Periodical Surveys ,the surveyor may modify the requirements for Periodical Surveys
specified in 1.3 to 1.17 having regard to the size, service engaged, age, construction, results
of last surveys and actual condition of the unit.

TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
168
1.1.3 Definitions
The definitions of terms in the following 1.1.3.1 to 1.1.3.7 are to be in accordance with Part
8:
1.1.3.1 " Ballast tank " : is a tank which is used for water ballast and includes segregated
balast tanks ,side balast tanks, balast double bottom spaces, top-side tanks, hopper
side tanks and peak tanks. A tank which is used for both cargo and ballast will be
treated as a ballast tank when substantial corrosion has been found in that tank.
1.1.3.2 "Close-up survey" : is a survey where the details of structural components are
within the close visual inspection range of the surveyor,i.e. preferably within reach
of hand .
1.1.3.3 "Longitudinal members in the transverse section": include all longitudinal members
such as plating, longitudinals and girders at the deck, side, bottom, inner bottom and
longitudinal bulkheads in the considered transverse section.
1.1.3.4 "Representative tanks" : are those which are expected to reflect the condition of
other tanks similar types and service and service and with similar corrosion
prevention systems. When selecting representative tanks account should be taken of
the service and repair history on board and identifiable critical and or suspect areas.
1.1.3.5 "Suspect areas" : are locations showing substantial corrosion and/or are considered
by the Surveyor to be prone to rapid wastage.
1.1.3.6 "Substantial corrosion" : is such an extent of corrosion that that assessment of
corosion pattern indicates a wastage in excess of 75% of allowable margins, but
within acceptable limits.
1.1.3.7 "Oil " : is petroleum including crude oil , heavy fuel oil , lubricating oil, light oil
kerosene, gas oil .
1.1.4 Survey Reports File
All survey reports and records of all abnormalities found are to be compiled into the Survey
Report File that is to be kept onboard the Floating Installation at all times for reference
during any survey. The records to be kept include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.1.4.1 Approved Survey and Inspection Plan.
1.1.4.2 The updated status records of all class surveys.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
169
1.1.4.3 The records of all abnormalities found that are to include all videos and
photographic records.
1.1.4.4 The records of all repairs performed on any abnormalities found and any further
repetitive abnormalities found subsequent to the repairs.
1.1.4.5 Records of all corrosion protection system maintenance, including records of all
cathodic potential readings taken, records of depletion of all sacrificial anodes,
impressed current maintenance records, such as voltage and current demands of the
system, coating breaks and the monitoring records of the steel material wastage in
way of the coating break areas.
1.1.4.6 All classification reports pertaining to the Floating Installation.
1.1.4.7 All records of any findings of abnormalities by the crew personnel onboard,
including all leakages in bulkheads and piping.
1.1.4.8 Reports of thickness measurements of the vessel or floating structure.
1.1.4.9 Reports of all NDT performed.
1.1.5 Corrosion Prevention System - Ballast Tanks
1.1.5.1 Corrosion Prevention System is normally used one of two following types:
(1) a full, hard coating that is supplemented by anode;
(2) a full, hard coating .
1.1.5.2 Coating Condition of hard coatings is defined as follows:
(1) GOOD is a condition with only minor spot rusting.
(2) FAIR is a condition with local breakdown at edges of stiffeners and weld
connections and/or light rusting over 20 percent or more of areas under
consideration, but less than as defined for POOR condition.
(3) POOR is a condition with general breakdown of coating over 20 percent or
hard scale at 10 percent or more of areas under consideration.
1.1.5.3 Salt Water Ballast Spaces
(1) In salt water ballast spaces, other than double bottom tanks, where poor
coating condition is found and Owners or their representatives elect not to
restore the coating, where a soft coating has been applied or a protective
coating has not been applied, the ballast tanks are to be internally examined at
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
170
each subsequent Annual Survey.
1.2 Intervarls of periodical surveys
1.2.1 General
1.2.1.1 A periodical survey, annual, intermediate or special, is to be considered as
completed when the relevalt periodical surveys both for hull and for machinery
have been completed, unless the special arrangement is made with the VR.
1.2.1.2 Except as amended at the discretion of the VR, the intervals of Periodical Surveys
are specified in 1.2.2 to 1.2.8 following.
1.2.1.3 Class Periodical Surveys should, whenever practicable, be held concurrently with
statutory periodical surveys or inspections.
1.2.1.4 Where both Annual Survey and Intermediate Survey are due at a time, only
Intermediate Survey is to be carried out .
1.2.2 Annual surveys
Annual surveys for hull, machinary of floating storage unit, production system and
mooring system are to be carried out within three months either way of each
anniversary date of the date crediting a Classification Survey or the previous Special
Survey .
1.2.3 Docking surveys
1.2.3.1 Survey intervals:
A Drydocking Survey is to be conducted two times in any 5-year period with an
interval not exceeding three years between surveys .
1.2.3.2 Extension of Docking surveys:
Consideration may be given for extensions of Rule-required Drydock Survey under
special circumstances. An underwater inspection by a diver shall be required for such
extensions.
1.2.4 Underwater Inspection in Lieu of Drydocking Survey (UWILD)
1.2.4.1 An VRs approved underwater inspection by a diver may be considered equivalent
to a Drydocking Survey, up to and including Special Periodical Survey No. 4. The
UWILD after Special Periodical Survey No. 4 may be approved by special
considerations by VR.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
171
1.2.4.2 Should the UWILD be contemplated, underwater inspection procedures per
Appendix VIII, Part 9 are to be submitted for review and approval in advance of
the survey.
1.2.4.3 The Underwater survey is to provide the information normally obtained from the
docking survey, so far as is practicable.
1.2.4.4 Proposals for underwater surveys are to be submitted in advance of the survey being
required so that satisfactory arrangements can be acceptable.
1.2.4.5 The under water survey is to be carried out at agreed geographical location under
the surveillance of a VR surveyor, with the unit at a suitable draught in sheltered
waters; the under-water visibility is to be good and the hull bellow the waterline is
to be clean. The surveyor is to be sastisfied that the method of pictorial presentation
is satisfactory. There is to be good two way communication between the surveyor
and the diver.
1.2.4.6 Diving and under water survey operation are to be carried out by firms recognized
by VR.
1.2.4.7 If the in-water survey reveals damage or deterioration that requires early attention,
the surveyor may require that the unit be dry-docked in order that a fuller survey
can be undertaken and necessary work carried out.
1.2.4.8 Where a unit has an IWS notation, the conditions of the high resistant paint is to be
confirmed at each dry-docking in order that the IWS notation can be maintained
1.2.5 Intermediate surveys
Intermediate Surveys are to be carried out on all units instead of the second or third
Annual Survey after completion of Classification Survey and Special Survey.
1.2.6 Special surveys
1.2.6.1 Survey intervals
Special Surveys are to be carried out at 5-yearly interval. The first Special Survey is
to be completed within 5 year from the date of build or date of Special Survey for
classification and thereafter 5 years from the date of completion of the previous
Special Survey.
1.2.6.2 Commencement of special surveys
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
172
The Special Survey may be commenced at the 4
th
annual Survey after Clasification
Survey or previous Special Survey and be progressed during the succeeding year
with view to completion by the 5th anniversary date. As part of the preparation for
the Special Survey, the thickness measurement should be dealt with, so far as
practical in connection with the 4th Annual Survey.
1.2.6.3 Premature commencement of Special survey
Special surveys which are commenced prior to the date are not to extend over a
period greater than 12 months, except with the priod approval of the VR.
1.2.6.4 Completion of special survey
When a Special survey is not completely carried out one time, the date of completion
of the Special Survey will be the date at which the principal part of the requirements
is complied with.
1.2.6.5 Unusual Cases
Special consideration may be given to Special Periodical Survey requirements in the
case of Floating Installations of unusual design, in lay-up or in unusual
circumstances. Consideration may be given for extensions of Rule-required Special
Periodical Surveys under extreme circumstances.
1.2.6.6 Continuous Surveys
(1) At the request of Owners, and after approval of the proposed arrangements by
the VR a system of Continuous Survey may be undertaken where by the
Special survey requirements are carried out in rotation to complete all the
requirements of the particular Special Survey within five years and interval of
consecutive surveys of each part or item is not to exceed five years.
(2) If any defects are found during the surveys, further parts or items are to be
opened up and examined as considered necessary by the Surveyor, and the
defects are to be repaired to his satisfaction.
(3) Where some units of machinary are opened up and examined by the chief
engineer as normal routine for maintenance at ports where the surveyor is not
available or at sea, the opened-up-inspection of the units, at the request of
Owners, under certain conditions, may be dispensed with at the discretion of
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
173
the surveyor subject to a confirmatory survey at the next port of call where the
surveyor is available.
(4) Drydocking or UWILD may be performed at any time during the cycle 5 year,
provided that all requirements of 1.4 or 1.5 are met and thickness measurements are
taken when the vessel is surveyed.
1.2.7 Boiler surveys
1.2.7.1 Survey intervals
(1) Water tube boilers used for propulsion including double evaporation boilers
are to be surveyed internally and externally at 2.5 year intervals, except for
ships with single main boiler, where surveys are to be carried out at 2.5 year
intervals until they are 7.5 years old, and subsequently annually.
(2) Fired tube boilers: Boilers are to be surveyed when they are 4 year old and 6
years old, after that they are to be surveyed annually.
(3) All other boilers of essential service, boilers of non-essential service having
working pressure exceeding 0.35 MPa (3.5 bar or 50 psi) and heating surface
excceding 4,5 m
2
, exhaust gas boilers, economizers, thermal oil heaters and
steam generators are to be surveyed internally and externally at 2,5 yearly
intervals
(4) Notwithstanding the requirements in (1) and (2), certain types of boilers, when
the VR deems it necessary, may be required to be surveyed internally and
externally at yearly intervals.
(5) General inspection of boilers including confirmation of their safety devices is
to be carried out at yearly intervas in the course of annual survey of the unit
(see 3.7.1(6) TCVN 6259-1:2003).
(6) Notwithstanding the requirements in (1) and (2), an extension of boiler survey
may be granted for a period not exceeding 6 months from the due date, when
requested by the Owners, subject to the survey for the extension.
1.2.8 Propeller shaft and stern tube shaft surveys
1.2.8.1 Ordinary surveys are to be carried out at intervals specified below:
(1) Propeller shaft kind 1 specified in 1.2.39 Part 1-A TCVN 6259-1:2003, are to
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
174
be surveyed at least once every four years for units fitted with water-
lubricated stern tube bearings (Which include shaft bracket bearings, the same
being referred to hereinafter in this part) and five years for units fitted with
oil-lubricated stern tube bearings .
(2) Propeller shaft kind 2 specified in 1.2.39 Part 1-A TCVN 6259-1:2003, are to
be surveyed at least once every two and a half years. Where, however, the part
of the construction of the shaft in the stern tube bearing corresponds to the
shaft kind 1 and the construction of the shaft between the stern tube and the
shaft bracket bearing corresponds to the shaft kind 2, the shaft may be
surveyed at the intervals specified in 1.2.8.1(1) , on condition that the part of
the shaft which corresponds to the shaft kind 2 is surveyed at least once every
two and half years .
(2) Notwithstanding the requirements in 1.2.8.1(1) , Ordinary surveys for
propeller shaft kind 1A and stern tube shaft kind 1A, propeller shaft kind 1B
and stern tube shaft kind 1B, and propeller shaft kind 1C may be postponned
for not more than the period given in following Table from the date of the
postponement survey prescribed in 3.11.2-2 TCVN 6259-1:2003 provided that
the survey is carried out on the due date of the Ordinary Survey .
Table 8-1: Postponement period
No Kind of postponement
Survey Kind of shafts
Postponement
Survey kind A
Postponement
Survey kind B
Postponement
Survey kind C
1 Shafts kind 1A - -
2 Shafts kind 1B 1 year 2,5 year -
3 Shafts kind 1C 5 year
1.2.8.2 Notwithstanding the requirements in 1.2.8.1 or 1.2.8.2, The Ordinary Surveys may
be postponned for not more than six months, when requested by the Owners, on the
basis of the approval by the VR. However, this postponement may be granted only
once in an interval between Ordinary Surveys.
1.3 Annual surveys
1.3.1 Requirements for Annual Surveys Hull
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
175
1.3.1.1 At each annual survey beetween special surveys, general condition for hull,
equipment, fire extinguishing systems, etc. are to be examined as far as practicable,
annual surveys includes following items and requirements specified in 1.3.1.2 to
1.3.1.7:
(1) Shell plating and piping systems above the waterline, externally;
(2) Visual inspection is to be carried out for structures close to water level to
make sure there is no damage due to impact (due to unit or other reasons).
(3) Opening a such as side scuttles, doors, etc. together with their closing
appliances of which watertightness and weathertightness are required ;
(4) Each deck ;
(5) Areas potentially having factigue damage due to stress concentration NDT
examination may be required if deemed necessary.
(6) Examine all navigational lights, alarm and sound devices including helicopter
lights and other safety systems.
(7) Mooring systems ;
(a) General examination of mooring lines ;
(b) General examination of installations for mooring systems ;
(c) General examination of anchors for anchor mooring systems ;
(d) General examination of steel pipes for tension mooring systems ;
(e) General examination of fenders or mooring lines for dolphin mooring
systems ;
(8) Ventilators, air pipes and sounding pipes together with their closing
appliances ;
(9) Protection of the crew, guard rails, lifelines, gangways and deckhouses
accommodating crew;
(10) Construction of fire protection and means of escape including functioning test
as far as practicable;
(11) Fire extingguishing systems including operation and functioning tests as far as
practicable;
(12) Examination of fire control plan;
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
176
(13) Examination of fire detection system as far as practicable;
(14) Examination of main fire system and verification of performance of fire
pumps including emergency pumps;
(15) Examination of fire main, nozzles, hydrauts to ensure their satisfactory
performance and placed in order ;
(16) Examination of control system of fixed fire extinguishing control system, fire
main, fire alarm signal, ensuring they are well maintained ;
(17) Fire extingguishing bottles are placed in order and well maintenance ;
(18) Remote control and shut-down system to stop fans, engines, stop tranfering
fuel to engine room;
(19) Shutdown systems for ventilation, funnels, skylight, acess and other relevant
parts ;
(20) Examination to ensure fire extinguishing tools are adequate and good order.
(21) Examination of all hazardous areas including watertight doors and boundaries;
(22) Ensure following equipments are in good operating condition :
(a) Ventilation system, fire extinguishing system, fans and relating
devices;
(b) All machanical and electrical safety devices;
(c) Other safety equipment such as alarm system and communication
system.
(23) For the units which are necessary to be provided with the stability booklet,
loading manual and the operating booklet are kept on board the unit for ready
use ;
1.3.1.2 Suspect Areas and Ballast Tanks
Suspect areas of the hull are to be examined , including an overall and Close-up
Survey of those suspect areas which were identified at the previous surveys. Areas of
substantial corrosion identified at previous surveys are to have thickness
measurements taken. Where extensive areas of corrosion are found, thickness
measurements are to be carried out and renewals and/or repairs made when wastage
exceeds allowable margins.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
177
Where substantial corrosion is found, additional thickness measurements in
accordance with are to be taken to confirm the extent of substantial corrosion.
For Installations over 15 years of age: All sea water balast tanks closed to cargo(oil)
tanks, in which thermal oil heater is used, are to be internal examined. If a structural
defect was not found, the scope of examination is only included reviewing the
efffectiveness of coating systems.
1.3.1.3 Helicopter Deck
Where areas of the installation are designated for helicopter operations, the helicopter
deck, deck supporting structure, deck surface, deck drainage, tie downs, markings,
lighting, wind indicator, securing arrangements where fitted safety netting or
equivalent, access arrangements including emergency escape, and access for fire
fighting and rescue personnel, are to be examined.
1.3.1.4 Cargo Tanks
Cargo tank openings including gaskets, covers and coamings.
Pressure/vacuum relief valves, flame arrestors and flame screens. Tank vent
protective devices are to be examined externally for proper assembly and
installation, damage, deterioration or traces of carryover at the outlet. Where deemed
suspect, the tank protective device is to be opened for examination.
1.3.1.5 Piping Systems
Cargo, crude oil washing, bunker, ballast, steam, and tank vent piping systems above
the weather deck and in the cargo pump room and pipe tunnels. Where suspect,
piping may be required to be pressure-tested at the working pressure, thickness
measured or both.
Cargo and stripping pumps including foundations, gland seals, operation of remote
control and shut-down devices. Confirmation that cargo discharge pressure gauges
and level indicator systems are operational
1.3.1.6 Electrical Bonding and Equipment
Electrical bonding arrangements on the weather deck and in cargo pump rooms,
including bonding straps, where fitted, of cargo piping systems carrying flammable
liquids and piping systems routed through hazardous areas.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
178
Confirmation that electrical equipment in hazardous locations, including the cargo
pump room, has been properly maintained, including the following items:
Intrinsically safe and explosion-proof features of electrical equipment
installed in the hazardous areas, in particular any associated sealing
arrangement.
The physical condition of cables (wiring) and fixtures and test of insulation
resistance of the circuits. In cases where a proper record of testing is
maintained, consideration may be given to accepting recent readings.
The cable supports and the means of cable protection from mechanical
damage, as originally provided.
Gas detection system in the cargo pump room, if fitted.
Temperature-sensing devices fitted on bulkhead shaft glands, pump bearings
and casings, if any
1.3.1.7 Cargo Pump Room
Examination of pump room bulkheads for signs of leakage or fractures and, in
particular, the sealing arrangement of all penetrations of bulkheads.
Confirmation that there are no potential sources of ignition in or near the cargo pump
room and cargo area and that pump room access ladders are in good condition.
Operation of pump room bilge pumping system.
Pump room ventilation system including ducting, dampers and screens.
1.3.1.8 For column stabilized units, general examinitions of the following iterms are to be
carried:
(1) Upper hull and its supporting structure above the waterline the deck, deck
houses, structures attached to the deck, accessible internal spaces;
(2) Exposed parts of columns and bracings together with their connections above
the waterline ;
(3) Hatchways, manholes, and other openings in freeboard deck (bulkhead deck)
and enclosed superstructure Decks ;
(4) Machinery casings and covers, companionways, and deck houses protecting
openings in freeboard or enclosed-superstructure decks;
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
179
(5) Portlights, together with deadcovers, cargo ports, bow or stern entries, chutes,
and similar openings in hull sides or ends, below the freeboard deck or in way
of enclosed superstructures ;
(6) Ventilators, tank vent pipes together with flame screens ;
(7) Overboard discharges from enclosed spaces on or below the freeboard deck ;
(8) Watertight bulkheads and end bulkheads of enclosed superstructures;
(9) Closing appliances for all of the above, including hatch covers, doors, check
valves;
(10) Protection of the crew, guard rails, lifelines, gangways and deckhouses
accommodating crew ;
(11) The Surveyors are to be satisfied at each Annual Survey that no material
alterations have been made to the Floating Installation, its structural
arrangements, subdivision, superstructure, fittings and closing appliances upon
which the load line assignment is based.
1.3.2 Annual survey for Machinery installations and Electrical Installations
1.3.2.1 At each annual survey between special surveys for machinery installations and
electrical installations, general examination of machinery installations and electrical
installations corresponding to relevant machinery installations and electrical
installations of the units are be carried out in addition to the following surveys:
(1) The propelling machinery and essential auxiliaries are to be generally
examined. The surveyor may, in addition, require such further items ro be
opened up as considered to ascertain that theyare in good working condition.
(2) Machinery and boiler spaces with particular attention to the fire and explosion
hazards, and also emergency escape routes are to be examined.
(3) All main and auxiliary steering gears including their associated equipment and
control systems are to be examined and tested in operation.
(4) All means of communication between the navigation bridge, control station
and the machinery control positions, as well as the bridge and the alternative
steering positions are to be tested.
(5) Bilge pumping systems and bilge wells including operation of pumps, remote
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
180
reachrods and level alarms where fitted, are to be examined as far as
practicable.
(6) Boilers, thermal oil heaters, pressure and vessels and their mountings
including safety devices, foundations, controls relieving gear, high pressure
and steam escape piping, insulation and gauges are to be externally examined.
Confirmation of the safety devices of the boilers and thermal oil heaters may
be required as considered necessary by the surveyor.
(7) Electrical machinery, emergency sources of the electrical power, switchgear
and other electrical equipments are to be examined and also to be tested in
operation as feasible. If automatic control system is fitted, it is to be tested on
both automatic and manual modes.
(8) Confirmation as far as practicable of the operation of all emergency sources of
power is to be made and, if they are automatic, also in the automatic mode.
(9) Parts which are opened up for maintenance at Owner's option are to be
examinated as necessary.
(10) Where automatic and/or remote controls are fitted for essential machinery,
they are to be tested to demonstrate that they are in good working condition.
(11) Dynamic positioning systems are to be generally examined and performance
tests of them are to be carried out as far as practicable.
1.3.2.2 General conditions of electrical installations in the hazardous areas are to be
examined. For the units of ten years of age and over, insulation resistance of these
installations is to be measured. The measurement, however, may be dispensed with
in case the proper measurement records are kept on board and found satisfactory by
the surveyor.
1.3.2.3 Following Fire-extinguishing apparatus/ systems are to be examined and/or tested:
(1) Fire Main System
Fire main system, including isolating valves and hydrants. Fire mains are to
undergo satisfactory pressure testing at the working pressure.
(2) Fire Pumps
Fire pumps, including verification that each fire pump including the
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
181
emergency fire pump can deliver two jets of water simultaneously from
different hydrants.
(3) Fire Fighting Equipment
Verification that fire hoses, nozzles, applicators and spanners are in good
working condition and situated at their respective locations.
(4) Semi-Portable and Portable Fire Extinguishers
Verification that all semi-portable and portable fire extinguishers are in their
stowed positions, checking for evidence of proper maintenance and servicing,
conducting random check for evidence of discharged containers.
(5) Fire Control Plans
Confirmation that Fire Control Plans are properly posted .
(6) International Shore Connection
Confirmation that an international shore connection is provided..
(7) Fixed Fire Fighting System
Examination of fixed fire-fighting system controls, piping, instructions and
marking, checking for evidence of proper maintenance and servicing,
including date of last systems tests; foam concentrates are to be tested at
intervals recommended by the manufacturer and renewed if found
unsatisfactory for further use.
An external examination of piping and cutout valves of cargo tank and cargo
pump room fixed fire-fighting systems..
(8) Remote Controls
Verification, as far as practicable, that the remote controls for stopping fans
and machinery and closing valves for fuel oil in machinary rooms are in
working order.
(9) Fireman's Outfits
Verification that the firemans outfits are complete and in satisfactory
condition .
(10) Closing Arrangements
Examination of the closing arrangements of openings in funnels, skylights,
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
182
ventilators, doorways and tunnels. Ventilator ducts are to be opened to verify
satisfactory condition and operation of dampers.
(11) Deck Foam System
Confirmation that the deck foam system is in operating condition.
(12) Unloading area
An examination of unloading piping, including welded joints, identification,
means of segregation from the cargo main line, closing arrangement of the
unloading connection, draining and leak detection arrangements and spill
containment. Means of communications between the cargo control room and
the loading/unloading connection to be tested .
1.3.2.4 For the production units, the following are to be carried out:
(1) A general examination of :
(a) Cargo tank openings and pressure/vacuum valves;
(b) Crude oil piping systems;
(c) Cargo pump rooms ;
(d) Escape routes ;
(e) Fire extinction systems in crude oil tank and pump room area.
(2) The following components and systems are to be surveyed and tested for
correct functioning :
(a) Gas detection systems, flammable and toxic gases;
(b) Fire detection system;
(c) System for crude oil tank level measurements;
(d) General alarm system and communication between control stations
(3) In hazardous areas the following equipment and systems are to be surveyed
and tested :
(a) Ventilation system including overpressure alarms ;
(b) Alarms/shut-down for pressurized equipment and rooms ;
(c) Electrical equipment and cables ;
(d) Self-closing gastight doors, air locks, openings and accesses;
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
183
(e) Protection devices for combustion equipment and engines;
(4) The emergency shut-down system is to be surveyed and function tested for
following equipments and components. Special attention is to be given to both
manual and automatic activation, power supply and alarms:
(a) ventilation;
(b) wellhead valves/oil production facilities ;
(c) all non-essential electrical equipment and essential electrical equipment
(5) Where cross connections between piping system for oil production and safe
piping system exits, the means for avoiding possible contamination of the safe
system with the hazardous medium is to be surveyed
1.3.2.5 For the production plants , the following are to be carried out :
(1) For equipment installed subsea at time of an annual survey a review of the
maintenance manual/test log is an acceptable survey method, provided
satisfactory records and acceptable maintenance procedure .
(2) An overall survey is to be carried out with particular emphasis on the
structural interity of:
(a) Flare ;
(b) derrick;
(c) skids .
(3) Wire ropes (including end attachments) and sheaves of the tensioners and
associated systems are to be surveyed. If deemed necessary by the surveyor,
checking by MPI shall be carried out.
(4) Pressure vessels and heat exchangers are to be externally surveyed. The
general condition including mountings, piping and possible insulation is to be
ascertained. The surveyor may require opening/internal survey or thickness
measurements and /or crack detection test if found necessary. Safety valves,
instrumentation and systems on tanks/separators are to be surveyed and tested
in operating condition as found necessary by the surveyor .
(5) Piping system including flexible pipes is to be surveyed and pressure tested to
working pressure. Thickness measurements are to be carried out as deemed
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
184
necessary by the surveyor
(6) High pressure/capacity pumps and compressors are to be externally surveyed
and function tested .
(7) Risers shall be visually surveyed and inspected for corrosion, cracks and wear
as far as accessible. Pressure tests to working pressure are to be carried out .
(8) The blowout preventers shall be surveyed and pressure tested to working
pressure. NDT is to be carried out to the extent deemed necessary by the
surveyor .
(9) Riser handling devices and lifting devices for production and associated
operations to be generally surveyed and functional testing of appliance and
safety devices carried out as found necessary by the sutveyor. It is to be
verified that the marking and component certificates are available and
acceptable .
(10) The process and utility safety systems are to be surveyed during operation and
tested for correct funstioning as found necessary by the surveyor with
particular emphasis on:
(a) Shut-down valves ;
(b) Shut-down instrumentation ;
(c) Shut-down sequence and logic ;
(d) Inter connection with emergency shut-down system;
(e) Regulation/control system
(f) Alarm/system;
(11) Drainage systems for produced liquids, for hazardous and non-hazardous area
to be surveyed .
(12) Water protection systems in process area are to be surveyed .
1.3.2.6 Other examinations and tests deemed necessary by the surveyor are to be carried
out .
1.4 Docking surveys
1.4.1 General
1.4.1.1 The unit is to be placed on blocks of sufficient height in a drydock or on a ship way.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
185
1.4.1.2 However, where the in-water survey is requested by the Owner and approved by the
VR as substitution for a survey in a drydock or on a ship way, the in-water survey
may be accepted. Where a docking survey is altered to the in-water survey,
examinations deemed appropriate by the VR are to be carried out .
1.4.1.3 In addition to the requirements in 1.4.2, examinations as comprehensive as special
surveys may be required as to the iterms which are considered necessary by the
surveyor on the occasion of docking surveys .
1.4.2 Requirements for Docking survey
1.4.2.1 For all units, surveys are to be carried out in accordance with 3.4.1, Chapter 3, Part
1-B TCVN6259- 1:2003.
1.4.2.2 In addition to the requirements in -1, the following are to be to be performed during
all of the Drydock Surveys:
(1) Cathodic potential readings are to be taken from representative positions on
the entire underwater body and evaluated to confirm that the cathodic
protection system is operating within design limits.
(2) Sacrificial anodes are to be examined for depletion and placed in satisfactory .
(3) Impressed current system anodes and cathodes are to be checked for damage,
fouling by marine growth and carbonate deposits. The current and voltage
demands of the system are to also be checked to ensure the system is
functioning .
(4) Additional examinations are to be performed on the wind and water areas of
the structures where coating breaks are evident. Thickness measurements in
these areas may be required if found necessary by the attending Surveyor.
1.4.2.3 Particular attention is to be given to corrosion control systems in representative
ballast tanks, free-flooding areas and other locations subjected to sea water from
both sides .
1.4.2.4 If the unit is provided with the dynamic positioning system, thrusters are to be
examined.
1.4.2.5 In conjunction with dry docking surveys, after special survey No. 1 and between
subsequent special surveys, the following ballast spaces are to be internally
examinrd, thickness gauged and placed in satisfactory condition. Alternatively,
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
186
ballast tank corrosion control arrangements are to be verified effective .
(1) For ship type and barge type units : One peak tank and at least two other
representative ballast tanks between the peak bulkheads used primary for
water ballast .
(2) For column stabilized units: Representative ballast tanks in footings, lower
hulls or free-flooding compartments as accessible, and at least two ballast
tanks in columns or upper hull, if accessible.
1.5 Underwater Inspection in Lieu of Drydocking Survey
1.5.1 General
1.5.1.1 An approved underwater inspection by a diver may be considered equivalent to a
Drydocking Survey, up to and including Special Periodical Survey No. 4.
1.5.1.2 For each drydocking or equivalent underwater examination after Special Periodical
Survey No. 4, requests to conduct an UWILD, in accordance with previously
approved plans, . For requirements of UWILD (in accordance with previously
approved procedures) after special periodical survey No 4, proposal by units owner
for this UWILD is to be submitted for consideration well in advance of the
proposed survey. The UWILD after special periodical survey No 4 may be accepted
by special consideration by VR.
1.5.1.3 Should the UWILD be contemplated, underwater inspection procedures per
Appendix VIII, Part 9 are to be submitted for review and approval in advance of
the survey. This approved procedure is to be made available onboard. In addition,
the inspection procedures are to also consist of the following:
(1) Scope of inspection that is not to be less than as noted in Appendix VII, Part
9.
(2) Procedure for divers to identify the exact location at which they are
conducting their inspection.
(3) Procedure for cleaning the marine growth for inspection purposes that is to
include the extent and location of the underwater cleaning.
(4) Procedure and extent for measuring the cathodic potential readings in way of
the structures.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
187
(5) Procedure and extent for taking thickness gaugings of the structures and NDT
of critical joints.
(6) Qualifications of all divers conducting the inspection, NDT and thickness
gaugings.
(7) The type of underwater video and photography, including means of
communication, monitoring and recording.
(8) For Underwater Inspections in lieu of Drydocking Surveys (UWILD)
associated with Special Periodical Survey, means are to be provided to permit
the opening up of all sea valves and overboard discharges for internal
examination. In addition, all Special Periodical Survey items related to the
underwater portion of the hull or structure, including the gauging requirements
are to be dealt with during the underwater survey.
1.5.1.4 However, during conducting UWILD if the inspections results was found
unsatisfactory by Surveyor, Surveyor may reject these inspections results and may
require that the unit be dry-docked.
1.5.2 Parts to be Examined
1.5.2.1 Hull and hull equipments of Floating storage unit
For ship-type and barge-type units:
The following items are to be examined, as applicable:
(1) The keel, stem, stern frame, rudder, propeller, and outside of side and bottom plating
are to be cleaned as necessary and examined, together with bilge keels, thrusters,
exposed parts of the stern bearing and seal assembly, sea chest, rudder pintles and
gudgeons, together with their respective securing arrangements.
(2) All sea connections and overboard discharge valves and cocks, including their
attachments to the hull or sea chests, are to be externally examined. All nonmetallic
expansion pieces in the sea-water cooling and circulating systems are to be examined
both externally and internally. The stern bearing clearance or weardown and rudder
bearing clearances are to be ascertained and reported on.
For column-stabilized units, the following are to be examined:
(1) External surfaces of the upper hull or platform, footings, pontoons or lower hulls,
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
188
underwater areas of columns, bracing and their connections, as applicable, are to be
selectively cleaned and examined. These areas include joints of critical structural
members, areas susceptible to damage from supply vessels, anchor chains, dropped
equipment, corrosion and erosion from loss of coating, or sand scouring and areas of
progressed and accumulated wear-and-tear.
(2) Nondestructive testing may be required of areas found to be suspect. Joints of
different configurations of major structural members are to be selected, cleaned and
magnetic particle inspected. The selection of these joints are to be such that all joints
underwater are to be inspected every five years.
(3) Sea chests and strainers are to be cleaned and examined.
(4) External portions of propulsion units are to be examined, if applicable.
(5) The type, location and extent of corrosion control (coatings, cathodic protection
systems, etc.), as well as effectiveness, and repairs or renewals to same should be
reported in each survey. Particular attention is to be given to corrosion control
systems in ballast tanks, free-flooding areas and other locations subjected to sea
water from both sides.
(6) All tanks and voids that are to be internally examined are to be thoroughly ventilated
and gas freed prior to being entered and are to be carefully monitored for pocketing
or emissions of hazardous gases during examination.
(7) In conjunction with Drydocking Surveys (or equivalent), the following ballast spaces
are to be internally examined, and the effectiveness of coatings or corrosion control
arrangements are to be verified either visually by indicator strips or by thickness
gauging (as considered necessary), placed in satisfactory condition, as found
necessary, and reported upon:
(a) Representative ballast tanks in footings, lower hulls or free-flooding
compartments, as accessible.
(b) At least two ballast tanks in columns or upper hull, if applicable.
1.5.2.2 Mooring System
For mooring systems, the following are to be cleaned and examined, where
applicable:
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
189
(1) The mooring anchor chain or cable tensions are to be measured and the end
connections of these components are to be examined. All mooring chains are
to be generally examined for their entire lengths. Anchors, cables and their
respective handling means are to be examined.
(2) The buoyancy tanks are to be cleaned and examined, if applicable.
(3) Chain and stopper assemblies are to be cleaned, examined and NDT
performed, as considered necessary by the attending Surveyor.
(4) Areas of high stress or low fatigue life are to be preselected, cleaned and NDT
performed, if considered necessary.
(5) Scour in way of anchors or anchor piles is to be examined.
(6) Cathodic potential readings are to be taken from representative positions on
the entire underwater structure of the mooring system to confirm that the
cathodic protection system is operating within design limits.
(7) Highly stressed, high wear and tear areas of the mooring chain are to be
closely examined and nondestructively tested, if found necessary by the
attending Surveyor. These include areas in way of the stoppers and sea bed
touchdown areas.
1.5.2.3 Import System
For import systems, the following are to be cleaned and examined, where applicable:
(1) The entire riser system.
(2) The arch support buoyancy tanks, their structures and the clamping devices.
(3) The flexible riser, including all end flanges and bolting arrangements and
spreader bars, if applicable.
1.5.2.4 Export System
For export systems, the following are to be cleaned and examined, where applicable:
(1) The entire export flexible system is to be examined for damage due to chafing
and fatigue fractures.
(2) All navigation aids are to be examined and functionally tested
1.6 Intermediate Surveys
1.6.1 General
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
190
1.6.1.1 At each intermediate survey, all the requirements for an annual survey are to be
complied with .
1.6.1.2 In addition to the above requirement, surveys required in following parts are to be
carried out:
1.6.2 Intermediate survey for hull
1.6.2.1 For all units, the following requirements are to be complied with :
(1) Performance tests of openings such as side scuttles, doors, etc. required
watertightness and weathertightness together with their closing appliances;
However, performance tests may be dispensed with the discretion of the
Surveyor.
(2) Performance tests of positioning systems for a long period of time together
with their installations ; and
(3) Examination of anchor racks and fair leaders for anchor cables above the
waterline together with hull connection of these .
(4) Examination of electrical equipment in hardous areas in particular :
(a) Grounding;
(b) Explosive casing of equipment;
(c) Pressure regulating device casing and relevant components ;
(d) Conditions of safety devices ;
(e) Cable condition ;
(f) Electrical shutdown of areas fitted with dampers;
(g) Performance of pressure regulating device and function of alarm signal
1.6.2.2 For column stabilized units, examinations of the following items are to be carried
out as far as practicable .
(1) Representative ballast tanks in footings, lower hull or free-flooding
compartments as accessible, and at least two ballast tanks in columns, if
accessible ;
(2) External columns, bracings, lower hulls and footings ;
(3) Connection parts between upper hull and columns, and columns and lower
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
191
hulls or footings, and bracings. If deemed necessary by the Surveyor, the
Surveyor may request a nondestructive test of these parts
1.6.2.3 For ship type units and barge type units, general examinations of construction of the
surrounding to openings such as a moompool above the waterline are to be carried
out in addition to 1.6.2.1.
1.7 Special surveys
1.7.1 General
1.7.1.1 The first special survey of the unit after the classification survey during
construction is designted as ' 'Special survey No.1' and subsequent special surveys
as designated as 'Special survey No.2' 'Special survey No.3 ' and ...
1.7.1.2 The kind of special survey of the unit not built under survey is to be determined in
the similar sequence as specified in 1.7.1.1 basing upon what kind of special survey
was corresponding to her classification survey
1.7.2 Special surveys for hull
1.7.2.1 Special Periodical Survey of Hull is to include compliance with the foregoing
Annual Survey and Drydocking.
1.7.2.2 For all units, Special survey No. 1 for hull, equipment, fire extinguishing systems,
etc., examinations and tests specified in the following are to be carried out :
(1) Internal and external of hull, especially machinery room, cofferdams, and
water tanks such as water ballast tanks, and oil tanks such as fuel oil tanks
deemed necessary by the VR are to be examined corresponding to the kinds of
the special survey .
(2) An overall survey is to be carried out with particular emphasis on the
structural intergrity of the deck with supporting structure .
(3) Tanks are to be tested under the pressure corresponding to the maximum head
that can be experienced in service or designed. A pressure tests of the tanks
may be omitted, provided that the Surveyor is satisfied with the condition of
the tanks from the results of an external and internal examinations of the
tanks.
(4) The thickness of structural members of the following parts listed in (a) to (c)
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
192
are to be gauged. For accurate gauging, appropriate ultrasonic equipment or
other approved means are to be used. The results of the gaugings are to be
reported to the VR .
(a) Structural members in any locations considered by the surveyor to be
prone to rapid wastage showing excessive corosion.
(b) Representative parts of splash zones or related structure near the
draught of operational condition .
(c) Suficient parts of structural members for general asessment and
recording of corosion pattern .
(5) Anchors, chain cables and ropes for temporary mooring are to be ranged,
examined and measured .
(6) For mooring systems, the following examinations are to be carried out :

(a) Thorough examination of mooring lines
(b) Thorough examination of installations for mooring systems
(c) Thorough examination of anchors for anchor mooring systems
(d) Thorough examination of steel pipes for tension mooring system and
thickness gauging of the representative part of steel pipes
(e) General examination of fenders or mooring lines for dolphin mooring
system
(7) Non-destructive tests may be required at important parts among those stated in
the foregoing (1), (2) and (3) where deemed necessary by the VR
1.7.2.3 For column stabilized units, the following examinations are to be carried out.
However, where the units is examined in floating condition, the examinations are to
be appropriate to the VR.
(1) Connections of columns and bracings to upper hull or platform and lower hull
or pontoons are to be sufficiently cleaned and examined .
(2) Joints of supporting structure including bracings together with gussets and
brackets and internal continuation or back-up structure for those are to be
examined.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
193
(3) Internal and external parts of columns, lower hulls or footinga and bracings
are to be examined
(4) Non-destructive examination may be required at suspect areas.
(5) A deadweight survey is to be carried out. Where the deadweight survey
indicates a change from the calculated light ship displacement in excess of 1%
of the operating displacement, an inclining test is to be conducted.
(6) All tanks, compartments and free-flooding spaces throughout the vessel are to
be examined externally and internally. Internal examinations of lower hull are
to be specially considered. Watertight integrity of tanks, bulkheads, hull,
bulkhead deck and other compartments are to be verified by visual inspection.
Suspect areas may be required to be tested for tightness, nondestructively
tested or thickness gauged. Tanks and other normally closed compartments are
to be ventilated, gas-freed and cleaned, as necessary, to expose damage and
allow for a meaningful examination for excessive wastage. Internal
examination and testing of void spaces, compartments filled with foam or
corrosion inhibitors and tanks used only for lube oil, light fuel oil, diesel oil or
other non-corrosive products may be waived, provided that, upon general
examination, the Surveyor considers their condition to be satisfactory.
External thickness gauging may be required to confirm corrosion control.
(7) Attachments of anchor racks and anchor cable fairleads are to be examined.
Foundations in way of selective anchor line fairlead support structures are to
be cleaned and nondestructive examinations performed. Internal support
structures in way of these foundations are to be closely examined.
(8) Applicable structures, such as pipe racks, process support structures, deck
houses, superstructures, helicopter landing areas and their respective
attachments to the deck or hull..
(9) Foundations and supporting headers, brackets and stiffeners for process
related apparatus, where attached to hull, deck, superstructure or deck house.
(10) At Special Periodical Survey No. 2 and subsequent Special Periodical
Surveys, representative gaugings are to be required in accordance with Table
8-2. Special attention should be paid to the splash zones on hulls, columns and
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
194
ballast tanks, free-flooded spaces and the bottom hulls. The thickness gauging
requirements indicated in the table may be reduced or increased, as deemed
necessary or appropriate by the Surveyor .

Table 8-2 Thickness Gauging Requirements for Column-Stabilized Units
Special Periodical
Survey No 1
Special Periodical
Survey No 2
Special Periodical
Survey No 3
Subsequent Special
Periodical Survey
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
195
1) Suspect areas
throughout the
unit.
2) Columns and
bracings where
wastage is evident
in Splash Zone.

1) Suspect areas
throughout the unit.
2) Representative
gaugings of columns
and bracings in
Splash Zone
together with
internals in way as
deemed necessary.
3) Special and
primary application
structure where
wastage is evident.

1) Suspect areas
2)Representative
gaugings,
throughout, of
special and primary
application
structures.
3) 1 girth belt of each
of 2 columns and 2
bracings in Splash
Zone together with
internals in way as
deemed necessary.
4) Chain locker
internals as deemed
necessary.
5) Lower hulls in
way of mooring lines
where wastage is
evident.
lower hull between
one set of columns.
1) Suspect areas
2)Comprehensive
gaugings, throughout,
of special and primary
application structures.
of onehalf of the
columns and bracings
in Splash Zone and
internals in way as
deemed necessary (i.e.,
gauge half of the units
columns and bracings
in
Splash Zone).
4) Chain locker
internals as deemed
necessary.
5) Lower hulls in way
of mooring lines where
wastage is evident.
lower hull between one
set of columns.
Note: Definitions for primary and special structures see TCVN 5318:2001
1.7.2.4 For ship and barge type units, All cargo tanks, ballast tanks, combined cargo/ballast
tanks, including double bottom tanks, pump rooms, pipe tunnels, cofferdams and
void spaces bounding cargo tanks, decks and outerhull are to be examined. This
examination is to be supplemented by thickness measurementand testing as
required, to ensure that the structural integrity remains effective.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
196
(1) Cargo piping on deck, including Crude Oil Washing (COW) piping, and all
piping systems within the above tanks and spaces are to be examined and
operationally tested under working pressure to attending Surveyors
satisfaction to ensure that tightness and condition remain satisfactory. Special
attention is to be given to ballast piping in cargo tanks and any cargo piping in
ballast tanks and void spaces. Surveyors are to be advised on all occasions
when this piping, including valves and fittings, is open during repair periods
and can be examined internally .
(2) Structural appendages and ducts for posioning system are to be examined.
(3) Hull structure around the openings such as the moon pool is to be examined.
(4) Non-destructive tests may be required at important parts or stress concentrated
parts where deemed necessary by the VR.
1.7.2.5 The requirements for Close-up Survey and thickness gauging, per TCVN 6259-1A:
2003 will be applied to ship- and barge-type units in the following cases:
(1) The ballast tanks are uncoated.
(2) Tank coatings are in Poor condition as definition
(3) Soft coatings are found to be no longer effective
(4) Substantial corrosion is present
1.7.2.6 For ship- and barge- type units, the extent of Tank Testing are as follows:
Tanks are to be hydrostatic tested with a head of liquid to the top of hatches for cargo
tanks and to the top of air pipes for ballast tanks.
Requirements for tank testing in accordance with units age are specified as follows:
(1) Units age 5
All balast tank boundaries.
Cargo tanks boundaries facing ballast tanks, void spaces, pipe tunnels, fuel oil
tanks, pump room.
(2) 5 < Units age 10
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
197
tanks, pump room.
All cargo tanks bulkheads which form the boundaries of segregated cargoes.
(3) Units age > 10
tanks, pump room.
All remaining cargo tank bulkheads.
1.7.2.7 At special periodical surveys after special periodical survey No 1, thickness
measurement for ballast tanks is to be carried out in accordance with requerements
1.7.2.1 to 1.7.2.4 .
1.7.3 Special surveys for Machinery Installations and Electrical Installations
1.7.3.1 At each Special Periodical Survey, the following items are to be examined and
placed in satisfactory condition:
(1) All shafts except propeller and stern tube shafts thrust blocks and lineshaft
bearings are to be examined. The lower halves of bearings need not be
exposed if alignment and wear are found satisfactory
(2) Reduction gears are to be opened up as considered necessary by the surveyor
and gears, pinions, gear teeth, shafts and bearings are to be examined.
(3) Air compressors with their intercoolers, filters and/or oil separators and safety
devices, and all pums and components used for essential services are to be
opened up as considered necessary by the surveyor and examined.
Air compressors, air reservoirs and associated piping are to be examined. If air
reservoirs cannot be examined internally, they are to be hydrostatically tested.
All relief valves and safety devices are to be proven operable .
(4) All main and auxiliary steering gears including their associated equipment and
control systems are to be examined. They are to be opened up for further
examination if considered necessary by the surveyor
(5) Windlass and mooring winches are to be examined including operational tests,
check of the brake and testing of safety devices. They are to be opened up for
further examination if considered necessary by the surveyor .
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
198
(6) Evaporators are to be opened up and examined. Their safety relief valves are
to be checked under working condition.
(7) The foundation bolts and chocks of mainand auxiliary engines, gear cases,
thrust blocks and line shaft bearings are to be examined.
(8) All air reservoirs and other pressure vessels for essential services together
with their mountings and safety devices are to be cleaned internally and
examined internally and externally. If an internal examination of them is not
practicable, they are to be tested hydraulically to 1,5 times the working
pressure .
(9) Pumping and piping arrangements
(a) The bilge system : Valves, cocks and strainers of the bilge system
including the emergency bilge suction valve are to be opened up as
considered necessary by the surveyor and examinrd, and the systems
including pumps, remote reachrods and level alarms, where firtted, are
to be tested in operation .
(b) The oil fuel, feed and lubricating oil systems and ballast connections
and blanking arrangement to deep tanks, together with all pressure
filters, heaters and coolers for essential servises are to be opened up
and examined or tested as considered necessar by the surveyor. All
safety devices for the foregoing items are to be examined .
(c) Flammable oil tanks : Fuel oil tanks which do not form part of the hull
structure are to be examined internally and externally. At the special
survey No. 1, the internal examination of the tanks may be dispensed
with, provided they are found satisfactory in the external examination.
All mountings, fittings and remote shut-off device are to be examined
as far as practicable .
(10) Spare parts are to be checked .
(11) Automatic and remote controls: Where automatic and/or remote controls are
fitted up for essential machinery, they are to be tested to demonstrate that they
in good working order .
(12) Steam engines
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
199
(a) Steam turbine (main and auxiliary for essential service ) : Turbine
blading, rotors together with bearings, casings, condensers and
couplings between turbine and reduction gears are to be examined. At
the special survey No.1 for the unit having more than one main
propulsion ahead turbines of well experienced type and emergency
crossover arrangements, the turbine casings need not be opened up
provided vibration indicators and rotorposition indicators are fitted and
the operating records are considered satisfactory by the surveyor. The
bulkhead stop valves and manoeuvring valves are to be opened up and
examined .
(b) Main steam piping
1) Selected number of main steam pipes are to be removed and
examined internally. In case where the pipes are jointed together
by welding and impracticable to be removed, alternative means
such as inspection through inspection holes by optical means or
checking pipe wall thickness by ultrasonic test may be accepted,
and in this case welded seams are to be examined and crack
detected to an extent as considered necessary by the surveyor.
2) At the Special survey No. 3, and subsequent special surveys,
pipes submitted to internal examination are to be hydraulically
tested to 1,5 times the working pressure
3) Where temperature of the steam at the superheater outlet does
not exceed 450oC steam pipes need not be examined at the
special survey No. 1.
(13) Internal combustion engines ( main and auxiliary for essential service) :
(a) The following parts are to be opened up and examined : Cylinders,
covers, valves and valve gears, fuel pumps and fittings, scavenge
pumps, scavenge blowers and their driving devices, turbo chargers,
pistons, piston rods, crossheads, guides, connecting rods, crank shafts
and all bearings, crank case fastening and explosion relief devices, cam
shafts and their driving gears, attached pumps and coolers, vibration
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
200
dampers, balancers, and couplings to the shafting .
(b) Crank shafts alignment is also to be checked .
(14) Electrical installations :
Electrical installations on unit the following surveys are to be carried out :
(a) The fittings on switchboards, section boards and distribution boards are
to be examined, and overcurrent protective devices are to be checked .
(b) Cables are to be examined as far as practicable without undue
disturbance of fixtures.
(c) All generators are to be run under loaded condition, either separately or
in parallel, and performances of speed governors, generator circuit
breakers and their associated relays are to be tested as far as
practicable.
(d) The insulation resistance of generators, switchboards, motors, heaters,
lighting fittings and cables are to be tested, and adjusted if it is found
not to comply with the requirements 2.18.1 TCVN 6259-4:2003 .
(e) The whole systems of the emergency source of electrical power and its
associated equipment are to be tested to demonstrate that the whole
system is in good working order, and if they are automatic, in the
automatic mode .
(f) Navigation light indicators and all the means of communication
between the navigation bridge, the control station and the machinery
control positions as well as the bridge and alternative steering position,
if fitted, are to be tested, and where considered necessary by the
surveyor, emergency stopping means of motors for fuel oil pumps,
ventilating fans and similar loads, interlocking devices for safety
operation of electrical equipment, and motors and their control gears
for essential servces are to be tested.
(15) Machinery and boiler spaces with particular attention to the fire and explosion
hazards, and emergency escape routes are to be examined .
(16) Refrigerating installations
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
201
Where the refrigerating installations not classed with the VR are installed on
board, the following examinations are to be carried out :
(a) The condition on the safety devices attached thereto is to be examined
to ensure that they are in good order .
(b) The machinery is to be tested under working condition .
(c) Parts of condensers, evaporators, and receivers exposed to primary
refrigerant are to be tested at a pressure of 90% of the design pressure.
However, the pressure test may be replaced by means as deemed
appropriate by the VR and where the relief valves fitted on them are
adjusted to opetate at lower than the design pressure, the testing
pressure may be reduced to 90% of the setting pressure of the relief
valves. The above pressure test may be dispensed with, at the discretion
of the surveyor, except for those used for NH3 (R717) as refrigerant.
(17) For the unit having hazardous areas defined in 1.3.15 all electrical installations
and cable therein are to be examined, and insulation resistance of the electrical
circuits therein is to be measured .
(18) Dynamic positioning system
(a) Thorough examination of thruster systems is to be carried out .
(b) Non-destructive test for mayjor parts of thruster systems is to be carried
out, if deemed necessary.
(c) Examinations and performance test are to be carried out in accordance
the test procedure, if any
1.7.3.2 For oil production units the following surveys are to be carried out :
(1) Surveys for items accociated with oil production units specified in 1.3 ;
(2) For units having boilers burning crude oil or slop, survey and testing of
control equipment including monitoring systems and shut-down functions
related to the following systems are to be carried out :

(a) Ventilation and gas-tightness, fuel supply line and boiler with boiler
front lagging;
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
202
(b) Fuel pumps and heating arrangement;
(c) Drain pipe ducts and automatic closing drain traps;
(d) Inert and purging systems;
(e) Manual and automatic quick closing valves and shut-down systems;
(f) Boiler hood ventilation system;
(g) Boiler compartment ventilation ;
(h) Boiler front extinguishing system;
(i) Pilot burner arrangement ;
(j) Gastight bulkhead penetrations;
(k) Gas detection system;
(l) Fuel heater .
(3) For units having turbines, engines or boilers burning gas, survey and testing of
the safety and control equipment and alarm and shut-down functions related to
the following systems are to be carried out:
(a) Gas heating arrangement;
(b) Ventilation arrangement;
(c) Protection and flame screens;
(d) Gas freeing and purging systems;
(e) Manual and automatic shut-down system;
(f) Gas detection system;
(g) Pilot flame burner or fuel floor arrangement;
(h) Governor stability swiching from gas fuel to oil, or vice versa.
(4) Function test of instrumentaion and safety devices for component and systems
given in 1.3.2 - 1.3.2.43 (2) is to be carried out.
(5) The fire extinguishing system are to be surveyed and tested for correct
functioning in/at :
(a) Crude oil tank area;
(b) Crude oil pump room;
(c) Engine and boiler room
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
203
(d) Helicopter deck.
(6) It is to be verified that the required signboards are in order;
(7) The drainage system of the hazardous areas is to be surveyed;
(8) The insulation resistance of the electrical installation in the hazardous area is
to be checked ;
(9) The fireman's outfit is to be surveyed.
1.7.3.3 For production plants the following are to be carried out :
(1) The requirements stipulated in 1.3.2.4 apply with the additions given in the
following ;
(2) The derrick installation is to be examined with emphasis on the structural
condition of bracings particularly with respect to deformation and slack/loose
bolts (if of bolted design). Thickness measurements and/or NDT ( non-
destructive testing) examination of main structural components and checking
of bolts after dismantling may be required as far as deemed necessary by the
surveyor .
(3) Main loading parts of overhead production equipment are to be checked by
MPI. Thickness measurements of structural parts as far as deemed necessary
required by surveyor. Thickness measurements of structural components
and/or NDT to be carried out as far as deemed necssary .
(4) Internal surveys, or if this is not practical, thickness measurements of pressure
vessels and heat exchangers are to be carried out. Examination of related
equipment, such as valves, pipes etc. is to be carried out. Examination of
correct setting of safety valves including remote operation of same is to be
carried out. Pressure test to maximum allowable working pressure to be
carried out .
(5) High pressure/capacity pumps and compressors shall be surveyed by opening
up fully or partly as deemed necssary by the surveyor. Pressure testing to be
carried out when relevant and found necssary by the surveyor .
(6) The riser system to be close visually surveyed. Liquid penetrations or MPI
methods shall be used to investigate critical areas for cracks. Thickness
measurements may be required if found necssary by the surveyor .

204
(7) The blowout preventer system shall be subject to complete overall and
complete performance test. Pressure testing to maximum allowable working
pressure to be carried out.
(8) For lifting devices thickness measurements of structural parts to be carried out
as far as deemed necssary. NDT of main structural components may be
required as far as deemed necessary by the surveyor .
(9) The fixed water protection systems in process area are to be surveyed and
tested for correct functioning .
(10) Function test of safety devices and instrumentation given in 1.3.2.4 is to be
carried out
1.7.3.4 Other examinations and tests deemed necessary by the surveyor are to be carried
out .
1.8 Boiler and thermal oil heater surveys
1.8.1 General
Boiler and thermal oil heater surveys are to be carried out in accordance with the
requipments in 3.8 Part 1-B, TCVN 6259-1:2003 .
1.9 Propeller shafts and stern tube shaft surveys
1.9.1 General
Propeller shafts and stern tube shaft surveys are to be carried out inaccordance with
the requipments in 3.9, Part 1-B,TCVN 6259-1:2003.
1.10 Automatic and Remote Control System Surveys
For Automatic and Remote-Control System Annual and Special Periodical Surveys,
applicable requirements of TCVN 6277:2003 Rules for Automatic and Remote-
Control System - are to be complied with.
1.11 Annual Surveys for Inert Gas Systems
At each Annual Survey of Machinery the inert gas system is to be generally examined
in so far as can be seen and placed in satisfactory condition. The survey is also to
include the following, as applicable:
1.11.1 General
1.11.1.1 External Examination
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
205
External examination of all components and piping, including scrubber, fans, valves,
stand pipe and screens.
1.11.1.2 Inert Gas Blower
Confirmation of proper operation of inert gas blowers.
1.11.1.3 Scrubber Room Ventilation System
Observation of the operation of the scrubber room ventilation system
1.11.1.4 Non-return device
Deck seals or double block and bleed assemblies, and non-return valves are to be
examined externally and proven to be in operation. Automatic filling and draining of
the deck seal, operation of non-return valves and double block and bleed assemblies,
and the water carryover are to be checked
1.11.1.5 Control Valves.
Verify the operation of all remotely operated or automatically controlled valves and,
in particular, the flue gas isolating valves .
1.11.1.6 Interlocking Feature
Verify the operation of the interlocking feature of soot blowers
1.11.1.7 Gas Pressure Regulating Valve
Verify the automatic operation of the gas pressureregulating valve
1.11.1.8 Operation and Maintenance Records
The Surveyor is to examine the permanent records to verify the operation and
maintenance of the system.
1.11.2 Alarm and Safety Device
Verify the operation of the following alarms and safety devices using simulated
conditions, where necessary:
1.11.2.1 Flue Gas Systems
Low water pressure or low water flow rate to the flue gas scrubber, including
automatic shut-down of the inert gas blowers and gas regulating valve.
High water level in the flue gas scrubber, including automatic shut-down of the inert
gas blowers and gas regulating valve.
High gas temperature at IGS blower discharge, including automatic shut-down of the

206
inert gas blowers and gas regulating valve.
Failure of the inert gas blowers, including automatic shut-down of the gas regulating
valve.
Oxygen content in excess of 8% by volume.
Failure of the power supply to the automatic control system for the gas regulating
valve and to the oxygen content and gas pressure indicating devices.
Low water level in the water seal.
Gas pressure less than 100 mm water gauge.
High gas pressure.
Accuracy of fixed and portable oxygen measuring equipment by means of a
calibration gas.
1.11.2.2 Inert Gas Generating Systems
Low water pressure or low water flow rate to the inert gas scrubber
High gas temperature
Oxygen content in excess of 8% by volume
High gas pressure
Insufficient fuel oil supply
Failure of the power supply to the generator
Failure of the power supply to automatic control system for the generator
Accuracy of fixed and portable oxygen measuring equipment by means of a
calibration gas
1.12 Special Periodical Surveys for Inert Gas Systems
In addition to the requirements specified in 1.11, following items are to be surveyed:
1.12.1 General
All valves, including valves at boiler uptakes, air seal valves at uptakes, scrubber
isolating valves, fans inlet and outlet isolating valves, main isolating valve, re-
circulating valve (if fitted), pressure/vacuum breaker and cargo tank isolating valves
are to be examined.
Scrubber is to be examined.
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
207
Fans (blowers), including casing drain valves are to be examined.
Fan (blower) drives, either electric motor or steam turbine are to be examined.
Bellows expansions pieces are to be examined.
Sea water pumps, valves and strainers for scrubbers and water seals together with
piping connections at the scrubber, water seals, shell plating and the remainder of
the sea water piping are to be examined.
Stand pipe, where fitted, for purging in each cargo tank is to be examined.
Deck seals or double block and bleed assemblies, and non-return valves are to be
examined externally and internally.
1.12.2 Separate Inert Gas Generator System
Surveys for separate inert gas generator systems are to comply with all applicable
requirements in 1.12.1, together with the following:
Automatic combustion control system is to be examined and tested, as necessary.
Combustion chamber and mountings are to be examined internally and externally.
Forced draft fan is to be examined.
Fuel oil service pumps are to be examined.
1.12.3 Gas Stored in Bottles System
Systems using inert gas stored in bottles are to comply with all applicable
requirements in 1.12.1, together with the following:
Bottles are to be examined internally and externally. If they cannot be examined
internally, they are to be thickness measured. When considered necessary by the
Surveyor, they are to be hydrostatically tested. Relief valves are to be proven
operable.
Where an alkali (or other) scrubber is fitted in the system, the scrubber,
circulating pump, valves and piping are to be examined internally and externally.
1.13 Annual Surveys Production Facilities
For Annual Survey of Production Facilities, the applicable requirements of the
Appendix VII, Part 9 are to be complied with.
1.14 Special Periodical Surveys - Production Facilities

208
For Special Periodical Survey of Production Facilities, the applicable requirements of
the Appendix VII, Part 9 are to be complied with.
1.15 Annual Surveys - Mooring Systems
1.15.1 Annual Surveys - Spread Mooring Systems
At each Annual Survey, the spread mooring system is to be generally examined so
far as can be seen and placed in satisfactory condition as necessary. In addition, the
following above water items are to be examined, placed in satisfactory condition and
reported upon, where applicable:
(1) The anchor chain stopper structural arrangements are to be visually examined,
including the structural foundations of all of the stoppers or holders.
Tensioning equipment is to be generally examined.
(2) The anchor chain catenary angles are to be measured to ensure that the anchor
chain tensions are within the design allowable tolerances. Where anchor
cables are used, their tensions are to be verified to be within the allowable
tensions.
(3) The anchor chains or anchor cables above the water are to be visually
examined for wear and tear.
1.15.2 Annual Surveys - Single Point Mooring (SPM) Systems
At each Annual Survey, the single point mooring system is to be generally examined
insofar as can be seen above water and placed in satisfactory condition as necessary.
In addition, the following above water items are to be examined, placed in
satisfactory condition and reported upon, where applicable:
(1) The anchor chain stopper structural arrangements are to be visually examined,
including the structural foundations of all of the stoppers.
(2) The anchor chain's catenary angles are to be measured to verify that the
anchor chain tensions are within the design allowable tolerances. Where
anchor cables are used, their tensions are to be verified to be within the
allowable tensions.
(3) The anchor chains or anchor cables above the water are to be visually
examined for wear and tear.
(4) The condition of the bearings is to be verified for continued effectiveness of
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
209
the lubrication system.
(5) The entire assembly of the single point mooring structure above water is to be
generally examined for damage, coating breaks and excessive signs of
corrosion. This survey is to include all turret wall structures, accessible turret
well structures, mooring arms, all structures supporting the disconnectable
operations of the mooring system, etc., whichever are applicable
1.16 Special Periodical Surveys - Mooring Systems
Since it is impractical to cover all types of mooring systems, the following are
provided as guidance to show the basic intent of the Requirements. Operators and
designers may submit alternative survey requirements based either on service
experience or manufacturer's recommendations. Upon review and if found acceptable,
these alternative survey procedures will form the basis for the Special Periodical
Survey of the Mooring System.
The Special Periodical Survey is to include all items listed under the Annual Survey
and, in addition, the following are to be performed, where applicable:
1.16.1 A Drydocking Survey or equivalent underwater inspection of the SPM system is to
be performed. This survey is to include examination of the entire structure of the
SPM, the protective coating, cathodic protection system, the chain stoppers and
their locking devices.
1.16.2 Any suspect areas where excessive corrosion is evident are to be thickness gauged.
Gaugings are to be taken on the structures of the SPM when it has undergone
service for 15 years or more.
1.16.3 An examination is to be made on all anchor chains for excessive corrosion and
wastage. In particular, the areas to be specially examined are the areas having the
most relative movement between the chain links. These areas are normally located
in way of the seabed touchdown sections of the catenary part of the chains. The
chains are to be inspected for looses studs and link elongations. Sufficient
representative locations are to be gauged for wear and wastage. Areas susceptible
to corrosion, such as the wind-and-water areas, are to be specially gauged, if
considered necessary by the attending Surveyor
1.16.4 A close examination is to be performed on all mooring components and accessible

210
structural members that carry the mooring loads. These structures include the chain
stoppers or cable holders, the structures in way of the chain stoppers or cable
holders, structural bearing housing and turret/structural well annulus areas. These
structures are to be thoroughly cleaned and examined and any suspect areas are to
be nondestructively tested.
1.16.5 A general inspection is also to be carried out on the degree of scour or exposure in
way of the anchor or anchor piles to ascertain that these components are not
overexposed
1.16.6 An examination is to be performed on the main bearing of the SPM system. This
examination is to include visual inspection of bearing, if accessible, for water
egress into the structural housing, corrosion, pitting and excessive wear. If the
bearing is inaccessible, at least the weardown is to be ascertained and the condition
of the bearing seals verified. If disassembled, the bearing rollers and the racer
housings are to be examined.
1.16.7 For inaccessible structures, special alternative inspection procedures for inspection
of these areas are to be submitted for approval.
1.16.8 The chain tensions are to be checked and where found not in compliance with the
specifications are to be readjusted accordingly. Excessive loss of chain or tendon
tensions are to be investigated.
1.16.9 Representative areas of the chains are to be examined and checked for excessive
wastage. In particular, areas in way of the chain stoppers and the seabed touchdown
areas are to be specially examined and measured for excessive wear
1.16.10 For disconnectable type mooring systems, the disconnect and connect system for
the mooring system is to be tested as considered necessary by the attending
Surveyor. Alternatively, records of disconnect/connect operations between the
credit date of the last Special Periodical Survey and the current due date of same
may be reviewed, and if found satisfactory, it may be considered to have been in
compliance with this requirement
1.17 Annual Surveys - Import and Export Systems
At each Annual Survey, the import and export (when requested for classification)
systems are to be examined as far as can be seen and placed in satisfactory condition
TCVN 6474-8 : 2007
211
as necessary. In addition, the following items are to be examined, placed in
satisfactory condition and reported upon where applicable:
(1) A general examination is to be performed on all electrical and fluid swivels,
flexible risers, floating hoses, cargo piping and valves associated with the
import and export systems, expansion joints, seals, etc.
(2) The fluid swivels are to be examined for signs of leaks through their "tell-tale"
apertures.
(3) Records of maintenance are to be reviewed, including records of hose
hydrostatic testing.
(4) Navigational aids for all floating hoses are to be examined and functionally
tested.
(5) Riser tensioning arrangements are to be examined for proper functioning
order.

(6) All electrical equipment, fitted in hazardous location is to be examined for
integrity and suitability for the continued service
1.18 Special Periodical Survey Import and Export Systems
Since it is impractical to cover all types of import and export systems, the following
are provided as guidance to show the basic intent of the Requirements. Operators and
designers may submit alternative survey requirements based either on service
experience or manufacturer's recommendations. Upon review and if found acceptable,
these alternative survey procedures will form the basis for the Special Periodical
Survey of the Import and Export System
The Special Periodical Survey is to include all items listed under the Annual Survey
and, in addition, the following are to be performed:
1.18.1 Fluid and electrical swivels are to be disassembled, if considered necessary, and
examined for wear and tear. The seals are to be examined. Upon completion of the
reconditioning, the fluid swivels are to be hydrostatically tested. Similarly, the
electrical swivels are to be insulation tested upon reassembly
1.18.2 During underwater inspection of the SPM system, flexible risers are to be
examined, including all arch support buoyancy tanks. Risers are to be inspected for

212
damage in high stress areas, such as areas in way of the end flanges, areas in way of
the arch support clamps and the bottom of all looped areas. Spreader bars, if fitted
to separate one riser string from another, are to be inspected for wear and tear.
Hydrostatic tests may be required to be conducted on the risers, as deemed
necessary by the attending Surveyor
1.18.3 For deep sea applications, riser suspension or support systems are to be examined
for deterioration and loss of tension. Support areas in way of the riser are to be
closely examined for fretting corrosion, wear, kinks, creases, etc.
1.18.4 Floating export hoses are to be examined for kinks, surface cracks, chaffing
damages, etc. Hydrostatic and vacuum tests may be required to be conducted on the
floating hose string, as deemed necessary by the attending Surveyor.
1.18.5 All piping systems are to be opened up for examination. Nondestructive and
hydrostatic tests may be required, where considered necessary by the attending
Surveyor.
1.18.6 Hoses designed and manufactured based on OCIMF standards are to be tested in
accordance with the OCIMF Guide for the Handling, Storage, Inspection, and
Testing of Hoses in the Field.

213
Second edition

PART 9 SPECIFIC REGULATIONS

Reference standards and definitions: see Part 1, TCVN 7474-1: 2007 and this part.
This part specifies the specific regulations used in part 1 TCVN 6474-1: 2007 to part 8,
TCVN 6474-8:2007.

1. See appendix I: The Concept and Application of Environmental Severity Factors
(ESFs) for Ship-Type Site-Dependent Designed Floating Offshore Installations;
2. See appendix II: The Modification of Ship-Type Floating Production System Criteria
for Site-Specific Environment Conditions;
3. See appendix III: Extent of structures is to be analysed by Finite Element models
(FEM);
4. See appendix IV: Load Criteria
5. See appendix V: Fatigue Life ;
6. See appendix VI: Failure Criteria Yielding;
7. See appendix VII: Machinary, process system on floating storage units;
8. See appendix VIII: Underwater Inspection procedure.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
214
1 Appendix I: The Concept and Application of Environmental Severity Factors
(ESFs) for Ship-Type Site-Dependent Designed Floating Offshore Installations
1.1 ESFs of the Beta Type
This type of ESF compares the severity between the intended environment relative to a
base environment, which is the North Atlantic unrestricted service environment.
In the affected formulations, the Beta factors apply only to the dynamic portions of the
load components, and the load components that are considered "static" are not affected
by the introduction of the Beta factors.
The definition of the severity measure Beta is as follows:
Beta = L
s
/L
u

where:
L
s
- most probable extreme value based on the site-specific environment for
the dynamic load parameters specified in Table 9.1-1;
L
u
- most probable extreme value base on the North Atlantic environment for
the dynamic load parameters specified in Table 9.1-1.
A Beta of 1.0 corresponds to the unrestricted service condition of a seagoing tanker.
A value of Beta less than 1.0 indicates a less severe environment than the unrestricted
case
The values calculated for L
s
and L
u
are to be consistent with vessel headings. This
means that for any dynamic load parameter, if head sea is used for example on the
calculation of Ls, the same heading is to be used for the calculation of L
u

The net scantling is to be verified using a severity beta factor based on the intended
site using a 100-year return period, and the transit condition using a return period as
specified in Part 3, clause 1.2.7.2 , whichever is worst .
For each dynamic load parameter, the severity measure beta is to account for the
vessel headings as follows:
For the intended site, the worst case between head seas, following seas and equal
probability
If no rosette information regarding the environment directionality is available for
the transit condition, the worst case between head seas, equal probability and
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
215
oblique seas (defined as equal probability between head seas and 60 degrees from
the bow). Oblique seas are coming either from the port or the starboard side
There are 13 dynamic load components for which the beta adjustment factors have
been derived. These are for the following loads or load effects:
Table 9.1-1: Dynamic Load Parameters or ESFs
No. Name
1 Vertical Bending Moment
2 Horizontal Bending Moment
3 External Pressure Starboard
4 External Pressure Port
5 Vertical Acceleration
6 Transverse Acceleration
7 Longitudinal Acceleration
8 Relative Vertical Motion at Forepeak
9 Wave Height
10 Pitch Motion
11 Roll Motion
12 Vertical Shear Force
13 Horizontal Shear Force
As mentioned, the Beta values are a direct function of the long-term environmentally-
induced loads at the installation site compared to the unrestricted service environment
that is the basis of the Rules. The Beta values also need to address other differences
and factors between the design basis of a sea going and a moored vessel. These
include:
Different design basis return periods for environmental loads (20 vs. 100 years).
Effects of mooring system on predicted vessel load effects (including
weathervaning type behavior of a turret moored system).
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
216
Different assumed wave energy spreading characterization between the open
ocean and a site- specific situation.
Different basis of extreme design storm characterization (i.e., long-term winter
storm vs. hurricane dominated characterization).
If a direct analysis of a floating offshore installation were to be performed, the
influences of the mentioned factors would need to be assessed and used in the vessel's
design.
Notwithstanding the listed Beta factors and their intended usage, it is still necessary to
introduce a limit to keep design parameters from going "too low". This limit is that the
result of an application of a Beta factor (e.g., in the calculation of a required scantling)
is not to be less than 85 percent of the unrestricted service (Rule) value.
1.2 ESFs of the Alpha Type
This type of ESF compares the fatigue damage between the specified environment
relative to a base environment, which is the North Atlantic environment.
First, this type of ESF is used to adjust the expected fatigue damage induced from the
dynamic components due to environmental loadings at the vessel's installation site.
Second it can be used to assess the fatigue damage accumulated during the historical
service either as a trading tanker or as an FPI, including both the historical site(s) and
historical transit routes
The definition of the severity measure a is as follows:
= D
u
/D
s

where
D
u
- annual fatigue damage based on the North Atlantic environment
(unrestricted service) at the regions of the hull structure specified in Table 9.1-2.
D
s
- annual fatigue damage based on a specified environment, for historical
routes, historical sites, transit and intended site, at the regions of the hull
structure specified in Table 9.1-2.
The values calculated for D
s
and D
u
are to be consistent with the vessel headings.
This means that for any structural detail, if head sea is used for examples on the
calculation of D
s
, the same heading is to be used for the calculation of D
u
.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
217
If the Owner provides no rosette information regarding the environment
directionality, the severity measure a for each structural detail is to be selected
according to the following criteria:
For site spread moored vessels the worst case between equal probability, head
seas and following seas
For site turret moored vessel, the worst case between head seas, following seas,
and oblique seas (defined as equal probability between head seas and 60 degrees
heading from the bow), with oblique seas coming either from the port or the
starboard side
For transit and historical route conditions, the worst case between head seas and
oblique seas (defined as equal probability between head seas and 60 degrees from
the bow), with the oblique seas coming either from the port or the starboard side
Table 9.1-2 - The 6 Fatigue Damage Adjustment Factors
No Alpha Applies to
1
deck

Deck
2
SShl

Side Shell
3
LBhd

Longitudinal Bulkheads
4
CBhd

Centerline Bulkheads
5
InBm

Inner Bottom
6
Bttm

Bottom

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
218
2 Appendix II: The Modification of Ship-Type Floating Production System Criteria
for Site-Specific Environment Conditions
2.1 Deck Load
For the design and evaluation of deck structures, the following loads due to on deck
production facilities are to be considered:
(1) Static weight of on deck production facilities in upright condition.
(2) Dynamic loads due to ship motions.
(3) Wind load
2.1.1 Loads for On-Site Operation
The nominal forces from each individual deck production module at the center of gravity
of the module can be obtained from the following equations:
[ ] g a c C C W F
v v v v
/ 71 . 0 ) 71 . 0 cos)( ) 71 . 0 cos(

+ =

[ ]
wind t t t t t
F k g a c C W F + + = / 71 . 0 ) 71 . 0 sin(

[ ]
wind l l L l l
F k g a c C W F + + = / 71 . 0 ) 71 . 0 sin(

Where
and are the pitch and roll amplitudes with V = 10 knots/h and
2
3
i f
d d =

in degrees, need not to be taken more than 10 degrees

in degrees, need not to be taken more than 30 degrees
a
v
, a
t
and a
l
are the vertical, transverse and longitudinal for heading in table 9.2-1
F
v
= vertical load from each production module, positive downward
F
t
= transverse load from each production module, positive starboard
F
l
= longitudinal load from each production module, positive forward
W = weight of the production module, in kN
2
wind wind s h wind
F kA C C V =

= wind forces, kN
Two combinations of wave-induced and wind forces are to be considered: F
v
, F
t
:
F
v
, F
t
with factor k
t
=1 and F
l
with factor k
l
= 0
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
219
F
v
, F
t
with factor k
t
=0 and Fl with factor k
l
= 1
The deck load is to be obtained for the maximum weight of on deck production facilities
for head sea (Load Case A), beam sea (Load Case B) and oblique sea (Load Case C)
listed in Table 9.2-1, where the correlation factors c
v
, c
T
, c
L
, C
, C
for each load case are

also shown
Table 9.2-1: Correlation factors
Load case LC A (head sea) LC B (beam sea) LC C (oblique)
c
v
0,8 0,4 0,7
c
T
0,6 0 0,7
c
L
0 0,9 0,7
C

-1 0 -0,7
C

0 1 0,7
Wave heading
angle (degree)
0 90 60
where
V
wind
= wind velocity based on 1-hour average speed
C
s
= shape coefficient, defined in Part 2
C
h
= height coefficient, defined in in Part 2 for 1-hour average wind
The forces from each deck production module can be obtained based on long-term
prediction for the realistic sea states of the specific site of operation. In no case are the
forces Fv, Ft and Fi to be less than those obtained using the values of Environmental
Severity Factors (ESFs) established from Appendix I
where

= ESF for pitch amplitude

= ESF for roll amplitude

v
= ESF for vertical acceleration

t
= ESF for transverse acceleration

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
220

= ESF for longitudinal acceleration
= ESF for relative vertical motion at the forward perpendicular on

centerline.
2.1.2 Load in Transit Condition
Nominal loads of the production facility modules on deck during transit condition
can be obtained from the equations in clause 2.1.2, above. Alternatively,
corresponding forces can be calculated based on the sea condition for the specific
voyage. Also see Part 2.
2.2 Sloshing Loads
Nominal sloshing pressure for strength assessment of tank boundary structures can be
obtained from Appendix IV, with the following modifications:
Pitch and roll natural motion periods should be obtained from Appendix IV, with V =
10 knots and d
i
= 2/3 d
f

Parameters
es
and
es
should be obtained from the following equations:
0, 71
0, 71
es
es

=
=

Where:
es
and
es
are given in Appendix IV.
and are the pitch and roll amplitudes defined in Appendix IV, with V = 10 knots
and d
i
= 2/3d
f

Alternatively, nominal sloshing pressures can be calculated based on sea condition
for the specific site of operation.
2.3 Green Water
When experimental data or direct calculations are not available, nominal green water
pressure imposed on deck in the region from FP to 0.30L aft, including the extension
beyond the FP, may be obtained from the following equations:
( )
1/ 2
1 gi Ri bi
P k M k F =
kN/m
2

where
P
gi
= Green water pressure, uniformly distributed across the deck at specified
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
221
longitudinal section i within the bow region under consideration . Pressure in between
is obtained by linear interpolation. Pgi is not to be taken less than 20.6 kN/m2 .
k = 19,614
k
1
= 1
M
Ri
=
( )
1/ 2
1, 39 /
i vm b
A L C
for L in meters
A
i
= in Table 9.2-2
vm
= a vertical motion factor
C
b
= Fulness coefficient in TCVN 6259-2:2003
L = length of vessel
F
bi
= freeboard from the highest deck at side to the load waterline (LWL) at
station i
Table 9.2-2 - Values of A
i
and B
i

Section i from F.P. A
i
B
i

-0,05L 1,25 0,36
0 1,0 0,4
0,05L 0,8 0,4375
0,1L 0,62 0,4838
0,15L 0,47 0,5532
0,2L 0,33 0,6666
0,25L 0,22 0,8182
0,3L 0,22 0,8182
2.4 Bow Impact Pressure
When experimental data or direct calculations are not available, nominal bow impact
pressures due to wave celerity above the load waterline (LWL) in the region from the
forward end to the collision bulkhead may be obtained from the following equation:
2
sin
bij k ij ij ij
P kC C V =
kN/m
2

where
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
222
k = 1,025

( )
{ }
( )
1/ 2
2
1/ 2
1 2
1 cos 90 2 /
sin
ij bi j bi
ij ij WHT
C F a F
V L

= +

= +

1
= 3,09

2
= 1

WHT
= ESF for Wave Height

( )
1
tan tan / cos
ij ij ij

=
not to be taken less than 50 degrees

ij
= local waterline angle measured from the centerline, not to be taken less
than 35 degrees
ij
= local body plan angle measured from the horizontal , not to be taken
less than 35 degrees
F
bi
= freeboard from the highest deck at side to the load waterline (LWL) at
station i
a
j
= vertical distance from LWL to WL-j
i,j = station and waterline to be taken to correspond to the locations under
consideration
C
k
= 0.7 at collision bulkhead and 0.9 at 0.0125L, linear interpolation for in
between
= 0.9 between 0.0125L and FP
= 1.0 at and forward of FP
2.5 Bottom Slamming Pressure
For a vessel with a heavy weather draft forward less than 0.04L but greater than
0.025L, bottom slamming loads are to be considered for assessing strength of the flat
bottom plating forward and the associated stiffening system in the fore body region.
The equivalent bottom slamming pressure for strength formulation and assessment
should be determined based on well-documented experimental data or analytical
studies. When these direct calculations are not available, nominal bottom slamming
pressures may be determined by the following equations:
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
223

( )
2
0 si i Vi ni f
P v M E E = +
kN/m
2

where
P
si
= equivalent bottom slamming pressure for section i

= 1,025

i
=
*
0
2, 2 / , 40 b d +

b* = half width of flat bottom at the i-th ship station
d
0
= 1/10th of the section draft at the heavy ballast condition
= a constant as given in table 9.2-3
E
f
=
1/ 2
1 1
f L

1
= natural angular frequency of hull girder 2-node vertical vibration of the
vessel in the wet mode and the heavy weather ballast draft condition, in rad/second

1
f
= 0,004 m
where b represents the half breadth at the 1/10th draft of the section. Linear
interpolation may be used for intermediate values

1/ 2
0 0
0
0, 29
v c L
c m
=
=

M
Ri
=
( )
1/ 2
1, 39 /
i vm b
A L C
with L in metres
M
vi
= B
i
M
Ri
where B
i
given in table 9.2-2

( )
2 2
0
exp / /
ei vi i Ri
G v M d M

= +

d
i
= local section draft, in m
E
ni
= natural log of ni

( )
1/ 2
5730 /
i Vi Ri ei
n M M G =
if n<1 then P
si
= 0

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
224
Table 9.2-3:Values of
b/d
0

b/d
0

1 0 4 20,25
1,5 9 5 22
2 11,75 6 23,75
2,5 14,25 7 24,5
3 16,5 7,5 24,75
3,5 18,5 25 24,75
2.6 Local Structure of the Hull Supporting Deck Mounted Equipment
This Section addresses deck transverses and deck girders
2.6.1 General
Section modulus and web sectional area of the deck transverses and deck girders may
be obtained in accordance with the procedure given below or other recognized design
procedures.
Section modulus and web sectional area of the deck transverse and deck girders are
not to be less than specified below for the following load patterns:
Load pattern No.1 when a tank under consideration is empty and the deck transverse
and/or deck girder is loaded with reactions (forces and moments) from the topside
structure .
Load pattern No.2 when a tank under consideration is full and the deck transverse
and/or deck girder is loaded with cargo pressure. The loads from the topside structure
are not to be considered for this loading condition ).
2.6.2 Load Pattern No. 1
2.6.2.1 Section Modulus of Deck Transverse
The net section modulus of deck transverses, in association with the effective deck
plating, is to be obtained from the following equation:

/
b
SM M f =
cm
3

(1) For deck transverses in wing tanks
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
225
( )
5
10
p g s
M k M M M = + +
N-cm
For deck transverses in center tanks
( )
5
10
p g b
M k M M M = + +
N-cm
where
k = 1

p
M
= bending moment due to reactions from topside structure
=
( )
v m t
M M f +

( )
( )
1 2
3 4
v t n n n
n
m n n n
n
M l P k k
M M k k
= +
= +

n
P
= reaction deck force number n, in kN , applied to the deck transverse in
tank under consideration, see Figure 9.2-1
n
M
= reaction deck moment number n, in kN-m , applied to the deck
transverse in tank under consideration, see Figure 9.2-1
n = 1, 2, 3 , Nv to obtain bending moment M
v

n = 1, 2, 3 , Nm to obtain bending moment M
m

Nv = = total number of reaction forces at deck transverse under
consideration, (in tank under consideration)
N
m
= total number of reaction moments at deck transverse under
consideration, (in tank under consideration)
l
t
= span of the deck transverse under consideration, in m
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
226

a
n
= distance, in m , from a point of application of reaction (force P
n
or moment
M
n
) to the end of the deck transverse span 1
t
, in m , as shown in Figure 9.2-1.
z = coordinate (measured from the end of the span 1
t
) of the section of the deck
transverse under consideration, in m , as shown in Figure 9.2-1.
For the toe of the deck transverse end brackets:
/
a t
z h l =
and
1 /
a t
z h l =

h
a
= distance, in m, from the end of the span to the toe of the end bracket of the
deck transverse
Note: For a wide topside bracket, the vertical load on a deck transverse can be considered
uniformly distributed with pressure q
n
= P
n
/c, and the concentrated bending moment can
be substituted by force couples.

/( )
m n
P M kc =

where
,
n n
P M
= concentrated force and moment obtained from FE analysis of
topside structure
c = width of the topside bracket
k = shape bracket factor, and may be taken as 0.8, unless otherwise
specified.
Bending moment at the toe of the end brackets due to green water pressure, M
g
:

3 2
0,1
g gi t
M c P sl =

where
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
227
gi
P
= nominal green water pressure imposed on the deck, in kN/m2 , as
defined in Appendix II, clause 2.3
s = spacing, in m, of the deck transverses
Bending moments due to pressure on side transverse and vertical web of longitudinal
bulkhead

2 2
2 2
s s s s s
b b b b b
M k c p sl
M k c p sl
=
=

where k
s
= 0.1, and k
b
= 0.1, unless otherwise specified
l
s
, l
b
= span, in m (ft), of side transverse and vertical web on longitudinal
bulkhead, respectively
p
s
= nominal pressure, in kN/m
2
, at the mid-span of side transverse when wing tank
is empty, adjacent tanks full
p
b
= nominal internal cargo pressure, in kN/m
2
, at the mid-span of the vertical web
on longitudinal bulkhead when center tank is empty, adjacent tanks full
Nominal pressure p
s
and p
b
can be obtained in appendix IV with the following
modifications:
i) Coefficient wv can be multiplied by factor
v
, coefficient w
l
by factor
l
,
coefficient w
t
by factor
t
, coefficient c
by factor
, coefficient c
by
factor

ii) Ship motions and accelerations
where
v
,
l
,
t
,
are reduction factors accounting for effect of the environmental

conditions onsite from Appendix I
and are roll and pitch amplitudes,
f
t
= 1 for tanks without deck girders
f
t
= 1 [0.67/(1 + 2)] is not to be taken less than 0.70 for tanks with deck girders
= (l
g
/l
t
)
3
(I
t
/I
g
)
l
g
= span of the deck girder, in m
s
g
= spacing, in m , of the deck girder under consideration,
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
228
I
t
, I
g
= net moments of inertia, in cm
4
, of the deck transverse and deck girder with
effective deck plating, clear of the end brackets, respectively
f
b
= permissible bending stress, in N/cm
2

= 0.70 S
m
f
y

2.6.2.2 Section Modulus of Deck Girder
The net section modulus of deck girder with effective deck plating is to be not less
than that obtained from the following equation:

/
b
SM M f =
cm
3

( )
5
10
p g
M k M M = +
N-cm
where
k = 1
Bending moment due to reactions from topside structure, M
p

( )
p v m g
M M M f = +

where
n
P
= reaction force number n, in kN , applied to the deck girder under Consideration.
See figure 9.2-1
n
M
= reaction moment number n, in kN-m , applied to the deck girder under
consideration. See figure 9.2-1
n = 1, 2, 3 , Nv to obtain bending moment M
v

n = 1, 2, 3 , Nm to obtain bending moment M
m

N
v
= total number of reaction forces at the deck girder between transverse bulkheads
in the tank under consideration
N
m
= total number of reaction moments at the deck girder between transverse
bulkheads in the tank under consideration
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
229

b
n
= distance, in m , from reaction force Pn to the end of the deck girder span l
g

x = coordinate, in m , of the section of the deck girder under consideration, measured
from the end of span l
g

For the toe of the brackets:
/
a g
x h l =
and
1 /
a g
x h l =

h
a
= distance, in m , from the end of the deck girder span to the toe of the end of the
bracket
( ) ( )( )
0,25
3
1 0,13 / / /
g g t g t g
f l l l s I I

=

is not to be taken less than 0,65
Bending moment at the toe of the end brackets due to green water pressure, M
g

2
0, 083
g gi g g
M P s l =

2.6.2.3 Web Sectional Area of Deck Transverse
The net sectional area of the web portion of deck transverse is to be obtained from
the following equation::

/
s
A F f =
cm
2

where

( )
2
1000
p g c
F k F F c sDB = + +
N

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
230

l = span of the deck transverse, in m,
h
e
= length of the bracket, in m
D = depth of a vessel, in m , as defined in TCVN 6259-2:2003
B = breadth of the center tank, in m

s
f
= permissible shear stress (N/cm2)
=
0, 45
m y
S f

2.6.2.4 Web Sectional Area of Deck Girder
The net sectional area of the web portion of deck girders is to be not less than that
obtained from the following equation :

/
s
A F f =
cm
2

where

( )
1000
p g
F k F F = +
N

( )
( ) ( )
( )
( )
2
1 1 2
6 1 /
0 if
if
0,5
1, 0
p v m g
v n n n n
n
m n n n g
n
n n
n n
g gi e g
F F F f
F P b b F
F b b M l
F x b
P x b
F cp l h s
k
= +
= + +
=
=
= >
=
=

s
f
= permissible shear stress, (N/cm
2
)
=
0, 3
m y
S f

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
231
2.6.3 Load Pattern No. 2
Section modulus and web sectional area of deck transverses and deck girders for load
pattern No. 2 are to be obtained from TCVN 6259-2A.
Internal pressure can be obtained from Appendix IV with the modifications given in
2.6.2.

Figure 9.2-1 - Definition of Parameters

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
232
3 Appendix III: Extent of structures is to be analysed by Finite Element models
(FEM)
3.1 Methods of Approach and Analysis Procedures
Maximum stresses in the structure are to be determined by performing structural
analyses, as outlined below. structural idealization, load application and structural
analysis may be carried out in accordance with recognized documentation/ guideline.
In general, the strength assessment is to be focused on the results obtained from
structures in the mid hold of a three hold length model. However, the deck transverse, the
side transverse, the vertical web on longitudinal bulkheads, the horizontal girder and the
vertical web on transverse bulkheads and the cross tie are to be assessed using the end
holds of a three hold length model as well.
3.2 3D Finite Element Models
A simplified three-dimensional finite element model, representing usually three bays of
tanks within 0.4L amidships, is required to determine the load distribution in the
structure.
The same 3D model may be used for hull structures beyond 0.4L amidships with
modifications to the structural properties and the applied loads, provided that the
structural configurations are considered as representative of the location under
consideration
3.3 2D Finite Element Models
Two-dimensional fine mesh finite element models are required to determine the stress
distribution in major supporting structures, particularly at intersections of two or more
structural members.
3.4 Local Structural Models
A 3D fine mesh model is to be used to examine stress concentrations, such as at
intersections of longitudinals with transverses and at cut outs.
3.5 Load Cases
When performing structural analysis, the eight combined load cases specified in appendix
IV are to be considered. In general, the structural responses for the still-water conditions
are to be calculated separately to establish reference points for assessing the wave-
induced responses. Additional load cases may be required for special loading patterns and
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
233
unusual design functions, such as sloshing loads. Additional load cases may also be
required for hull structures beyond the region of 0.4L amidships.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
234
4 Appendix IV: Load Criteria
The load criteria are applicable for floating storage units with length more than 150 m.
For floating storage units with length less than 150 m, a recognized standard may be
used. The load criteria in this appendix are used in conjunction with amendments given
on appendix II.
4.1 General
4.1.1 Load Components
In the design of the hull structure of tankers, all load components with respect to the hull
girder and local structure as specified in TCVN6259-2:2003 are to be taken into account.
These include static loads in still water, wave-induced motions and loads, sloshing,
slamming, dynamic, thermal and ice loads, where applicable.
4.2 Static Loads
4.2.1 Still-water Bending Moment
For still-water bending moment calculations, see TCVN 6259-2:2003.
When a direct calculation of wave-induced loads is not submitted, envelope curves of the
still-water bending moments (hogging and sagging) and shear forces (positive and
negative) are to be provided.
Except for special loading cases, the loading patterns shown in Figure 9.4-1 are to be
considered in determining local static loads.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
235

Figure 9.4-1 - Loading Pattern
4.3 Wave-induced Loads
4.3.1 General
Where a direct calculation of the wave-induced loads is not available, the approximation
equations given below and specified in TCVN6259-2:2003 may be used to calculate the
design loads.
When a direct calculation of the wave-induced loads is performed, envelope curves of the
combined wave and still-water bending moments and shear forces, covering all the
anticipated loading conditions, are to be submitted for review.
4.3.2 Horizontal Wave Bending Moment and Shear Force
4.3.2.1 Horizontal wave bending moment
The horizontal wave bending moment, positive (tension port) or negative (tension
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
236
starboard), may be obtained from the following equation:
2 ' 3
3 1
10
H h b
M m K C L DC

=
kN-m
where
m
h
= distribution factor, as given by Figure 9.4-2
K
3
= 180
D = depth of floating unit
C
1
, L and
'
b
C
are as given in Section 13, TCVN6259-2:2003.

Figure 9.4-2 Distribution Factor mh
4.3.2.2 Horizontal Wave Shear Force
The envelope of horizontal wave shearing force, F
H
, positive (toward port forward) or
negative (toward starboard aft), may be obtained from the following equation:
( )
' 2
1
0, 7 10
H h b
F f kC L D C

= +
kN
where
f
h
= distribution factor, as given in Figure 9.4-3
k = 36
C
1
, L and C
b

are as given in Section 13, TCVN6259-2:2003.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
237

Figure 9.4-3 - Distribution Factor f
h

4.3.3 External Pressures
4.3.3.1 Pressure Distribution
The external pressures, p
e
, (positive toward inboard), imposed on the hull in seaways can
be expressed by the following equation at a given location:

( ) 0
e s u de
P g h k h = +
N/cm
2

where

g
= specific weight of sea water
= 1,005 N/cm
2
-m
h
s
= hydrostatic pressure head in still water, in m
k
u
= load factor, and may be taken as unity unless otherwise specified.
h
de
= hydrodynamic pressure head induced by the wave, in m (ft), may be calculated
as follows:
= k
c
h
di

where
k
c
= correlation factor for a specific combined load case, as given in 4.4.1 and 4.5.2.
h
di
= hydrodynamic pressure head, in m , at location i (i = 1,2,3,4 or 5; see figure 9.4-
4)
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
238
=
i do
k h
= distribution factor along the length of the floating unit

=
( ) 1 1 cos
o
k
+
,
0
k
is as given in figure 9.4-5

= 1 amidships
h
do
= 1,36kC
1
(m)
k = 1

i
= distribution factor around the girth of floating unit at location i.

= 1 0,25 cos for i = 1, at WL, starboard
= 0,4 0,1 cos for i = 2, at bilge, starboard
= 0,3 0,2 sin for i = 3, at bottom centerline
= 2
3

2
for i = 4, at bilge, port
= 0,75 1,25 sin for i = 5, at WL, port
i at intermediate locations of i may be obtained by linear interpolation
= wave heading angle, to be taken from 0 to 90 (0 for head sea, 90 for beam
sea for wave coming from starboard).
The distribution of the total external pressure including static and hydrodynamic
pressure is illustrated in Figure 9.4-6.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
239

Figure 9.4-4 - Distribution of h
di

Figure 9.4-5 - Pressure Distribution Function
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
240

Figure 9.4-6 - Illustration of Determining Total External Pressure
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
241

Figure 9.4-7 - Definition of Tank Geometry
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
242

Figure 9.4-8 - Location of Tank for Nominal Pressure Calculation
4.3.3.2 Extreme Pressures
In determining the required scantlings of local structural members, the extreme external
pressure, p
e
, to be used, is as defined in 4.3.3.1 with k
u
as given in 4.4 and 4.5.
4.3.3.3 Simultaneous Pressures
When performing 3D structural analysis, the simultaneous pressure along any portion of
the hull girder may be obtained from:

( )
0
es s f u de
P g h k k h = + N/cm
2

where
k
f
is a factor denoting the phase relationship between the reference station and
adjacent stations considered along the vessels length, and may be determined as
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
243
follows:

( )
0
2
1 1 cos cos
f fo
x x
k k
L

=

where
x = distance from A.P. to the station considered, in m
x0 = distance from A.P. to the reference station, in m
L = the floating unit length, m
= the wave heading angle, to be taken from 0 to 90
kf o = 1.0, as specified in Table 9.4-1
The simultaneous pressure distribution around the girth of the vessel is to be determined
based on the wave heading angles specified in 4.4 and 4.5
4.4 Nominal Design Loads
4.4.1 Hull Girder Loads Longitudinal Bending Moments and Shear Forces
4.4.1.1 Total Vertical Bending Moment and Shear Force
The total longitudinal vertical bending moments and shear forces may be obtained from
the following equations::

kNm
kN
t sw u c w
t sw u c w
M M k k M
F F k k F
= +
= +

where
M
sw
and M
w
are the still-water bending moment and wave-induced bending moment,
F
sw
and F
w
are the still-water and wave-induced shear forces
k
u
is a load factor and may be taken as unity unless otherwise specified
k
c
is a correlation factor and may be taken as unity unless otherwise specified.
For determining the hull girder section modulus for 0.4L amidships, the maximum still-
water bending moments, either hogging or sagging, are to be added to the hogging or
sagging wave bending moments, respectively. Elsewhere, the total bending moment may
be directly obtained based on the envelope curves, as specified in 4.2.1 and 4.3.1.
4.4.1.2 Horizontal Wave Bending Moment and Shear Force
For non-head sea conditions, the horizontal wave bending moment and the horizontal
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
244
shear Force , are to be considered as additional hull girder loads, especially for the design
of the side shell and inner skin structures. The effective horizontal bending moment and
shear force, MHE and FHE, may be determined by the following equations:

kNm
kN
HE u c H
HE u c H
M k k M
F k k F
=
=

where k
u
and k
c
are a load factor and a correlation factor, respectively, which may be
taken as unity unless otherwise specified
4.4.2 Local Loads for Design of Supporting Structures
In determining the required scantlings of the main supporting structures, such as girders,
transverses, stringers, floors and deep webs, the nominal loads induced by the liquid
pressures distributed over both sides of the structural panel within the tank boundaries
should be considered for the worst possible load combinations. In general, considerations
should be given to the following two loading cases accounting for the worst effects of the
dynamic load components.
i. Maximum internal pressures for a fully filled tank with the adjacent tanks
empty and minimum external pressures, where applicable.
ii. Empty tank with the surrounding tanks full and maximum external pressures,
where applicable.
Taking the side shell supporting structure as an example, the nominal loads may be
determined from either:
i.
( )
( )
max
min
i s u d
e s u de
P k g k h
P g h k h

= +
= +

ii.
( )
0
max
i
e s u de
P
P g h k h
=
= +

where k
u
= 1.
4.4.3 Local Pressures for Design of Plating and Longitudinals
In calculating the required scantlings of plating, longitudinals and stiffeners, the nominal
pressures should be considered for the two load cases given in 4.4.3, using k
u
= 1.1 for pi
and pe instead of k
u
= 1.0 as shown above

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
245
4.5 Combined Load Cases
4.5.1 Combined Load Cases for Structural Analysis
For assessing the strength of the hull girder structure and in performing a structural
analysis , the eight combined load cases specified in Table 9.4-1 are to be considered.
Additional combined load cases may be required as warranted. The loading patterns are
shown in Figure 9.4-1 for three cargo tank lengths. The necessary correlation factors and
relevant coefficients for the loaded tanks are also given in Table 9.4-1 . The total external
pressure distribution including static and hydrodynamic pressure is illustrated in Table
9.4-6.
4.5.2 Combined Load Cases for Failure Assessment
For assessing the failure modes with respect to material yielding, buckling and ultimate
strength, the following combined load cases shall be considered.
4.5.2.1 Ultimate Strength of Hull Girder
For assessing ultimate strength of the hull girder, the combined effects of the following
primary and local loads are to be considered.
(1) Primary Loads, Longitudinal Bending Moments in Head Sea Conditions (M
H
= 0,
F
H
= 0)
t s u c w
M M k k M = +
, k
u
= 1,15, k
c
= 1
t s u c w
F F k k F = +
, k
u
= 1,15, k
c
= 1
(2) Local Loads for Large Stiffened Panels
Internal and external pressure loads as given for L.C. No. 1 and L.C. No. 2 in Table
9.4-1.
4.5.2.2 Yielding, Buckling and Ultimate Strength of Local Structures
For assessing the yielding, buckling and ultimate strength of local structures, the
eight combined load cases as given in Table 9.4-1 are to be considered.
4.5.2.3 Fatigue Strength
For assessing the fatigue strength of structural joints, the eight combined load cases
given in Table 9.4-1 are to be used

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
246
4.6 Sloshing Loads
4.6.1 General
4.6.1.1 Except for tanks that are situated wholly within the double side or double bottom,
the natural periods of liquid motions and sloshing loads are to be examined in
assessing the strength of boundary structures for all cargo or ballast tanks which
will be partially filled between 20% and 90% of tank capacity. The sloshing
pressure heads given in this subsection may be used for determining the strength
requirements for the tank structures. Alternatively, sloshing loads may be
determined by model experiments or by numerical simulation using three
dimensional flow analysis. Methodology and procedures of tests and measurements
or analysis methods are to be fully documented and referenced. They are to be
4.6.1.2 The effects of impulsive sloshing pressures on the design of the main supporting
structures of tank transverse and longitudinal bulkheads will be subject to special
consideration.
4.6.2 Strength Assessment of Tank Boundary Structures
4.6.2.1 Tank Length and Pitch Induced Sloshing Loads
4.6.2.2 Roll Induced Sloshing Loads
4.6.2.3 For long or wide cargo tanks, non-tight bulkheads or ring webs or both are to be
designed and fitted to eliminate the possibility of resonance at all filling levels.
Long tanks have length, l, exceeding 0.1L. Wide tanks have width, b, exceeding
0.6B.
4.6.2.4 For each of the anticipated loading conditions, the critical filling levels of the
tank should be avoided so that the natural periods of fluid motions in the
longitudinal and transverse directions will not synchronize with the natural periods
of the vessels pitch and roll motions, respectively.
The natural period of the fluid motion, in seconds, may be approximated by the
following equations:

( )
1/ 2
/
x T e
T k =
in the longitudinal direction

( )
1/ 2
/
y L e
T b k =
in the transverse direction
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
247
where

e
= effective length of the tank

e
b
= effective breadth of the tank

( ) ( )
1/ 2
1
1
tanh / 4 /
/ ; /
e b e
k H g
H d d b

=

=

4.6.3 Sloshing Pressures
4.6.3.1 Nominal Sloshing Pressure
For cargo tanks with filling levels within the critical range , the internal pressures pis,
including static and sloshing pressures, positive toward tank boundaries, may be
expressed in terms of equivalent liquid pressure head, he, as given below:

0
is s e
P k gh =

where
is
P
= internal pressures including static and sloshing pressures, N/cm
2

k
s
= load factor
h
e
=
m m u c
c h k h +
for y below filling level d
m

=
( )( ) ( ) /
u c t c m m
k h h h y d h d +

for y above dm
h
m
= static head, taken as the vertical distance, in m, measured from the filling level,
d
m
, down to the point considered.
d
m
= filling level, in m
k
u
= load factor, and may be taken as unity unless otherwise specified
h
c
= maximum average sloshing pressure heads, in m
=
( )
1/ 2
2 2
c s s b
k C h C h

+

h
t
= sloshing pressure heads for upper bulkhead, in m
=
( )
1/ 2
2 2
c s t s tb
k C h C h

+

h = depth of tank, in m
y = distance, in m , measured from the tank bottom to the point considered
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
248
k
c
= correlation factor for combined load cases, and may be taken as unity unless
otherwise specified

C
s
and C
s
are the weighted coefficients as given in Figure 10 9.4-10
where
T
represents for transverse bulkheads and
L
represents for the longitudinal
bulkheads

e
= effective tank length that accounts for the effect of deep ring-web frames, in m
=
*2
T

e
b
= effective tank width that accounts for the effect of deep ring-web frames, in m
=
*2
L
b

*
= 1.0 for tanks without deep ring webs

=
( ) ( )
2
* *
0, 25 4 1 1

for * to be determined at do
T
represents * for transverse bulkheads
*
L
represents * for longitudinal bulkheads

( )( )
0
0, 5
s
=

T
represents for transverse bulkheads.
L
represents for longitudinal bulkheads
0
= 1 for tanks without a swash bulkhead

=
( ) ( )
2
0 0
0, 25 4 1 1

for tanks with a swash bulkhead

s
= 1 for boundary bulkheads that:

i. do not contain any deep horizontal girder; or
ii. do contain deep horizontal girders but with an opening ratio,
s
, less
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
249
than 0.2 or greater than 0.4
=
( ) ( )
2
0, 25 4 1 1
s s

for bulkheads with deep horizontal girders having
an opening ratio,
s
, between 0.2 and 0.4

1 o o
x x = if 1
o
x
= 1/
o
x if 1
o
x >

/
o y r
y T T =
1 o o
y y = if 1
o
y
= 1/
o
y if 1
o
y >

1
d
= height of deep bottom transverses measured from the tank bottom, m

2
d
= bottom height of the lowest openings in non-tight transverse bulkhead

measured above the tank bottom or top of bottom transverses, m.
n = number of deep bottom transverses in the tank
1 b
d
= height of deep bottom longitudinal girders measured from the tank bottom, m
2 b
d
= bottom height of the lowest openings in non-tight longitudinal bulkhead
measured above the tank bottom, or top of bottom longitudinal girders, m.
m = number of deep bottom longitudinal girders in the tank
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
250

where
'
t
C
and
'
tb
C
are
t
C
and
tb
C
for hm = 0,7h;
'
T
and
'
L
correspond to for do = 0.7h.

s
C
and
s
C
are weighted coefficients, as given in Figure 9.4-10.

h
tl
shall not be less than hp; htb shall not be less than
r
h

4.6.3.2 Sloshing Loads for Assessing Strength of Structures at Tank Boundaries
(1) In assessing the strength of tank boundary supporting structures, the two
combined load cases with loading pattern shown in Figure 9.4-14 , with the
specified sloshing loads shown in Table 9.4-2 for the respective side on which
the horizontal girder is located, are to be considered when performing a 3D
structural analysis .
(2) In assessing the strength of plating and stiffeners at tank boundaries, local
bending of the plating and stiffeners with respect to the local sloshing
pressures for structural members/elements is to be considered in addition to
the nominal loadings specified for the 3D analysis in (1) above. In this regard,
ku should be taken as 1.15 instead of 1.0.
4.6.3.3 Sloshing Loads Normal to the Web Plates of Horizontal and Vertical Girders
In addition to the sloshing loads acting on the bulkhead plating, the sloshing loads normal
to the web plates of horizontal and vertical girders are to be also considered for assessing
the strength of the girders. The magnitude of the normal sloshing loads may be
approximated by taking 25% of h
c
or h
t
for k
u
= 1.0, whichever is greater, at the location
considered

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
251

Figure 9.4-9 - Vertical Distribution of Equivalent Slosh Pressure Head

Figure 9.4-10 - Horizontal Distribution of Simultaneous Slosh Pressure
Heads
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
252

Figure 9.4-11 - Definitions for Opening Ratio,

Figre 9.4-12 - Opening Ratios
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
253

Figure 9.4-13 Dimensions of Internal Structures

Figure 9.4-14 - Loading Patterns for Sloshing Loads Cases
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
254
Table 9.4-1 Combined Load Cases (*)
L.C. 1 L.C. 2 L.C. 3 L.C. 4 L.C. 5 L.C. 6 L.C. 7 L.C. 8 L.C. 9 L.C.10
A. Hull Girder Loads (See 4.3)
Vertical B.M.
(-) (+) (-) (+) (-) (+) (-) (+) - -
k
c
1 1 0,7 0,7 0,3 0,3 0,4 0,4 0 0
Vertical S.F.
(+) (-) (+) (-) (+) (-) (+) (-) - -
k
c
0,5 0,5 1 1 0,3 0,3 0,4 0,4 0 0
Horizontal B.M.
(-) (+) (-) (+)
k
c
0 0 0 0 0,3 0,3 1 1 0 0
Horizontal S.F.
(+) (-) (+) (-)
k
c
0 0 0 0 0,3 0,3 0,5 0,5 0 0
B. External Pressure (See 4.3.3)
k
c
0,5 0,5 0,5 1 0,5 1 0,5 1 0 0
k
f0
-1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 0 0
C. Internal Tank Pressure
k
c
0,4 0,4 1 0,5 1 0,5 1 0,5 0 0
w
v
0,75 -0,75 0,75 -0,75 0,25 -0,25 0,4 -0,4 0 0
w
l

Fwd
Bhd
0,25
Fwd
Bhd
-0,25
Fwd
Bhd
0,25
Fwd
Bhd
-0,25
- -
Fwd
Bhd
0,2
Fwd
Bhd
-0,2

Aft
Bhd
-0,25
Aft
Bhd
0,25
Aft
Bhd
-0,25
Aft
Bhd
0,25

Aft Bhd
-0,2
Aft
Bhd
0,2

w
t
- - - -
Port
Bhd
-0,75
Port
Bhd
0,75
Port
Bhd
-0,4
Port
Bhd
0,4
- -
- - - -
Stbd
Bhd
0,75
Stbd
Bhd
-0,75
Stbd
Bhd
0,4
Stbd
Bhd
-0,4
- -
c
, Pitch -1 1 -1 1 0 0 -0,7 0,7 0 0

c
, Roll 0 0 0 0 1 -1 0,7 -0,7 0 0

(*) k
u
= 1.0 for all load components.
L.C. = Load Case
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
255
Table 9.4-2 Load Cases for Sloshing
Type A: For Horizontal Girder on the Aft Side of Transverse Bulkhead
Hull girder Loads (*)
External Pressures
Sloshing
Pressures**
Reference Wave Heading and Motions
VBM
HBM
VSF
HSH
k
u

k
u

k
c

k
c

k
u

k
c
k
f0
k
u

k
c

Heading
Angle
Heave Pitch Roll
LC S-1 (-)
(-)
(+)
(+)
1,0
1,0
0,4
0,7
1,0 0,5 -1,0 1,0 1,0 60
0

Down
Bow
Down
-0.9
Stbd
Down
0.9
LC S-2 (+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
1,0
1,0
0,4
0,7
1,0 0,5 -1,0 1,0 1,0 60
0

Up Bow
Up
0.9
Stbd
Up
-0.9
Type B: For Horizontal Girder on the Forward Side of Transverse Bulkhead
Hull girder Loads*
External Pressures
Sloshing
Pressures**
Reference Wave Heading and Motions
VBM
HBM
VSF
HSH
k
u

k
u

k
c

k
c

k
u

k
c
k
f0
k
u

k
c

Heading
Angle
Heave Pitch Roll
LC S-1 (-)
(-)
(+)
(+)
1,0
1,0
0,4
0,7
1,0 0,5 -1,0 1,0 1,0 60
0

Up Bow
Up
0.9
Stbd
Up
-0.9
LC S-2 (+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
1,0
1,0
0,4
0,7
1,0 0,5 -1,0 1,0 1,0 60
0

Down
Bow
Down
-0.9
Stbd
Down
0.9
* For determining the total vertical bending moment for the above two load
cases, 70% of the maximum designed still water bending moment may be
used at the specified wave vertical bending moment station.
** Sloshing Pressures
VBM is vertical wave bending moment
VSF is vertical wave shear force
HBM is horizontal wave bending moment
HSF is horizontal wave shear force
H Heave
P Pitch
R Roll
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
256
4.7 Impact Loads
Impact Loads are calculated in accordance with appropriate clauses given in appendix II

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
257
5 Appendix V: Fatigue Life
5.1 Floating storage units with length more than 150 m
5.1.1 General
An analysis is to be made of the fatigue strength of welded joints and details in
highly stressed areas especially where higher strength steel is used. Special attention
is to be given to structural notches, cutouts and bracket toes, and also to abrupt
changes of structural sections.
The following subparagraphs are intended to emphasize the main points and to
outline procedures where refined spectral analysis techniques are used to establish
fatigue strength
5.1.1.1 Workmanship: As most fatigue data available were experimentally developed under
controlled laboratory conditions, consideration is to be given to the workmanship
expected during construction.
5.1.1.2 Fatigue Data: paid to the background of all design data and its validity for the
details being considered. In this regard, recognized design data, such as those by
AWS (American Welding Society), API (American Petroleum Institute) should be
considered.
If other fatigue data are to be used, the background and supporting data are to be
submitted for review. In this regard, clarification is required whether or not the stress
concentration due to the weld profile, certain structural configurations and also the
heat effects are accounted for in the proposed S-N curve. Consideration is also to be
given to the additional stress concentrations.
5.1.1.3 Design Consideration: In design, consideration is to be given to the minimization of
structural notches and stress concentrations. Areas subject to highly concentrated
forces are to be properly configured and stiffened to dissipate the concentrated
loads..
5.1.2 Procedures
The analysis of fatigue strength for a welded structural joint/detail may be performed
in accordance with the following procedures:
5.1.2.1 Step 1 Classification of Various Critical Locations
The class designations and associated load patterns are given in recognized
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
258
standard/intruction.
5.1.2.2 Step 2 Permissible Stress Range Approach
Where deemed appropriate, the total applied stress range of the structural details
classified in Step 1 may be checked against the permissible stress ranges, where
stress range is S
max
S
min
.
5.1.2.3 Step 3 Refined Analysis
Refined analyses are to be performed, as outlined below, for the structural details for
which the total applied stress ranges obtained from Step 2 are greater than the
permissible stress ranges, or for which the fatigue characteristics are not covered by
the classified details and the associated S-N curves.
The fatigue life of structures is generally not to be less than 20 years, unless
otherwise specified.
(1) Spectral analysis: Alternatively, a spectral analysis may be performed, as
outlined in 5.1.3 below, to directly calculate fatigue lives for the structural
details in question.
(2) Refined fatigue data: For structural details which are not covered by the detail
classifications, proposed S-N curves and the associated SCFs, when
applicable, may be submitted to VR for consideration. In this regard,
sufficient supporting data and background are also to be submitted to VR for
review. The refined SCFs may be determined by finite element analyses
5.1.3 Spectral Analysis
Where Refined Analysis is exercised, a spectral analysis is to be performed in
accordance with the following guidelines.
5.1.3.1 Representative Loading Patterns
Several representative loading patterns are to be considered to cover the worst
scenarios anticipated for the design service life of the floating units with respect to
hull girder local loads .
5.1.3.2 Environmental Representation
Instead of the design wave loads specified in appendix IV, a wave scatter diagram
(such as Waldens Data) is to be employed to simulate a representative distribution of
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
259
all of the wave conditions expected for the design service life of the vessel. In
general, the wave data is to cover a time period of not less than 20 years. The
probability of occurrence for each combination of significant wave height and mean
period of the representative wave scatter diagram is to be weighted, based on the
operation time of the floating units.
5.1.3.3 Calculation of Wave Load RAOs
The wave load RAOs with respect to the wave-induced bending moments, shear
forces, motions, accelerations and hydrodynamic pressures can then be predicted by
floating unit motion calculation for a selected representative loading condition
5.1.3.4 Generation of Stress Spectrum
The stress spectrum for each critical structural detail (spot) may be generated by
performing a structural analysis, accounting for all of the wave loads separately for
each individual wave group. For this purpose, the 3D structural model and 2D
models specified in appendix III may be used for determining structural responses.
The additional secondary and tertiary stresses are also to be considered.
5.1.3.5 Cumulative Fatigue Damage and Fatigue Life
Based on the stress spectrum and wave scatter diagram established above, the
cumulative fatigue damage and the corresponding fatigue life can be estimated by the
Palmgren-Miner linear damage rule
5.2 Floating storage units with length less than 150 m
For Floating storage units with length less than 150 m, the procedures and fatigue
calculation guideline given on recognized standards may be used.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
260
6 Appendix VI: Failure Criteria Yielding
6.1 Floating storage units with length more than 150 m
6.1.1 General
The calculated stresses in the hull structure are to be within the limits given below for
the entire combined load cases specified in appendix IV.
6.1.2 Structural Members and Elements
For all structural members and elements, such as longitudinals/stiffeners, web plates
and flanges, the combined effects of all of the calculated stress components are to
satisfy the following limits:
i m y
f S f

where
f
i
= stress intensity
=
( )
1/ 2
2 2 2
3
L T L T LT
f f f f f + +
N/cm
2

L
f
= calculated total in-plane stress in the longitudinal direction including primary
and secondary stresses
=
*
1 2 2 L L L
f f f + +
N/cm2

1 L
f
= direct stress due to the primary (hull girder) bending , N/cm
2

2 L
f
= direct stress due to the secondary bending between bulkheads in the
longitudinal direction, N/cm
2

*
2 L
f
= direct stress due to local bending of longitudinal between transverses in the
longitudinal direction, N/cm
2

T
f
= calculated total direct stress in the transverse/vertical direction, including
secondary stresses
=
*
1 2 2 T T T
f f f + +
N/cm
2

f
LT
= calculated total in-plane shear stress, N/cm
2

f
T1
= direct stress due to sea and cargo load in the transverse/vertical direction, N/cm
2

f
T2
= direct stress due to the secondary bending between bulkheads in the
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
261
transverse/vertical direction, N/cm
2

f*
T2
= direct stress due to local bending of stiffeners in the transverse/vertical
direction, N/cm
2

f
y
= specified minimum yield point, N/cm
2

S
m
= strength reduction factor, given in VRs Applicable material rules
For this purpose,
*
2 L
f
and
*
2 T
f
in the flanges of longitudinal and stiffener at the ends
of span may be obtained from the following equation:
*
2
0, 07 / =
L L
f sp SM
N/cm
2

*
2
0, 07 / =
T T
f sp SM
N/cm
2

where
s = spacing of longitudinals (stiffeners), in cm
l = unsupported span of the longitudinal (stiffener), in cm
p = net pressure load, in N/cm
2
, for the longitudinal (stiffener)
SML (SMT) = net section modulus, in cm
3
, of the longitudinal (stiffener)
6.1.3 Plating
For plating away from knuckle or cruciform connections of high stress
concentrations and subject to both in-plane and lateral loads, the combined effects of
all of the calculated stress components are to satisfy the limits specified in 6.1.2 with
f
L
and f
T
modified as follows:

*
1 2 2 3 L L L L L
f f f f f = + + +
N/cm
2

*
1 2 2 3 T T T T T
f f f f f = + + +
N/cm
2

where
3 3
,
L T
f f
= plate bending stresses between stiffeners in the longitudinal and transverse
directions, respectively, and may be approximated as follows:
3 L
f
=
2
0,182
n
s
p
t

N/cm
2

3 T
f
=
2
0, 266
n
s
p
t

N/cm
2

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
262
p = lateral pressures for the combined load case considered , in N/cm
2

s = spacing of longitudinals or stiffeners, in mm
t
n
= net plate thickness, in mm
6.2 Floating storage units with length less than 150 m
For Floating storage units with length less than 150 m, the appropriate requirements in
TCVN 6259:2-2003 are to be complied with.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
263
7 Appendix VII: Machinary, process system on floating storage unit
7.1 General
This chapter defines the minimum criteria to equipment and systems on floating
installations. These systems include:
1) Hydrocarbon Production and Process systems
2) Process Support Systems
3) Process Control Systems
4) Electrical Systems
5) Instrumentation and Control Systems
6) Fire Protection and Personnel Safety Systems
7.2 Definitions
7.2.1 Process Areas: Process Areas are areas where processing equipment is located. This
includes wellhead/manifold Areas
7.2.2 Production Facilities/ System: production facilities are typically the processing,
safety and control systems, utility and auxiliary equipment, for producing
hydrocarbon liquid and gas mixtures from completed wells or other sources. The
production facility is terminated at the inlet flange discharge into the storage tank.
7.2.3 Lower Explosive Limit (L.E.L.): The lowest concentration of combustible vapors
or gases, by volume in mixture with air, which can be ignited at ambient
conditions.
7.2.4 H Class Divisions
H class divisions are those divisions formed by bulkheads and decks that are
complied with requirements from (a) to (d) below, A test of a prototype fire wall or
deck may be required by VR to ensure that it meets the above requirements for
integrity and temperature rise:
(a) constructed of steel or other equivalent material,
(b) suitably stiffened,
(c) These are designed to withstand and prevent the passage of smoke and flame
for the 120-minute duration of a hydrocarbon fire test.
(d) H class divisions are to be insulated by approved material by VR or other
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
264
orgnization recognized by VR so that the average temperature of the
unexposed face will not increase by more than 1390C any time during the
two-hour hydrocarbon fire test, nor will the temperature, at any point on the
face, including any joint, rise more than 1800C above the initial temperature,
within the time listed below:
class H-120 120 minutes
class H-60 60 minutes
class H-0 0 minutes
This division is to remain intact with the main structure of the vessel, and is to
maintain its structural integrity after two (2) hours. Structural integrity means
that it will not fall under its own weight, nor will it crumble or break upon
normal contact after exposure to the fire.
7.2.5 Abnormal Condition: A condition which occurs in a process system when an
operating variable (flow, pressure, temperature, etc.) ranges outside of its normal
operating limits..
7.2.6 Hazardous Area: A location in which flammable gases or vapors are or may be
present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures.
7.2.7 Closed Drains: Hard piped drains from process components, such as pressure
vessels, piping, liquid relief valves etc., to a closed drain tank without any break to
atmosphere.
7.2.8 Open Drains: Gravity drains from sources which are at or near atmospheric
pressure, such as open deck drains, drip pan drains, and rain gutters..
7.2.9 Fire Wall: A wall designed and constructed to remain structurally intact under the
effects of fire and insulated so that the temperature on the unexposed side will
remain below a specified temperature for a determined amount of time..
7.2.10 Fired Vessel: A vessel in which the temperature of the fluid is increased by the
addition of heat supplied by a flame within the vessel. Specifically for hydrocarbon
services, there are two types of fired vessels:
(1) Direct Fired Vessel: A vessel in which the temperature of process
hydrocarbon fluids is increased by the addition of heat supplied by a flame.
The flame is applied directly to the fluid container. The combustion takes
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
265
place in the heater.
(2) Indirect Fired Vessel: A vessel in which the energy is transferred from an
open flame or product of combustion (such as exhaust gases from turbines,
engines, or boilers) to the hydrocarbon, through a heating medium, such as hot
oil. The heating medium is usually non-combustible or has a high flash point.
The combustion may, but does not necessarily, take place in the heater.
7.3 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted
7.3.1 Plans and Particulars to be Submitted
7.3.1.1 Hydrocarbon Production and Processing Systems
(1) Project Specification
(2) Process Flow Sheets
(3) Heat and Mass Balance
(4) Equipment Layout Drawings
(5) Area Classification and Ventilation Drawings
(6) Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P & IDs)
(7) Safety Analysis Function Evaluation (SAFE) Charts
(8) Pressure Relief and Depressurization Systems
(9) Flare and Vent Systems
(10) Spill Containment, Closed and Open Drain Systems
(11) Process Equipment Documentation
(12) Process Piping Systems
(13) Sub-sea Production Systems
(14) Packaged Process Units
7.3.1.2 Process Support Systems
(1) Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&IDs) for each system
(2) Equipment Documentation
(3) Process Support Piping Specifications
(4) Internal-Combustion Engines and Turbines
(5) Cranes
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
266
7.3.1.3 Marine Support Systems
(1) See requirements in 2.8
7.3.1.4 Electrical Installations
(1) Electrical One-line Diagrams
(2) Short-Circuit Current Calculations
(3) Coordination Study
(4) Specifications and Data Sheets for Generators and Motors and Distribution
Transformers
(5) Details of Storage Batteries
(6) Details of Emergency Power Source
(7) Standard Details of Wiring Cable and Conduit Iinstallation Practices
(8) Switchboard and Distribution Panel
(9) Panelboard
(10) Installations in Classified Areas
7.3.1.5 Instrumentation and Control Systems
(1) General Arrangements
(2) Data Sheet
(3) Schematic Drawings-Electrical Systems
(4) Schematic Drawings-Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems
(5) Programmable Electronic Systems
7.3.1.6 Fire Protection and Personnel Safety
(1) Firewater System
(2) Water Spray (Deluge) Systems for Process Equipment
(3) Foam Systems for Crude Storage Tanks
(4) Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems
(5) Paint Lockers and Flammable Material Storerooms
(6) Emergency Control Stations
(7) Portable and Semi-Portable Extinguishers
(8) Fire and Gas Detection and Alarm Systems
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
267
(9) Fire and Gas Cause and Effect Chart
(10) Structural Fire Protection (which indicates classification of all bulkheads for:
quarters section, machinery spaces and processing facilities)
(11) HVAC plan (including AHU location, duct layout, duct construction and
bulkhead penetration details
(12) Joiner detail arrangement and structural fire protection material certification
(13) Guard Rails
(14) Escape Routes (may be included on the fire control plan or separate plan)
(15) Lifesaving Appliances and Equipment Plan (escape routes must be indicated)
(16) Insulation of Hot Surfaces
7.3.1.7 Specific Arrangements
(1) Arrangements for Storage Tank Venting and Inerting
(2) Arrangements for Use of Produced Gas as Fuel
7.3.1.8 Start-up and Commissioning Manual
7.3.2 Details
All sizes, dimensions, welding and other details, make and size of standard approved
equipment are to be shown on the plans as clearly and completely as possible.
7.3.3 Hydrocarbon Production and Process Systems
7.3.3.1 Project specification
Submit project specification covering a brief description of field location,
environmental conditions, well shut-in pressure, well fluid properties, production
plans, oil/gas storage and transportation arrangements.
7.3.3.2 Process flow sheet
Submit process flow sheets identifying each process stream, process equipment
component, planned addition and symbols used .
7.3.3.3 Heat and mass balance
Submit heat and mass balance specification, including flow rate, composition, and
conditions (temperature, pressure, and vapor/liquid ratio) for each process stream
under normal operating and expected extreme conditions.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
268
7.3.3.4 Equipment layout drawing
Submit plans showing arrangements and locations of living quarters and control
rooms, including entrances and exits; openings to these spaces; layout of machinery,
process equipment, crude storage, fire wall, ESD station, location of fire protection
equipments and escape route for decks.
7.3.3.5 Area classification and ventilation drawing
Submit plans showing degree and extent of all Class I and the arrangements for
ventilation of enclosed spaces .
7.3.3.6 Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&ID's)
Submit P & IDs showing size, design, and operating conditions of each major
process component, piping and valve designation and size, sensing and control
instrumentation, shutdown and pressure relief devices with set points, signal circuits,
set points for controllers, continuity of all line pipes, and boundaries of skid units and
process packages.
7.3.3.7 Safety Analysis Function Evaluation (S.A.F.E.) Charts
List all process components and emergency support systems with their required
devices, and the functions to be performed by each sensing device, shutdown valve,
and shutdown device.
7.3.3.8 Pressure relief and depressurization systems
Submit sizes, arrangements, materials, and design calculations for relief valves and
depressurization systems.
7.3.3.9 Flare and vent systems
Submit sizes and arrangements, including details of flare tips, pilots, ignition system,
water seals and gas purging systems, and provide design calculations for blow down
rates, knockout drum sizing, flare and vent sizing, radiant heat intensities, and gas
dispersion analysis including basis of analysis.
7.3.3.10 Spill containment, closed and open drain systems
Submit arrangements for spill containment, details of piping connections to all
process components, and slope of drains.
7.3.3.11 Process Equipment Documentation
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
269
Submit specification, data sheet, standard of construction and testing, and general
arrangement plans for Christmas tree assemblies (optional), pumps, and compressors.
Submit complete design specification, including all design data such as pressure,
temperature, corrosion allowances, service, external loads etc., dimensional drawings
covering arrangements and details, material specification, weld details, extent of non-
destructive testing, test pressure, and design calculations for verification of
compliance to a recognized standard for process vessels, storage tanks, heat
exchangers, fired heaters, manifolds and scraper launchers/receivers.
7.3.3.12 Process Piping Specifications
Submit line list with design conditions, pipe and fitting material lists, specifications,
sizes, pressure ratings, and calculations for pipe wall thickness.
7.3.3.13 Subsea Production Systems
Provide stress calculations for structural components, P & IDs, S.A.F.E. Charts,
equipment specifications and data sheets, control schematics, assembly drawings,
and installation and operation procedures.
7.3.3.14 Packaged Process Units
Packaged process units include, but are not limited to, the following: dehydration,
sweetening, stabilizing, vapor recovery, and gas compression for fuel or re-injection.
Documentation requirements for packaged process units include: Skid arrangements,
P & IDs, S.A.F.E. charts, Process equipment and piping system documentation,
Electrical one-line diagrams, Specifications and data sheets, Structural design
calculations for skid units in dry condition with a center of gravity height of more
than 1.5 m , or a maximum operating weight in excess of 10 MT (metric tons).
7.3.4 Process Support Systems
7.3.4.1 A typical list of process support systems includes, but is not limited to, the
following::
(1) Utility/Instrument Air System
(2) Fuel/Instrument Gas System
(3) Purging System
(4) Use of Produced Gas as Fuel
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
270
(5) Fuel Oil System
(6) Hydraulic System
(7) Chemical Injection System
(8) Material Handling System (Cranes)
(9) Platform Drilling Systems
(10) Heating & Cooling Systems
7.3.4.2 Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P & ID's)
As required in 7.3.3
7.3.4.3 Equipment Documentation
Submit specifications, data sheets, and drawings for each equipment component such
as pressure vessels, heat exchangers, pumps and compressors. Details as per 7.3.3.
7.3.4.4 Piping Specifications
Submit specifications, materials, sizes, and pressure ratings for all pipes, valves and
fittings, and calculations for pipe wall thickness.
7.3.4.5 Internal-Combustion Engines and Turbines
Submit specifications for internal-combustion engines and turbines, including types,
horsepower, revolutions per minute, shutdown arrangements, and manufacturers
affidavit verifying compliance with recognized standards.
7.3.4.6 Cranes
Submit specifications for cranes, including structural design calculations, load rating
chart, and test certificates for wire rope.
7.3.5 Marine Support Systems
Marine support systems include, but are not limited to, the following:
(1) Boilers and Pressure Vessels
(2) Turbines and Gears
(3) Internal-Combustion Engines
(4) Pumps and Piping Systems (i.e. Fuel Oil, Lube Oil, Fresh Water, Ballast
Control, Cargo, Inert Gas, etc.)
(5) Propellers and Propulsion Shafting
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
271
(6) Steering Gears
Documentation is to be summited in accordance with Part 1.
7.3.6.1 Electrical One-Line Diagrams
Indicate the ratings of generators, transformers, motors, and other loads; rated load
current of each branch circuit; type and size and temperature rating of cables; rating
or settings of circuit breakers, fuses, and switches; interrupting capacity of
switchgear, motor control centers, and distribution panels..
7.3.6.2 Short-circuit Current Calculations
To establish that the protective devices have sufficient short-circuit breaking and
making capacities, data is to be submitted giving the maximum calculated short-
circuit current in symmetrical r.m.s. and a symmetrical peak values available at the
main bus bars, along with the maximum allowable breaking and making capacities of
the protective device. Similar calculations are to be made at other points in the
distribution system where necessary, to determine the adequacy of the interrupting
capacities of protective devices.
7.3.6.3 Coordination study
A protective device coordination study is to be submitted.
7.3.6.4 Specifications and Data Sheets for Generators and Motors
For generators and motors of 100 kW (134 hp) and over, submit drawings showing
assembly, seating arrangements, terminal arrangements, shafts, coupling, coupling
bolts, stator and rotor details together with data for complete rating, class of
insulation, designed ambient temperature, temperature rise, weights and speeds for
rotating parts.
For generators and motors under 100 kW (134 hp), submit nameplate data along with
degree of enclosure
7.3.6.5 Details of Storage Batteries
Submit arrangement, ventilation, corrosion protection, types and capacities,
conductors and charging facilities, over-current and reverse current protection.
7.3.6.6 Details of Emergency Power Source
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
272
Submit location, arrangement, and services required to maintain the integrity of the
facility in the event of primary power loss..
7.3.6.7 Standard Details of Wiring Cable
A booklet on the standard wiring practices and details is to be submitted. The booklet
is to include such items as cable supports, earthing details, bulkhead and deck
penetrations, cable joints and sealing, cable splicing, watertight and explosion-proof
connections to equipment, earthing and bonding connections, etc..
7.3.6.8 Switchboard, Distribution Boards and Motor Control Centers
(1) A front outline of the switchboard, including overall dimensions, front view
indicating instrumentation, circuit breakers, switches, drip-shields, hand-rail
and securing supporting details.
(2) Complete list of materials, including manufacturers name, model number,
rating, size, type, testing laboratorys listing number (if any), or indication of
construction standard for components such as: switchboard enclosure, circuit
breakers, all types of fuses, power and control wiring, bus bars, connectors
and terminals and power switches.
(3) Bracing arrangements and calculations to determine that bus bars and short
runs of power cables are adequately braced to withstand the mechanical forces
that the switchboard may be subjected to under fault conditions.
(4) A complete wiring schematic, including type of wiring, size, and setting of
protective devices.
(5) One line schematic of the bus bars, indicating rating for each of the horizontal
and vertical buses, the exact connection of circuit breakers to the bus bars,
setting of the power circuit breakers and loads ampacities and power cable
sizes, if available.
(6) Actual bus bar arrangement of the horizontal, vertical, and ground buses,
including bus bar material, size and rating, separation distances between bus
bars, and between bus bars and bare metal parts.
(7) Results/ data of tests
(8) Grounding details
(9) If applicable, details of metal barriers provided to isolate bus bars, wiring, and
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
273
associated components.
7.3.6.9 Panel board
The information as requested in 7.2.6.8 , as applicable
7.3.6.10 Installations in Classified Areas
List of electrical equipment installed in classified areas, together with documentation
issued by an independent testing laboratory certifying suitability of same for intended
services.
7.3.7 Instrumentation and Control Systems
7.3.7.1 General Arrangements
Submit layout plans for local controllers, central controllers, displays, printers, and
other instrumentation and control devices.
7.3.7.2 Instrumentation List
Submit a list of instrumentation and control equipment, including a list of
monitoring, control, and alarm set points and ranges..
7.3.7.3 Schematic Drawings Electrical Systems
Include types and sizes of electrical cables and wiring, voltage rating, service voltage
and current, overload and short-circuit protection for the following systems:
(1) Process control panels
(2) Emergency shutdown (ESD) panels
(3) Intrinsically safe systems
(4) Fire and gas detection and alarm panels
(5) Fire alarm circuits
(6) Emergency generator or fire pump drive starting circuit
7.3.7.4 Schematic Drawings Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems
Submit system description of hydraulic and pneumatic control systems, including
pipe sizes and materials, pressure ratings, and relief valve settings..
7.3.7.5 Programmable Electronic Systems
Submit the control philosophy, schematic alarm, monitoring and control
arrangements, and redundancy arrangements. Provide failure modes of the system
components.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
274

7.3.8 Fire Protection and Personnel Safety
7.3.8.1 Firewater System
Submit plans indicating pump and piping arrangements, location of isolation valves,
locations of firewater stations, details of fire pumps including pump drivers, pump
capacity and pressure, and hydraulic calculations for sizing of fire pump capacity and
fire main..
7.3.8.2 Deluge Systems (Water Spray for Process Equipment)
Submit plans showing the arrangement for firewater piping and spraying nozzles, as
well as detailed hydraulic calculations..
7.3.8.3 Foam Systems (for Crude Storage Tanks)
Indicate the arrangement for firewater supply, foam supply and delivery, type of
foam and expansion ratio, as well as capacity calculations for areas protected.
7.3.8.4 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems
Submit plans showing the arrangement for piping, spraying nozzles, and storage of
the extinguishing medium, and details of control and alarm for release of the
extinguishing medium, as well as capacity calculations and discharge time
calculations for areas protected.
7.3.8.5 Paint Lockers and Flammable Material Storerooms
Submit plans and calculations showing details of fixed fire extinguishing systems for
the paint lockers and flammable material storerooms.
7.3.8.6 Fire Control and Life Saving Equipment Plan
Submit a fire control and life saving equipment plan for the process area. A fire
control plan and life saving equipment plan for a process area is to include the
following:
(1) Portable and Semi-Portable Extinguishers
The plan is to show types, quantities and locations of portable and semi-
portable extinguishers for the production facility.
(2) Fixed Fire Detection, Alarm and Extinguishing Systems
The plan is to show locations, controls, protected spaces/areas and types of
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
275
extinguishing system.
(3) Emergency Control Stations
The plan is to show location and equipment.
(4) Lifesaving Appliances and Equipment
The plan is to show type, capacity, quantity and location.
(5) Structural Fire Protection
The plan is to show arrangements, locations, and types of firewalls for
buildings and bulkheads installed in or adjacent to the process area.
(6) Guard Rails and Escape Routes
The plan is to show arrangement of protective guardrails, toe plates, and means
of escape from normally manned spaces.
7.3.8.7 Fire and Gas Detection and Alarm Systems
Indicate the locations and details of power supplies, sensors, annunciation and
indicating equipment, set points of alarm systems, and data sheets for detectors.
7.3.8.8 Fire and Gas Cause and Effect Chart
Relate all fire and gas sensors to shutdowns, operation of fixed systems and fire
control plans.
7.3.8.9 Insulation of Hot Surfaces
Submit details of insulation and shielding provided for personnel safety and fire
protection.
7.3.9 Arrangements for Storage Tank Venting and Inerting
Submit piping and control arrangements for storage tank venting and inerting
systems
7.3.10 Arrangements for Use of Produced Gas as Fuel
Submit piping and control arrangements for use of produced gas as fuel, showing
details of double wall or ducting arrangements for the pipe runs in way of the safe
space.
7.3.11 Start-up and Commissioning Manual
The manual is to be submitted for review as early as possible, prior to the
commissioning of the installation.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
276

7.4 Hydrocarbon Production and Process Systems
7.4.1 General
7.4.1.1 This section defines the minimum criteria applicable to equipment and systems for
handling and processing produced fluids from completed wells..
7.4.1.2 Process Safety Criterion
The process safety overall criterion is that hydrocarbon production and processing
systems be designed to minimize the risk of hazards to personnel, property and
environment. Implementation of this criterion to production systems and associated
facilities design is intended to:
(1) Prevent an abnormal condition from causing an upset condition
(2) Prevent an upset condition from causing a release of hydrocarbons
(3) Safely collect and dispose of hydrocarbon gasses and vapors released
(4) Prevent formation of explosive mixtures
(5) Prevent ignition of flammable liquids or gases and vapors released
(6) Limit exposure of personnel to fire hazards.
7.4.2 Process Design
7.4.2.1 Design Basis
Production process design is to be based on production plans, expected well fluid
properties, required pipeline or product custody transfer specifications, and other
considerations. The floating processing drainage, production water discharge and
displacement water discharge are to be in accordance with Vietnamese Regulations.
7.4.2.2 Process Design Conditions
Process design conditions specified for equipment and systems are to include
provision for handling short term and transient conditions, such as pipeline-riser
slugging, cyclic pump operation, or pressure spikes, and to meet the required product
specifications.
Due consideration is to be given to the well fluid properties, such as presence of
hydrogen sulfide (H2S), carbon dioxide (CO2), etc., for selection of materials.
Design, procurement, and fabrication of equipment and equipment components that
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
277
may be exposed to hydrogen sulfide under conditions conducive to Sulfide Stress
Cracking is to be complied with recognized standards.
Each process component or piping element is to be designed for the maximum
extremes of pressure, temperature, and corrosive properties of the fluid, which it can
encounter in service.
7.4.2.3 Process Flow Sheets
Process flow sheets are to indicate all process components with associated piping
systems, and define operating conditions for each component. Each flow stream is to
be labeled by composition, flowrate, phase, pressure, and temperature.
7.4.3 Facility Layout
7.4.3.1 General Arrangement
Machinery and equipment are to be arranged in groups or areas in accordance with
recognized standard (refer to API RP14J). Equipment items that could become fuel
sources in the event of a fire are to be separated from potential ignition sources by
space separation, firewalls or protective walls. typical fuel and ignition sources are
listed below:
Fuel source:
Wellheads and Manifolds
Process Piping
Separators and Scrubbers
Risers and Pipelines
Coalesces
Vents
Gas Compressors
Pig Launchers and Receivers
Liquid Hydrocarbon Pumps
Drains
Heat Exchangers
Portable Fuel Tanks
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
278
Hydrocarbon Storage Tanks
Chemical Storage Tanks
Gas Metering Equipment
Laboratory Gas Bottles
Oil Treaters (unfired vessels)
Sample Pots
Ignition source:
Fired Vessels
Electrical Equipment
Combustion Engines & Gas Turbines
Waste Heat Recovery Equipment
Living Quarters
Mobile phones
Flares Lightning
Welding Machines
Spark Producing Hand Tools
Grinding Machines
Portable Computers
Cutting Machinery or Torches
Cameras
Static Electricity
Non-Intrinsically Safe Flashlights
In case of a fire onboard a subject unit, the means of escape is to permit the safe
evacuation of all occupants to a safe area, even when the structure they occupy can
be considered lost in a conflagration..
With safety spacing, protective firewalls and equipment groupings, a possible fire
from a classified location is not to impede the safe exit of personnel from the danger
source to the lifeboat embarkation zone or any place of refuge..
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
279
7.4.3.2 Accommodation Spaces (Living Quarters)
Accommodation spaces or living quarters are to be located outside of hazardous
areas and may not be located above or below crude oil storage tanks or process areas.
H-60 ratings are required for the bulkheads of permanent living quarters,
temporary living quarters and normally manned modules that face areas such as
wellheads, oil storage tanks, fired vessels (heaters), crude oil processing vessels, and
other similar hazards. If such bulkhead is more than 33 m (100 ft) from this source,
then this can be relaxed to an H-0 rating. A-60 and A rated bulkheads,
respectively, may be utilized provided that a risk or fire load analysis was done and
reviewed by VR , indicating that these bulkheads are acceptable.
7.4.3.3 Wellhead Areas
Wellhead areas are to be separated or protected from sources of ignition and
mechanical damage. A-0 firewalls around wellheads are to be used to provide
protection from potential uncontrolled flow from wellheads with shut-in pressures
exceeding 42 kg/cm
2
(600 psig).
7.4.3.4 Storage Tanks and Slop Tanks
Supported storage tanks for crude oil or other flammable liquids are to be located as
far as possible from wellheads. In addition, they are to be located far from potential
ignition sources such as gas and diesel engines, fired vessels, and buildings
designated as unclassified areas, or areas used as workshops, or welding locations.
For crude storage tanks, slop tanks, and low flash point flammable liquid storage
tanks (flash point of 60
o
C or less), such as methanol storage tanks built as hull or
integral tanks, are to be separated from machinery spaces, service spaces, and other
similar source of ignition spaces by cofferdams of at least 0.76 m (30 in.) wide.
Pump rooms, ballast tanks and fuel oil tanks may be considered cofferdams for this
purpose
7.4.3.5 Fired Vessels
Fired vessels, such as glycol reboilers, hot oil heaters, etc., are considered ignition
sources. They are to be installed away from wellheads and other unfired hydrocarbon
processing and storage equipment. Occasionally, it may not be possible to observe
the above requirement, particularly when the space of the process area is limited,
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
280
causing fired vessels to be located in the unfired process areas. In this case, the fired
vessel is to be surrounded on all sides, except on the outboard side of the unit
mounted on the perimeter of a platform or FPSO, by a minimum of A-0 rated
firewall.
For equipment such as the direct fired (crude oil) treater that is considered both a fuel
and ignition source, a minimum of A-0 rated firewall is to be provided as described
above, regardless of where the unit is installed (Fired or Unfired Process Areas)..
7.4.3.6 Structural Considerations for Process Deck
Structure that supports production facilities or forms an integral part of the
equipment is to be designed to a recognized standard. Plans and calculations are to be
provided for verification. Process liquid weights and dynamic loads due to vessel
motions are to be considered. If the vessel hull girder deflection has significant
effects on the structure, this is to be taken into account in the design.
7.4.4 Piping and Instrumentation Design
7.4.4.1 Process Control System
Essential process parameters (such as flow rate, pressure, temperature and liquid
level) are to be automatically monitored and controlled, and the abnormal conditions
are to be alarmed with visual and audible devices.
The process control system used to maintain process variables within normal
operating ranges is to be capable of accommodating a reasonable range of abnormal
or transient conditions without creating an upset condition.
7.4.4.2 Safety System
A safety system is to be provided in accordance with recognized standards approved
by VR (refer to the recommended practices of API RP14C). Essential elements of the
system are to include:
(1) Safety Sensing and Self-acting Devices
The safety system is to provide two levels of protection (primary and
secondary), with sensing and self-acting devices, which are functionally
different types of devices. They are to be in addition to process control
devices used to maintain normal process parameters. The safety system is to
sense process variables. It reacts to a condition outside acceptable limits by
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
281
automatically activating an alarm and initiating the necessary protective
response.
Pressure vessels, for example, are generally fitted with pressure control valves
to protect against overpressure. Nevertheless, they are to be fitted with a
safety system device such as Pressure Safety High (PSH) (primary) and a
Pressure Safety Valve (PSV) (secondary).
Loss of any single control or safety system component is not to cause an
unsafe condition.
(2) Fire Detection
A fusible plug system, or other means of automatically detecting fire, is to
provide a shutdown signal for production facilities.
(3) Gas Detection
Combustible and hydrogen sulfide gas detectors are to be provided to initiate
alarms and shutdowns.
(4) Process Emergency Shutdowns (ESD)
An emergency shutdown (ESD) system with manual stations is to be provided
to shut down the flow of hydrocarbon from all wells and pipelines, and to
terminate all production and injection activities of the facility.
The emergency shutdown system is to be automatically activated by:
(a) The detection of an abnormal operating condition by flowline pressure
sensors and sensors on any downstream component through which the
pipeline fluids flow;
(b) The detection of fire in the wellhead and process areas;
(c) The detection of combustible gas at a 60% level of the lower explosive
limit;
(d) The detection of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) gas at a level of 50 ppm.
Emergency Shutdown (ESD) valves for flowlines and pipelines are to
be located as far away from the facility as practical.
(5) Safety Analysis
Safety Analysis Tables (SAT) and Safety Analysis Checklists (SAC) are to
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
282
beused to verify that the safety devices provided to protect each process
component and piping segment are adequate. Safety Analysis Function
Evaluation (SAFE) Charts are to be prepared to show the integration of all
safety devices and self-protected equipment into a complete facility safety
system.
7.4.5 Emergency Shutdown (ESD) Stations
Emergency shutdown stations are to be provided for manual activation of the Process
Safety Shutdown system for shutdown of all wells and process systems. These
manual activation stations are to be protected against accidental activation, and
conveniently located at the primary evacuation points (i.e., boat landing, helicopter
deck, etc.) and the emergency control stations . The following additional locations
may be considered appropriate for emergency shutdown stations:
(1) Exit stairway at each deck level
(2) Main exits of living quarters
(3) Main exits of production (process) facility deck
7.4.6 Pressure Relieving and Hydrocarbon Disposal Systems
7.4.6.1 Pressure Relief Systems
(1) Pressure Relief Valves
Pressure relief valves are to be installed to protect all vessels and
pressurerated equipment from overpressurization. Pressure relief valves are to
be sized and installed in accordance with recognized standard approved by VR
(Refer to API RP 520 and ASME Code)
If block valves are installed in the relieving lines, means are to be provided to
ensure that pressure relief valves are not isolated from the protected
equipment.
The practice of locking open block valves to eliminate the need for higher
design pressures or additional relief protection is allowed if:
(a) closure of the valve would not result in the pressure rising more than
1.5 times the design pressure of the equipment or component under
consideration, or
(b) can be otherwise demonstrated that the proposed installation is safe and
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
283
would not, in any circumstance, either planned or unplanned,
inadvertent or intentional, result in a risk to personnel or facilities.
(2) Pressure Relief Valves for Gas Service
Pressure relief valves in hydrocarbon gas service are to discharge to one or
more closed relief headers for atmospheric discharge at either a flare or vent.
Such flare or vent discharges are to meet the requirements of 7.4.6.3.
Pressure relief headers are to be sized to handle the maximum anticipated
discharges that could occur at any time. Relief header sizing is to be sufficient
so that excessive backpressure does not develop, which may prevent any
pressure relief valve from relieving at its design rate.
Where necessary, separate high and low pressure relief headers are to be
employed to meet this requirement.
(3) Pressure Relief Valves for Liquid Service
Pressure relief valves in liquid hydrocarbon service are to discharge to a lower
pressure system such as a tank, pump suction, sump vessel, or closed drain
system. Discharges to drip pans or other open drains are to be limited to small
volume thermal releases.
(4) Vapor Depressurizing
An emergency vapor depressurizing system is to be provided for all
equipment processing light hydrocarbon with operating pressures of 17.5
kg/cm
2
(250 psig) and above. To gain rapid control of a situation in which the
source of a fire is the leakage of flammable fluids from the equipment to be
depressurized, the equipment is to be depressurized to 7 kg/cm
2
(100 psig).
In cases where the equipment is handling high pressure and large inventories
of hydrocarbon, and depressurizing to 100 psig is impractical, it is acceptable
to depressurize to 50% of the equipment design pressure if such
depressurization is achieved within 15 minutes. This is provided the
equipment has been designed with ample margin of safety to prevent the
vessel from failing due to overheating. Calculations, showing the maximum
allowable temperature of the equipment would not exceed the equipment rated
temperature, are to be submitted for verification.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
284
7.4.6.2 Pressure/Vacuum Venting System
All atmospheric and low pressure storage tanks and similar components, such as
flotation cells and atmospheric corrugated plate interception (CPI) separators, are to
be provided with pressure and vacuum relief protection where required.
Vent lines are to be routed to an atmospheric vent header, or to individual vents.
7.4.6.3 Flares and Vents
(1) Location
Flares and vents for hydrocarbon gas disposal are to be located with respect to
prevailing winds. This is to limit exposure of personnel, equipment and
helicopter traffic to vented gas, flare exhaust, or flame radiation
(2) Atmospheric Conditions
Reasonable worst-case atmospheric conditions are to be used for radiation and
gas dispersion calculations. Hence, flame radiation calculations are normally
to assume a strong wind (32.2 km per hour (20 miles per hour), or worst-case
scenario based on the project specification) distorting the flame pattern toward
the facilities. Dispersion calculations are normally to assume still air and low
vent velocity as a worst-case condition.
(3) Heat Radiation from Elevated Flares
The calculated radiant heat intensity from flaring (including solar radiation), at
any deck level or location where normal maintenance or operating activity
could take place, is not to exceed allowable limit. Allowable limit is given in
recognized standard approved by VR (Refer to API RP 521
recommendations).
The flare evaluation or analysis may be based on recognized industrial method
(Refer to API RP 521 )
(4) Atmospheric Discharge
For hydrocarbon vapor disposal by atmospheric dispersion from a vent stack,
the vent outlet is to be of sufficient height or distance from the facilities to
accomplish the following:
(a) The calculated radiant heat intensity (including solar radiation) in case
of accidental ignition is not to exceed 4.73 kW/m
2
at the maximum
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
285
venting rate, at any deck level or location where normal maintenance or
operating activity could take place.
(b) The following concentration of hazardous vapors, calculated per
recognized standards, is not to be exceeded at any deck level where
normal maintenance or operating activity could take place, based on the
reasonable worst-case conditions (e.g., still air and low vent velocity).
H
2
S: 10 ppm
Combustible Vapors: 20% LEL
(c) The vent outlet is to be at least 8 m (25 ft) above any immediately
adjacent process vessel or hydrocarbon processing equipment, and at
least 3 m above the top of any vessel or equipment within an 8 m
radius of the vent.
(d) When a short vent stack is used in lieu of a vent boom arrangement as ,
the vent outlet is to be provided with devices to prevent the passage of
flame into the system. The pressure drop of the flame arrestor is to be
considered in the vent diameter sizing calculations.
(5) Fire Extinguishing Systems for Atmospheric Vent
When a venting system is selected for disposal of hydrocarbon vapors, a vent
snuffing system is to be provided to extinguish vented gases, should they
ignite.
(6) Ground Flares
Ground flares may be used in place of the high stack flare. Ground flares are
to be provided with automatic controls which will divert the flow of flare gas
to a vent stack upon detection of flame failure, unless gas dispersion
calculations show that the vapor concentrations do not exceed specified
value. Draining connections are to be provided, to remove accumulated
condensate or water to the open drain system.
(7) Flashback Protection
Burn-back and flashback protection for flares is to be provided by sufficient
purge gas rate maintained from a reliable source, or by a seal drum to prevent
air intrusion. The purge gas source is to have sufficient gas supply for
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
286
continuous purging during production shutdown, or for a complete purging of
the flare system before re-ignition of the flare. The sizing of a seal drum is to
be in accordance with recognized standard
(8) Flare Ignition
The flare system is to be provided with means for purging sufficiently (below
5 percent of oxygen content) before ignition to prevent explosion inside the
flare system.
7.4.7 Spill Containment, Open and Closed Drain Systems
7.4.7.1 Spill Containment
Spill containment is to be provided in areas subject to hydrocarbon liquid or chemical
spills, such as areas around process vessels and storage tanks with drain or sample
connections, pumps, compressors, engines, glycol systems, oil metering units, and
chemical storage and dispensing areas.
Spill containment is to utilize curbing or drip edges at deck level, recessed drip pans,
containment by floor gutters, firewalls or protective walls, or equivalent means to
prevent spread of discharged liquids to other areas and spillover to lower levels. A
minimum of 150 mm (6 in.) coaming is to be provided.
A spill containment with less than 150 mm (6 in) coaming arrangement is subject to
special consideration. Calculations showing sufficient spillage containment for the
skid are to be submitted for verification
7.4.7.2 Open Drain Piping
Each containment area, as well as any other plated deck or skid area subject to
rainwater or other liquid accumulation, is to be equipped with drains connected to an
open drain system, and installed and located so as to prevent the accumulation of
standing liquid.
Open drain piping is to be self-draining with a slope of not less than 1:100. Lines are
to be sized for gravity drainage without backup or overflow, based on a full drainage
rate from any single source, with consideration given to the maximum rainfall
condition.
Cleanouts or flushing connections are to be provided for removal of sediment or
solids from open drains subject to potential blockage.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
287
Open drains are to be piped individually or collected in one or more piping systems,
which are to convey the fluids, by gravity or pumping, to oily water treatment or final
disposal location.
7.4.7.3 Sealing of Open Drains
(1) General
Piping drain traps, floor drains with integral drain seal, submerged open-ended
pipes, or other means of utilizing liquid head, are to be provided to prevent
vapor release from the sump or drain vessel to atmosphere
(2) Drain Seals
Where flammable liquids (diesel fuel, tube oil, glycol, crude oil, etc.) could be
present in an open drain system, a seal is to be provided at each open drain
location. This is to prevent flammable vapors evolving from the liquids in the
drain system from being released to atmosphere. Each such seal is to have a
minimum effective water seal height of 3.8 cm (1.5 in.).
(3) Pressure Seals
Where an open drain system is subject to an applied pressure, such as pad gas
on the sump or drain vessel which receives the open drainage, a liquid seal is
to be provided on each drain header or drain line connected to the source of
pressure.
Minimum effective liquid seal height is to be 150 mm (6 in), or 80 mm (3 in)
over the pad gas pressure, whichever is greater.
7.4.7.4 Segregation of Open Drain Systems
Drains from classified and unclassified areas are to be separate. When this
requirement cannot be met, drains from classified and unclassified areas or between
different zone areas are to be connected or led to a drain tank in a hazardous area.
The following requirements are applicable:
(1) Non-hazardous area drain header is to be equipped with a stop check valve at
the safe area bulkhead, together with a loop seal with a leg length of at least
762 mm (30 in) installed before the inlet to the drain tank. The loop seal is to
be so installed as to prevent freezing. Where drainage arrangement is such that
the drain header from the classified areas are physically located lower than the
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
288
unclassified areas, and there is no possibility of back flow into the safe areas,
the check valve may not be needed.
(2) Drain outlets within the tank are to discharge against the tank side.
(3) Vent outlets from the subject drain tank are to be led to the main deck, be
equipped with a flame screen, and treated as zone 1 and/or 2, as applicable.
When pumping systems are used to remove liquids from hazardous areas or from
drain tanks mentioned above, branch suctions from safe and hazardous areas are to
be arranged so that such areas cannot be pumped simultaneously.
7.4.7.5 Closed Drain Systems
(1) General
Drains or liquid relief from process vessels, piping or other sources that could
exceed atmospheric pressure are to be hard piped without an atmospheric
break to a drain vessel. The drain vessel is to be provided with pressure relief
valve(s), which are to be sized to handle the maximum flow of gas or liquid
that could occur under blocked outlet condition.
(2) Connection to Open Drain System
Drains or liquid relief from vessels containing non-toxic, non-flammable
liquids, may be connected to an unclassified open drain piping system if the
open drain system is sized to accommodate these additional drains.
7.4.7.6 Overboard Discharges from the Production Treatment Plan
The Overboard Discharges from the Production Treatment Plan is to conform to the
existing Vietnamese regulations and National/Regional Regulations, where FPSO is
operated.
7.4.8 Protection from Ignition by Static Charge
For specific requirements on protection from ignition due to static electric discharge,
refer to 7.5
7.4.9 Major Equipment Requirements
7.4.9.1 Process Vessels
(1) General
Pressure vessels are to be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
289
the recognized standard approved by VR (refer to ASME).
All process vessels are to be suitably supported and properly secured.
(2) Materials
Low melting point or brittle materials such as cast iron, aluminum, brass,
copper, or fiberglass, are not to be utilized in pressure retaining parts of
vessels containing flammable or toxic fluids..
(3) Thermal Considerations
Supports and insulation of vessels subject to change in temperature are to be
designed to accommodate the resulting thermal movement.
(4) Design Load
The design is also to ensure that stresses due to external nozzle loads and
moments, stresses due to acceleration forces arising out of the motion of the
floating installation, and stresses due to any other applicable external forces,
such as wind, are within the limits allowed by the rules.
7.4.9.2 Process Heat Exchangers
(1) General
Process heat exchangers with a design pressure in excess of 1.05 kg/cm
2
(15
psig) and handling flammable fluids are subject to the requirements of 7.4.9.1
and the following applicable requirements:
(2) Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers
Process heat exchangers of tubular design are to conform to recognized
standards (Refer to ASME)
(3) Plate and Frame Exchangers
Plate and frame exchangers may be employed for handling flammable liquid,
with the following restrictions:
(a) Safety or protective devices are to be provided .
(b) Each exchanger is to be provided with an exchanger enclosure,
protective wall, shield or similar barrier, capable of containing spray in
case of gasket leakage during operation.
(c) Each exchanger is to be provided with spill containment and drain
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
290
capable of handling a liquid release of at least 10% of the maximum
flammable stream flowrate.
(4) Air Cooled Heat Exchangers
Air-cooled heat exchangers are to comply with recognized standards (refer to
API Std. 661)
(5) Design Load
The design is to ensure that stresses due to external nozzle loads and
floating installation, and stresses due to any other applicable external forces
such as wind, are within the limits allowed by the Rules.
7.4.9.3 Process Electric Heater
(1) General
Process electric heater shells with a shell operating pressure greater than 1.05
kg/cm
2
(15psig) are to be designed and constructed in accordance with
recognized standards (refer to ASME Code).
(2) Over Temperature Protection
Process electric heaters in hydrocarbon service are to be provided with heater
element skin high temperature alarms.
(3) Overpressure Protection
Where the vessel, tank or piping segment containing an electric heater can be
isolated, a relief valve is to be provided for overpressure protection.
(4) Low Level, Low Flow or High Temperature Protection
Process electric heaters in liquid service are to be protected by low level, low
flow, or high liquid temperature sensor to shut off electrical input.
(5) Design Load
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
291
(1) General
All fire-tube type fired vessels, with a shell operating pressure greater than
1.05 kg/cm
2
(15psig), are to be designed in accordance with recognized
standard (refer to ASME Code). Fired vessel (heater) shells, (heater) coils or
other components designed in accordance with ASME Code, are to conform
to all applicable requirements of 7.4.9.1.
(2) Indirect Fired Vessels
Indirect fired water bath heaters with working pressures lower than 1.05
kg/cm
2
(15 psig) are to be designed and fabricated in accordance with
recognized standards (refer to API Spec. 12K).
(3) Direct Fired Vessels
Direct fired vertical or horizontal emulsion treaters are to be designed and
constructed in accordance with recognized standards (refer to API Spec. 12L).
(4) Ignition Control
Where burner ignition or light-off is part of an automatic sequence, the
following control functions are to be provided:
(a) Automatic timed purge interval prior to admitting pilot fuel. Purge may
be by fan if so equipped, or by time delay to allow natural draft purge.
(b) Firing limit on a trial for ignition (15 seconds maximum) on each
attempted pilot light-off.
(c) Confirmation of pilot lighting prior to admitting main burner fuel.
(5) Manual Light-off
Each burner designed for manual light-off of the pilot is to be designed to
allow an operator to light the pilot from a location which limits his exposure
to flame flashback, should it occur. Burners are to be equipped with a sight-
glass suitable for verifying pilot light-off and for viewing of main flame.
(6) Combustion
Combustion air intakes for fired vessels are to be located in, or ducted from, a
safe area.
(7) Fired Vessel (Heater) Arrangement
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
292
Any fired vessel (heater) installed within a firewall is to be arranged with
means of shutdown from outside the firewall enclosure.
(8) Design Load
7.4.9.5 Atmospheric Storage Tanks
Atmospheric and low pressure storage tanks for flammable liquids are to be designed
and fabricated in accordance with recognized standards
Any storage tank larger than 20 barrels (2,312 liters) and operating at or near
atmospheric pressure is to be equipped with one or more overflow connections, sized
sufficiently to remove all incoming fluid in excess of the design operating level.
7.4.9.6 Compressors
Natural gas compressors are to comply with recognized Standards (Refer to API Std.
617 for centrifugal compressors, API Std. 618 for reciprocating compressors, and
API 619 for rotary type positive displacement compressors). Compressors rated for
less than 7 kg/cm
2
(100 psig) and 28.3 m
3
/min (1000 scfm) can be accepted on the
basis of manufacturers certification data and test reports.
A fusible plug fire detection system and directly activating the emergency shutdown
system, is to be installed in the compressor package. The emergency shutdown
system is to be interlocked to shutdown the compressor.
7.4.9.7 Pumps
Centrifugal pumps intended for hydrocarbon service are to comply with recognized
standard (refer to API Std, 610). Centrifugal pumps having stuffing box pressures in
excess of 14 kg/cm
2
(200 psig) are to be provided with either single-balanced
mechanical seals with means to collect and contain seal leakage, or tandem-balanced
mechanical seals with alarm, to indicate primary seal failure.
7.4.9.8 Flowlines and Manifolds
Flowlines and manifolds transporting gas and liquid in two-phase flow are to be
designed and sized inaccordance with recognized standards (refer to API RP 14E) .
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
293
Flow lines are to be fitted with a remotely operated shutoff valve at the first flange
(as close as possible) on the loading manifold connecting the flexible lines that lead
to the installation. These remote operated valves are to close upon actuation of the
ESD System.
7.4.9.9 Scraper Launchers/Receivers
Closures and barrels for scraper launchers/receivers are to be designed and
constructed in accordance with recognized standards (refer to ASME Code) .
Block valves are to be provided for isolation of process elements subject to pressure,
to enable their safe removal when required. Means are to be provided to relieve
pressure and to confirm the scraper launchers/receivers are not pressurized before
opening the quick opening closure.
7.4.9.10 Wellheads and Subsea Equipment
Christmas tree assemblies and subsea equipment are not part of the classification
boundaries for a normal production facility. However, the equipment may be classed
if desired by the owner.
Wellheads and Subsea Equipment is to be designed and constructed in accordance
with recognized standards.
7.4.9.11 Flare and Vent Structures
Flare and vent booms and ground flare structures are to be designed and constructed
in accordance with recognized standards (refer to API RP 2A)
7.4.10 Process Piping Systems
7.4.10.1 General
Process piping design, selection of valves, fittings and flanges, are to be in
accordance with recognized standards (refer to API RP 14E)
7.4.10.2 Thermal Relief
Sections of piping systems that can be isolated with block valves, while they may be
filled with cold liquid or liquid at near ambient temperature, are to be provided with
thermal relief valves. This is to protect the piping from overpressure caused by solar
heating or exposure to fire.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
294
7.4.10.3 Isolation Valves
Block valves are to be provided for isolation of process elements subject to pressure
to enable their safe removal when required. Means are to be provided to relieve
pressure from the blocked piping segment before removal of the control element..
7.4.10.4 Flexible Hoses
Hose assemblies may be installed between two points where flexibility is required, if
they will not be subject to twisting under normal operating conditions. Hoses
carrying flammable fluids are to be fireresistant rated for maximum working pressure
and temperature, and reinforced with wire braid or other suitable material.
Burst pressure of the hose is not to be less than three (3) times the relief valve setting.
7.4.11 Packaged Process Units
7.4.11.1 General
Packaged process units are considered subsystems of the total production process
systems. Subsystems are to comply with 7.3 for process system requirements and
7.3.9 for major equipment requirements. The electrical installation and
instrumentation and control systems are to comply with 7.5 and 7.6 . Fire protection
systems are to comply with 7.7.
7.4.11.2 Skid Structures
The skid structure is to be sufficiently rigid to support the mounted equipment and
piping and, as required, to permit lifting during shipment without damage to the
equipment or piping. Structural design calculations for skid units with a center of
gravity height of more than 1.5 m (5 ft.), or a maximum operating weight in excess of
10 MT (metric tons) or 22.05 Kips, calculated in dry conditions, are to be submitted
for review.
7.4.11.3 Drip Pans
Drip pans are to be provided to contain liquid spills and leaks from skid mounted
equipment and piping, and to drain the liquid with adequate slope of 1 cm per meter
(l/8 inch per foot) into open drain systems. A minimum 150 mm (6 in) coaming
around the entire perimeter of a skid is to be provided. Skid beams that extend above
the drip pan may be considered as meeting the coaming requirement, provided that
the drip pan is seal-welded to the skid beams. A spill containment with less than 150
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
295
mm (6 in) coaming arrangement is subject to special consideration. Calculations
showing sufficient spillage containment for the skid are to be submitted for
verification.
7.5 Process Support Systems
7.5.1 General
This section presents criteria for the design and installation of process support
systems on floating installations.
Process support systems are utility and auxiliary systems that complement the
hydrocarbon production and process systems. Process support systems include, but
are not limited to, the following:
(1) Utility/Instrument Air System
(2) Fuel/Instrument Gas System
(3) Use of Produced Gas as Fuel
(4) Purging System
(5) Fuel Oil System
(6) Hydraulic System
(7) Lubricating Oil System
(8) Chemical Injection System
(9) Heating and Cooling System
7.5.2 Component Requirements
The component requirements listed below are intended for the components of process
support systems not covered in 7.4.
7.5.2.1 Pressure Vessels
Pressure vessels are to be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the
recognized standards (refer to ASME codes)
The design is also to ensure that stresses due to external nozzle loads and moments,
stresses due to acceleration forces arising out of the motion of the floating
installation, and stresses due to any other applicable external forces, such as wind,
are within the limits allowed by the Rules.
Consideration will be given to arrangements and details of pressure vessels that can
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
296
be shown to comply with other recognized national Codes or Standards.
7.5.2.2 Heat Exchangers
Heat exchangers are to be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the
recognized standards (refer to ASME codes)
The design is also to ensure that stresses due to external nozzle loads and moments,
stresses due to acceleration forces arising out of the motion of the floating
installation, and stresses due to any other applicable external forces, such as wind,
are within the limits allowed by the Rules.
Consideration will be given to arrangements and details of heat exchangers, that can
be shown to comply with other recognized national Codes or Standards.
7.5.2.3 Pumps
All pumps for process support service are to comply with a recognized industrial
standard such as ANSI, UL, ASME, etc., and may be accepted on the basis of
manufacturers affidavit of compliance with a recognized industrial standard.
7.5.2.4 Compressors
Compressors, such as those used with air or refrigeration systems, are to be designed
to a recognized industrial standard, and may be accepted on the basis of
manufacturers affidavit of compliance with a recognized industrial standard.
7.5.2.5 Prime Movers (Internal Combustion Engines and Turbines)
(1) General
Engines and turbines are to be designed and constructed in accordance with a
recognized industry standard or code of practice.
(2) Installation
The installation of internal combustion engines and gas turbines is to be
approved by VR, and is to comply with a recognized standard
(3) Engines in Classified Areas
Combustion engines are not to be installed in Class 1 areas, unless they are
installed in an enclosure of fire resistive construction with adequate
ventilation from a nonclassified area.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
297
(4) Exhaust Manifolds
Exhaust manifolds and piping are to be shielded for ignition prevention and
personnel protection. Explosion relief valves or other appropriate protection
against explosion are to be provided in the exhaust and scavenge manifolds.
The explosion relief valves are to be of the return-seating type. The
arrangement and location of the valves is to minimize the dangers from
emission of flame. Exhaust piping from internal combustion engines and
turbines is to be equipped with spark arresters, and discharge into non-
hazardous areas.
(5) Air Intakes
Air intakes to internal combustion engines and gas turbines are to be not less
than 3 m (10 ft) from hazardous areas. An explosion relief valve or other
appropriate protection against explosion is to be provided in the air inlet
manifold.
(6) Starting Air
Means are to be provided to exclude gas from starting air if the engine is air-
started. Starting air branch pipes to each cylinder are also to be provided with
flame arresters..
(7) Regulators
When the gas pressure on the upstream side of a regulator exceeds 350 mm
(14 in) of H
2
O, a relief valve is to be installed on the downstream side. This
relief valve is to discharge to a safe location in the atmosphere through a
flame arrester. The capacity of the relief valve is to be adequate in venting the
volume of gas that would pass through the regulator if that device should fail.
7.5.2.6 Cranes
Cranes and hoists are to comply with the TCVN 6968:2001.
7.5.3 System Requirements
7.5.3.1 Utility/Instrument Air System
(1) Arrangement
Utility and instrument air may be supplied by a single air compressor or by a
separate compressor for each service. When using a single compressor for
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
298
both services, controls are to be provided to give priority to instrument air
requirements.
(2) Air Quality
Instrument air is to be oil-free and dried to prevent liquids and dirt from
entering pneumatic instruments..
(3) Piping
Air compressor suctions are to be at least 3 m (10 ft) from hazardous areas.
Air outlets from compressors are to be fitted with non-return valves and
discharged into air receivers/scrubbers for oil and water removal. Instrument
piping is to be installed to minimize low points, and provisions are to be
included in the piping to allow removal of condensation. Crossovers where air
and combustible fluids could be intermixed are not permitted anywhere in the
system.
7.5.3.2 Fuel/Instrument Gas System
Gas used for fuel or instrument systems is to be passed through a gas scrubber to
remove entrainedliquid. The instrument gas may also have to be dried to meet
requirements of the specific equipment that will use the gas. Gas containing
hydrogen sulfide is not to be used as instrument gas.
7.5.3.3 Segregation of Piping Systems
Piping systems carrying non-hazardous fluids are to be segregated from piping
systems that may contain hazardous fluids. Cross connection of the piping systems
may be made where means are provided for avoiding possible contamination of the
non-hazardous fluid system by the hazardous medium.
7.5.3.4 Use of Produced Gas as Fuel
Enclosed spaces located on the production deck having boilers, inert gas generators,
and combustion engines using produced gas as fuel, are to have ventilation systems
providing at least 30 air changes per hour. These spaces are to be fitted with gas
detection systems to alarm at 20% L.E.L., and to activate automatic shutdown of the
gas supply at 60% L.E.L. The automatic shutdown valve is to be located outside the
space.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
299
This valve is also to be activated upon loss of the required ventilation in the enclosed
space, and upon detection of abnormal pressure in the gas supply line.
For produced gas containing hydrogen sulfide, provisions are to be made for gas
sweetening, unless the equipment manufacturer has certified the equipments
suitability for sour gas application, and the equipment is located in a freely
ventilated, open space.
To bring fuel gas containing H
2
S to equipment located in an enclosed machinery
space, the sour gas must be sweetened. Additionally, the machinery space is to be
equipped with H
2
S gas detectors. The detectors are to be set to alarm at 10 ppm, and
to activate the shutdown valve at 50 ppm.
7.5.3.5 Purging System for Process Equipment
(1) Purging
Process equipment and systems are to be purged prior to initial startup. They
are also to be purged when being put back into service after shutdown, if there
is a possibility of oxygen entering the system during shutdown.
(2) Oxygen Content and Monitor
The oxygen content of the inert gas used is not to exceed five percent (5%) by
volume. Oxygen monitoring equipment is to be provided to monitor oxygen
levels in the inert gas supply.
(3) Isolating Valves
Shutoff valves are to be fitted at the inlet and outlet of the final pressure
regulator in a stored purging gas system.
7.5.3.6 Fuel Oil System
This section is applicable to all fuel oil systems located on the production deck that
supply fuel to the process equipment. For fuel oil systems serving marine support
functions such as the fuel oil system for the vessel/unit service generator or for the
helicopter deck refueling facility, see TCVN 6259:2003 and TCVN 5315:2001 for
applicable requirements.
(1) Pumping Arrangements
Fuel oil pumping arrangements are to be completely separate from other
pumping systems, and are not to be connected to other piping systems.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
300
(2) Pump Controls
Fuel oil transfer pumps, fuel oil unit pumps, and other similar fuel pumps are
to be fitted with local and remote controls so they may be stopped in case of
an emergency. Remote controls are to be located in a space not affected by
fire at the pump locations
(3) Containment
A containment at least 150 mm (6 in) high is to be provided at unloading
and/or offloading stations, pump areas, and overflow/vent line locations, and
arranged to direct a possible leak or spill to the open drain system.
(4) Valves on Oil Tanks
Where pipelines emanate from oil tanks at such a level that they will be
subjected to a static head of oil from the tank, they are to be fitted with a
positive closing valve located at the tank. Gray cast iron valves are not to be
used as shutoff valves for fuel oil tanks.
Arrangements are to be provided for closing the tanks valve locally and from
a space not affected by fire at the fuel oil tank location. This requirement may
be omitted if the tank capacity is less than 132 US gallons (500 liters).
(5) Non-metallic Expansion Joints and Hoses
Non-metallic expansion joints and hoses for use in fuel oil systems are only
allowed at machinery connections, provided they are in an easily accessible
position, and pass the fire test in accordance with recognized standards.
7.5.3.7 Hydraulic System
This section is applicable to all hydraulic oil systems located on the production deck
that supply hydraulic fluid to control systems of process related equipment.
High flash point hydraulic fluids are to be used, unless a specific system design
requires the use of low flash point fluids. When low flash point fluids are used,
precautions are to be taken to minimize fire hazard, by insulating nearby hot surfaces
that could ignite a low flash point fluid.
7.5.3.8 Lubricating Oil System
(1) Interconnection
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
301
The lubricating oil piping is to be entirely separated from other piping
systems.
(2) Valves on Lubricating Oil Storage Tanks
Normally opened valves on lubricating oil storage tanks are to comply with
the requirements given in 7.5.3.6.
(3) Turbines
(a) Automatic Shut-off
Turbines are to be provided with a means of automatically shutting off
the steam or gas turbine fuel supply upon failure of the lubricating oil
system.
(b) Indicators
Indicators are to be fitted to allow monitoring of the pressure and
temperature of the water inlet and oil outlet of the oil coolers. Pressure
systems are to be fitted with low-pressure alarm. Sump and gravity
tanks are to be provided with suitable gauges for determining the level
of oil within the tank.
(c) Strainers and Filters
For auxiliary turbines, a magnetic strainer and fine mesh filter (strainer)
are to be provided in the lubricating oil piping to the turbine. Strainers
are to be so arranged as to prevent, in the event of leakage, spraying oil
onto heated surfaces.
(4) Internal Combustion Engines
(a) Lubricating Oil Pumps: The lubricating oil pump is to be of sufficient
capacity for the maximum output of the engine.
(b) Filters Lubrication oil filter is to be provided and so arranged as to
prevent, in case of leakage, spraying oil onto heated surfaces.
(c) Low Oil Pressure Alarm An alarm device with audible and visual
signals for failure of the lubricating oil system is to be fitted.
7.5.3.9 Chemical Injection System
(1) Materials
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
302
The chemical storage tank, pumps, and piping are to be suitable for the
chemicals being handled. Affidavit from tank manufacturers confirming the
tank material is compatible with the chemical being stored is to be provided.
Fiberglass reinforced polyester independent tanks may be considered for non-
flammable chemicals only. For metallic tanks containing flammable or
combustible fluids, scantling plans and calculations are to be submitted for
review.
Design and construction of non-metallic tanks for non-flammable liquids are
to be in accordance with industry-recognized standards
(2) Arrangement and Components
For multi-chemical systems, a separate tank or tank compartment is to be
provided for each chemical used. Chemical storage tanks are to be provided
with atmospheric vents and level glasses. Flame arrester is to be provided to
flammable or combustible tank vent. The discharge of each pump is to be
provided with a pressure relief device to return the chemical to the pump
suction or chemical tank. Injection lines are to be fitted with non-return
valves, and means are to be provided to automatically shutdown the injection
pump in the event of process shutdowns.
7.5.3.10 Heating and Cooling Systems
The medium used for heating or cooling any hydrocarbon system is to be contained
solely within the classified area, unless the return line of the heating or cooling
system to a non-classified area is provided with means to detect any hydrocarbon
contamination.
7.6 Electrical Systems
7.6.1 Applicability
Electrical systems used solely for hydrocarbon processing on floating installations
are to meet the requirements of this Part. Where electrical systems or equipment are
used to supply services other than Oil or Gas Production, the equipment is also to
comply with the TCVN 6259-4:2003 Rules for classification and construction of sea
going ships Electrical systems .
7.6.2 Design Considerations
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
303
7.6.2.1 Equipment and Enclosures.
Electrical equipment and enclosures subject to the offshore environment are to be
provided with a degree of protection suitable to the environment or hazard in which
they are located, in accordance with recognized standard (refer to API RP 14F)
7.6.2.2 Selection of Materials.
Materials of construction are to be selected that are suitable for their intended
purpose and location.
7.6.2.3 Equipment Grounding (Earthing) Arrangements
(1) Permanent Electrical Equipment.
All electrical equipment with metallic enclosures, whose arrangement and
method of installation does not assure positive grounding to the metal hull or
equivalent conducting body, is to be permanently grounded through a separate
conductor. In addition, it is to be protected against damage. Where separate
grounding conductors are required, they are to be in accordance with
recognized standard (refer to API RP 14F). Systems designed to other
recognized standards are to comply with such standards, but in no case are the
separate grounding conductors to be of a cross-sectional area of less than
indicated in Table 9.7-1.
(2) Lightning Protection.
Equipment and structure are to be protected against lightning damage in
accordance with recognized standard (refer to NFPA 780) .

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
304
Table 9.7-1 Size of Ground (Earth)-continuity Conductors and Grounding (Earthing)
Connections
Type of Grounding
Connection
Cross-sectional Area of
Associated Current
Carrying Conductor (A)
Minimum cross-sectional Area of
Copper Grounding Connection
Ground-continuity
conductor in flexible
cable or flexible cord
A1
A 16 mm
2

A
A2
16 mm
2
< A 32 mm
2

16 mm
2

A3 A> 32 mm
2
A/2
Ground-continuity
conductor
incorporated in fixed
cable
For cables having an insulated ground-continuity conductor
B1a
A 1,5 mm
2

1,5 mm
2

B1b
1,5 mm
2
< A 16 mm
2

A
B1c
16 mm
2
< A 32 mm
2

16 mm
2

B1d A> 32 mm
2
A/2
For cables with bare ground wire in direct contact with the lead
sheath
B2
A 2,5 mm
2

1 mm
2

B2b
2,5 mm
2
< A 6 mm
2

1,5 mm
2

Separate fixed
grounding conductor
C1a
A 2,5 mm
2

Stranded grounding connection:
1,5 mm
2
< A 1,5 mm
2

A with A> 1,5 mm
2

C1b Unstranded grounding connection
2,5 mm
2

C2
2,5 mm
2
< A 8 mm
2

4 mm
2

C3
8 mm
2
< A 120 mm
2

A/2
C4 A> 120 mm
2
70 mm
2

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
305
7.6.2.4 System Grounding (Earthing)
Where electrical systems are used solely for process facilities, system grounding is to
comply with 6.10.2 of API RP 14F
(1) Vessels with Integral Hull Tanks.
If the facility has integral hull tanks containing liquids with a flash point not
exceeding 60C (140F), a grounded distribution system is not to be used,
except for the following:
(a) Grounded intrinsically safe circuits
(b) Power supplied control circuits and instrumentation circuits where
technical or safety reasons preclude the use of a system without a
grounding connection, provided the current in the hull is limited to 5
Amperes or less in both normal and fault conditions.
(c) Limited and locally grounded systems, provided any possible resulting
current does not flow directly through any hazardous areas.
(d) Alternating current power networks of 1 kV root mean square (r.m.s.)
(line to line) and over, provided any possible resulting current does not
flow directly through any hazardous areas.
(2) Ground (Earth) Return Paths Through the Hull
The metal structure of an offshore installation is not to be used as a normal
current return for the electrical distribution system, except for the following
systems:
(a) Impressed current cathodic protection
(b) Limited and locally grounded systems for battery systems for engine
starting having a one-wire system and the ground lead connected to the
engine
(c) Grounded intrinsically safe circuits
7.6.2.5 Distribution and Circuit Protection
Electrical installations are to comply with requirements as noted herein.
(1) General
All ungrounded conductors and the devices and circuits which they serve are
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
306
to be protected against over-current. Protective devices are to be provided to
guard against overload and short circuit currents, and to open the circuit if the
current reaches a value that will cause excessive or dangerous temperatures in
the conductor or conductor insulation.
(2) Motor Controllers
Motor starting and control installations, including overload protection and
short circuit protection, are to be in accordance with recognized standards
(refer to API RP 14F)
7.6.3 Rotating Electrical Machinery
(1) General
Motors and generators are to be manufactured to recognized standards such as
NEMA Standard MG-1 or IEC 60034 for performance, manufacture,
protection, and construction. .
(2) Temperature Rating
Equipment is to be selected for the rated ambient temperature. If equipment is
intended to be used in a space where the equipments rated ambient
temperature is below the assumed ambient temperature of the space, it is to be
used at a derated load.
(3) Moisture Condensation Protection
All generators and motors 50 hp (37,3 kW) or more are to be equipped with
space heaters, to prevent accumulation of moisture and condensation when
they are idle for appreciable periods. The space heaters are to be capable of
being electrically isolated.
(4) Temperature Detection
Generators larger than 500 KVA are to be provided with at least one
embedded temperature detector per phase, at the hot end of the stationary
winding, with temperature indication at a manned location.
7.6.4 Transformers
(1) General
Each power transformer is to be provided with a corrosion resistant nameplate
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
307
indicating the name of the manufacturer and all pertinent electrical
characteristics. They are to be constructed and tested in accordance with
recognized standard (refer to ANSI C57). Transformers are to be protected in
accordance with recognized standard (refer to API RP 14F Section 8).
(2) Transformer Supplying Services Other than Oil or Gas Production
In addition to the above, transformers supplying services other than oil or gas
production are to be selected, installed, and protected in accordance with their
environmental conditions and applicable requirements in TCVN 6259:2003
Rules for classification and construction of sea going ships Electrical
arrangements .
7.6.5 Switchgear
(1) Application
Main and emergency switchboards, power and lighting distribution boards,
motor control centers and motor controllers, and battery charging panels, are
to be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with the provisions of
this subsection
(2) Construction, Assembly and Components
(a) Enclosures.
Enclosures and assemblies are to be constructed of steel or other suitable
incombustible, moisture-resistant materials, and reinforced as necessary to
withstand the mechanical, electromagnetic and thermal stresses which may be
encountered under both normal and short circuit fault conditions. Enclosures
are to be of the closed type. The degree of the protection is to be appropriate
for the intended location. See also 7.6.1.1. All wearing parts are to be
accessible for inspection and be readily renewable.
(b) Bus Bars
1) General: Bus bars are to be sized and arranged so that the temperature
rise under the most severe loading conditions will not affect the normal
operation of electrical devices mounted in the switchboard.
2) Bracing of Bus Bars: Bus bars and circuit breakers are to be mounted,
braced, and located to withstand thermal effects and magnetic forces
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
308
resulting from the maximum prospective short circuit current.
3) Bolted Connections: Bolted bus bar connections are to be suitably
treated (e.g, silver plating) to avoid deterioration of electrical
conductivity over time. Nuts are to be fitted with means to prevent
loosening..
4) Cable connections: Soldered connections are not to be used for
connecting or terminating any cable of 2.5 mm
2
or greater. These
connections are to be made with of soldered lugs or equivalent.
5) Clearance and creepage: Minimum clearances and creepage distances
between live parts of different potential, i.e., between phases and
between phase and ground, are to be in accordance with Table 9.7-2, as
appropriate .
Table 9.7-2 Clearance and Creepage Distance for Switchboards, Distribution Boards,
Chargers, Motor Control Centers and Controllers.
Rate Insulation Voltage
(V)
Minimum Clearances,
mm (in.)
Minimum Creepage Distances,
mm (in.)
Up to 250 15(19/32) 20(25/32)
From 251 to 660 20(25/32) 30(1 13/16)
Above 660 25(1) 35(1 3/8)
NOTES:
The values in this table apply to clearances and creepage distances between live parts as
well as between live parts and exposed conductive parts, including grounding.
(c) Circuit Breakers:
1) Compliance with a Standard: Circuit breakers are to be
designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with recognized
standard (refer to ANSI C37, NEMA AB-1, IEC 947-2). The
certificates of tests are to be submitted upon request by VR.
2) Short Circuit Capacity: Circuit breakers are to have sufficient
breaking and making capacities as specified in the short circuit
calculation. See 7.6.13
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
309
3) Isolation: Circuit breakers are to be mounted or arranged in such
a manner that the breakers may be removed from the front of the
switchboard, without first de-energizing the bus bars to which
the breakers are connected. Draw-out or plug-in type circuit
breakers that are arranged in such a manner that the breaker may
be removed from the front without disconnecting the copper bus
or cable connections, are acceptable for this purpose.
Alternatively, an isolation switch may be fitted upstream (line or
supply side) of the breaker.
(d) Fuses:
Fuses are to be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with
recognized standard (refer to UL 248 or IEC 269) . The certificates of
tests are to be submitted upon request from the Bureau. The
requirements of 2) and 3) above are applicable. Where disconnecting
means are fitted, they are to be on the supply side. If the switch is not
rated to interrupt the circuit under load, it is to be provided with
interlock to prevent opening until the load is de-energized
(e) Internal Wiring.
1) Wires: Internal instrumentation and control wiring is to be of the
stranded type and is to have flame-retarding insulation. They are
to be in compliance with a recognized standard.
2) Protection: In general, internal instrumentation and control
wiring is to be protected (by fuse or circuit breaker) against
short circuit and overload, with the following exceptions:
generator voltage regulator circuits
generator circuit breaker tripping control circuits, and
secondary circuit of current transformer
These circuits, however, except that of the current transformer,
may be fitted with short circuit protection only.
3) Terminals: Terminals or terminal rows for systems of different
voltages are to be clearly separated from each other, and the
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
310
rated voltage is to be clearly marked. Each terminal is to have a
nameplate indicating the circuit designation.
(f) Circuit Identification:
Identification plates for feeders and branch circuits are to be provided,
and are to indicate the circuit designation and the rating or settings of
the fuse or circuit breaker of the circuit.
(3) Switchboards
In addition to the preceding requirements, main and emergency switchboards are
to comply with a) and b) below.
(a) Bus Bars:
Bus bars for switchboards supplied by generators are to comply with
recognized standards (refer to Section 5.5.2.1 of API 14F)
(b) Power Generation Switchboards.
At minimum, the following equipment and instrumentation are to be provided
for switchboards associated with power generation:
1) Voltage Regulators
2) Synchronizing Controls
3) Synchronizing Relay
4) Ground Fault Detection
5) Prime Mover Speed Control
6) Ammeter with selector switch arranged to measure each phase
7) Voltmeter with a selector switch
8) Frequency Meter
9) Watt Meter / Power Factor Meter.
10) Space Heater Pilot Lamp where required
11) Stator Winding Temperature Indicator (500 kVA and larger
Generators)
(4) Motor Controllers
In addition to the applicable requirements in 7.6.5 (2) above, motor controllers
are to comply with the following:
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
311

(a) Overload and Under-voltage Protection.
Overload protection and low-voltage protection, if provided in the motor
controllers, are to be in accordance with recognized standard (refer to 7.4.4 of
API RP 14F, or other appropriate standard)
(b) Disconnecting Means
A circuit-disconnecting device is to be provided for each motor branch circuit
so that the motor and the controller may be isolated from the power supply for
maintenance purposes. The circuit-disconnecting device is to be operable
externally.
(5) Battery Charging Panels
In addition to the applicable requirements in 7.6.5 (2) above, battery chargers are
to comply with the following:
(a) Battery Charger:
Except when a different charging rate is necessary and is specified for a
particular application, the charging facilities are to be such that the completely
discharged battery can be recharged to 80 % capacity in not more than 10
hours.
(b) Reversal of Charging Current.
An acceptable means is to be installed, such as reverse current protection, to
prevent the battery charger component failure from discharging the battery.
(c) Instrumentation :
1) disconnect switch for power supply to the charge
2) indicator light connected to the downstream side of the disconnect
switch in (a)
3) means for adjusting the voltage for charging
4) voltmeter to indicate the charging voltage, and
5) ammeter to indicate the charging current.
(6) Switchgear Supplying Services Other than Oil and Gas Production
Main and emergency switchboards, power and lighting distribution boards,
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
312
motor control centers and motor controllers, and battery charging panels that
are used to supply services other than Oil and Gas Production, are to comply
with applicable requirements in TCVN 6259:2003 Rules for classification
and construction of sea going ships Electrical arrangements in addition to
the above mentioned sections.
7.6.6 Wire and Cable Construction
7.6.6.1 General
All wires and cables are to be constructed in accordance with recognized standards
such as IEEE, ICEA, IEC, or other recognized standards. All cable and conduit
fittings and wiring devices are to be constructed in accordance with an appropriate
recognized standard
7.6.6.2 Conductor Type
Conductors are to be of copper, and stranded in all sizes. Conductor sizes are to be in
accordance with recognized standard (refer to API RP 14F). But in no case are they
to be less than the following in cross sectional size:
(1) 1.5 mm
2
(2,960 circ. mils) for motor feeder and branch circuit cables
(2) 1.0 mm
2
(1,973 circ. mils) for power lighting and control cables
(3) 0.5 mm
2
(786.5 circ. mils) for essential or emergency signaling and
communications cables, except for those assembled by the equipment
manufacturer, and
(4) 0.375 mm
2
(739.3 circ. mils) for telephone cables for non-essential
communications services, except for those assembled by the equipment
manufacturer.
7.6.6.3 Insulation.
Conductor insulation is to be rated suitable for a minimum operating temperature of
75C (167F) in wet environments. In addition, insulation rating is to be at least 10C
(50F) higher than the maximum ambient temperature that the conductor can
encounter at its service location.
7.6.6.4 Cable Flame Retardancy
(1) Standards
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
313
All electric cables are to be at least of a flame-retardant type complying with the
following:
(a) Cables constructed in accordance with recognized Standards such as
IEEE, ICEA, IEC, are to comply with the flammability criteria of IEEE
Std. 45 or IEC 60332.3 Category A where installed in trays, bunches,
or similar groupings
(b) Cables constructed to IEEE Std. 45 are to comply with the
flammability criteria of that standard .
(c) Cables constructed to IEC Publication 60092 standards are to comply
with the flammability criteria of IEC Publication 60332-3, Category A.
Consideration will be given to special types of cables, such as radio frequency cables,
which do not comply with the above requirements.
7.6.6.5 Fire Resistant Property
When electric cables are required to be fire-resistant, they are to comply with the
requirements of recognized standard (refer to IEC Publication 60331)
7.6.7 Hazardous Areas
7.6.7.1 General
Areas and spaces in which flammable vapors or gases are handled, processed, or
stored, are to be classified in accordance with the following sections.
7.6.7.2 Electrical Installations in Hazardous Areas
Electrical installations in classified areas are to be limited to those systems needed to
carry out necessary control, monitoring and power distribution functions, and are to
be in accordance with recognized standards (refer to Section 4 of API RP 14F)
7.6.7.3 Area Classifications and Electrical Installations on Vessel Conversions
(1) General
Electrical installations and delineation of classified areas for offshore
installations having storage tanks for liquids with a flash point not exceeding
60
o
C (140
o
F), and that are integral with the hull structure, need not comply with
TCVN 6259-2:2003, provided they comply with applicable requirements as
follows:
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
314

(2) Area Classification
Delineation of classified areas is to be as follows:
(a) Open Decks: Over Crude Storage Tanks Freely ventilated, open and
gas tight deck spaces to the full breadth of the ship and 3 m (10 ft) fore
and aft of cargo block to a height of 2.4m (8ft.), or to the height of the
production deck, are to be considered Zone 2 .
(b) Enclosed Spaces: Adjacent to Crude Storage Tanks Semi-enclosed or
enclosed spaces immediately adjacent to crude oil storage tanks are to
be considered Zone 1
(c) Pump Room: A continuously ventilated (20 air changes per hour) crude
oil pump room is to be considered a Zone 1 area, provided the failure
of ventilation is alarmed in a manned location.
(d) Cofferdam: Spaces which are separated by a single bulkhead from
crude oil storage tanks are to be considered Zone 1 areas
(e) Crude Storage Tank Vents: Areas of unrestricted ventilation around
cargo tank vents are to be considered Zone 1 areas with a spherical
radius of 3 m (10 ft), and Zone 2 for an additional 7 m (23 ft) .
(3) Electrical Interconnections
Where marine service systems are interconnected with hydrocarbon production
systems, a point in the system 2.4 m (8 ft) above the oil storage tank deck, is to
be designated as an electrical system design code demarcation point. Above this
point, electrical system design is to be in accordance with this section; below this
point, in accordance with applicable sections of the TCVN 6259-4:2003
7.6.7.4 Wiring Methods in Hazardous Areas
(1) General
Threaded metal conduit, armored cable, metallic sheathed cable, or other
approved methods or cable types, may be installed in Zone 1 areas. Cables with
moisture resistant jacket (impervious sheathed) may be installed in Zone 2 areas,
provided they are protected from mechanical damage
(2) Splicing
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
315
No splices are allowed in classified locations, except in intrinsically safe circuits.
(3) Conduit Installations
Conduit wiring systems in classified areas are to be in accordance with the
recognized standards (refer to API RP 14F Section 6.4).
7.6.8 Ventilation
7.6.8.1 General
Attention is to be given to ventilation inlet and outlet locations and air flow
directions in order to minimize the possibility of cross contamination. Ventilation
inlets are to be located in non-classified areas. Ventilation for classified spaces is to
be completely separate from that for non-classified spaces. For engine and turbine air
intakes, see 7.5.2(5).
7.6.8.2 Ventilation of Enclosed Classified Spaces
Ventilation of enclosed classified spaces is to be made with under-pressure in
relation to adjacent, less hazardous areas. The arrangement of ventilation inlet and
outlet openings for the enclosed classified space is to be such that the entire space is
efficiently ventilated, giving special considerations to locations of equipment which
may release gas, and to spaces where gas may accumulate. Ventilation inlets are to
be from non-classified areas. Ventilation outlets are to be led to outdoor locations
that are of the same or a less hazardous classification than the ventilated space.
Ventilating fans are to be of non-sparking construction. The capacity of the fan is to
be such that the space is adequately ventilated, as defined by recognized standard
(refer to API RP 500).
7.6.8.3 Ventilation of Non-classified Spaces
Ventilation inlets and outlets for non-classified spaces are to be located in non-
classified areas. Where passing through classified spaces, ducts are to have
overpressure in relation to the classified spaces. Enclosed non-hazardous working
spaces opening into hazardous locations do not need to be considered hazardous,
provided the arrangements required by 6.3.1 of the 1989 IMO MODU Code , are
complied with.
7.6.8.4 Emergency Shutdown
Means are to be provided for shutdown of ventilation fans and closing external
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
316
openings from outside the spaces served, in the event of fire or detection of
combustible or hydrogen or sulfide gas.
7.6.9 Cable Support and Installation
The cable installation is to be in accordance with the standard details submitted in
accordance with 7.2.6.
7.6.9.1 Mechanical Protection
For cables which are not equipped with metal armor or metal sheathing, installation
in rigid conduit or similar structural protection is to be utilized if such cable is
employed near walkways, at deck level, near hoist or crane laydown or work areas,
or where equipment maintenance work must be accomplished in a constrained area.
7.6.9.2 Splicing
(1) General
In general, electrical cables are to be installed in continuous lengths between
terminations. However, approved splices will be permitted for cables of
exceptional length, to facilitate their installation. The location and particulars of
the splices are to be submitted for review.
(2) Construction
Cable splice is to be made of fire-resistant replacement insulation equivalent in
electrical and thermal properties to the original insulation. The replacement
jacket is to be at least equivalent to the original impervious sheath, and is to
assure a watertight splice. Splices are to be made with an approved splice
procedure addressing the following components:
Connector of correct size and number
Replacement insulation
Replacement jacket
Instructions for use
(3) Hazardous Areas
See 7.3.6
7.6.10 Power Source Requirements
This section details minimum electrical power generation sources for main and
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
317
emergency modes of operation. It should be noted that the governmental regulations
might require reserve main power or an emergency power source in excess of these
requirements. Where the main power source is used to supply services other than oil
or gas production, the main power source is to comply with TCVN 6259-4:2003 .
7.6.10.1 Unmanned Facilities
(1) Main Power
The main power source(s) is to be sufficient to maintain the maximum intended
operational loads of the facility, without need to use the emergency source of
power.
(2) Emergency Power
An emergency power source, independent of the facilitys main power, is to be
sufficient to supply services for navigational aids as required by the cognizant
Coastal Authority, but not for less than four (4) days.
7.6.10.2 Manned Facilities
(1) Main Power
The main power source(s) is to be sufficient to maintain the maximum intended
operational load of the facility.
(2) Emergency Power
An emergency source of power for systems vital to safety, fire fighting, and
protection of personnel, is to be provided to supply the services as listed herein.
Where an emergency power supply has been provided for classification/flag state
purposes, this source may also be used to provide emergency loads in production
areas, provided the emergency source of power is adequately sized to supply all
of the connected loads. Provision for emergency power supply, less than those
listed herein, will be considered, provided adequate technical justification is
submitted. Loads to be supplied by the emergency source of power are listed in
(3) and (4) below.
(3) Fire Pump:
If both fire pumps required by 7.7.2 are electric motor driven, one of these pumps
is to be powered by the emergency source of power. The emergency source of
power is to have sufficient fuel for at least 18 hours of fire pump operation.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
318

(4) Other Loads:
The following loads are to be powered by the designated emergency source of
power:
Fire detection 18 hours
Gas detection 18 hours
Communication 18 hours
ESD system (if electric) 18 hours
Paging and alarm system 18 hours
Emergency lighting from all spaces to all alternative egress points 18 hours
Electric blowout preventer control system 18 hours
Navigational aids As required by the applicable Coastal Authority, but not
less than 4 days
7.6.11 Emergency Source of Power
An emergency source of power as required by 7.5.10 may be supplied by an
emergency generator or batteries, in accordance with recognized standard (refer to
section 5.6 of API 14F). Installations supplying services other than oil or gas
production are to be in accordance with TCVN 6259-4:2003 .
7.6.12 Battery Systems
Battery installations are to comply with recognized standard (refer to Section 10.3.4
of API RP 14F), except that equipment inside a battery room need to be certified for
use in zone 1 or zone 2 only if the battery room is classified Zone 1 or 2,
respectively, in accordance with API RP 500. Ventilation of battery rooms is to be
separate from all other ventilation. Arrangements of equivalent safety will be given
special consideration
7.6.13 Short Circuit Current Calculations and Coordination Study
7.6.13.1 General
The protection and coordination of power systems are to be in accordance with the
TCVN 6259-4:2003 , IEC, IEEE 242, or equivalent standard

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
319
7.6.13.2 Short Circuit Capacity
The maximum calculated short circuit current available at the main bus bars and at
each point in the distribution system, is to be used to determine the adequacy of the
short circuit capacities of the protective devices and bus bar bracing, as per 7.5.5
(2)(b).
7.6.13.3 Coordination
The power system coordination study is to show that the protective devices and their
settings are properly selected to minimize damage to switchgear, transformers,
generators, motors, conductors, conductor shielding and other equipment, as well as
undesirable shutdowns.
7.6.14 Protection from Ignition by Static Charges
Any ignition hazard due to a difference in electrical potential to ground is to be
effectively controlled. This may require the use of conductive belts, grounding of
combustible fluid loading or discharge equipment and hose, and the grounding of
helicopters prior to refueling.
All precautions against ignition due to static electric discharge are to be in
accordance with recognized standard (refer to NFPA-77)
7.7 Instrumentation & Control Systems
7.7.1 Applicability
This section defines criteria for the instrumentation and control systems for offshore
facilities. The design of these systems is to comply with API RPI4C or other
acceptable standards and the additional criteria contained in this section. Statutory
governmental regulation or guidance, which may be applicable, is to be taken into
consideration. The documentation pertaining to instrumentation and control systems
required for submittal is listed in 7.2.7.
(1) General
The control and instrumentation systems are to provide an effective means for
monitoring and controlling pressures, temperatures, flow rates, liquid levels and
other process variables for the safe and continuous operation of the facilities.
Where control over the electrical power generation and distribution is required
for the operation of the facilities then the control system should also be arranged
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
320
to cover this. Control and instrumentation systems for process, process support,
utility and electrical systems are to be suitable for the intended application All
control and safety shutdown, systems are to be designed for safe operation of the
equipment during start-up, shutdown and normal operational conditions.
(2) Installation
(a) Electrical Installations
Electrical installations for instrumentation and control systems are to be in
accordance with 7.6.
(b) Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control Systems
Piping systems for hydraulic and pneumatic controls are to be in
accordance with 7.4.
7.7.2 Components
(1) Environmental Considerations
All instrumentation control and safety system components, including alarm and
indicator devices, are to be designed for use in a marine environment, resistant to
corrosion, and capable of operating under all prevailing environmental
conditions. Each component is to be designed and tested for the extremes of
pressure and temperature that it can encounter in service.
(2) Suitability of Computer Based Equipment
Where safety related functions are performed by computer based equipment then
the equipment is to be tested in accordance with recognized standard
(3) Electrical Variations
Electrical and electronic components in AC systems are to be capable of
operating satisfactorily under normally occurring variations in voltage and
frequency. Unless otherwise stated, the variations from the rated value may be
taken from table 9.7-3 . DC system devices are to be capable of operating
satisfactorily at minus 15% voltage

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
321
Table 9.7-3 Electrical Variations
Quantity in Operations Permanent variation Transient Variation
Frequency
5% 10%(5s)
Voltage +6%,-10%
20%(1,5s)
(4) Loss of Power
Loss of control power (pneumatic, hydraulic or electric) to any device is not to
cause the system to go into an unsafe condition. Cause and effect matrices are to
demonstrate loss of control power effects.
7.7.3 Instruments
(1) Temperature
All temperature-sensing elements or devices are to be installed in separable
socket type thermowells, so that they can be removed without danger of pressure
or fluid release.
(2) Pressure
Pressure switches supplied as safety devices are to be equipped with test
connections to enable application of an external pressure source without
disturbing the switch installation. Pressure gauges and sensors are to be provided
with an isolation valve to permit the safe removal of the gauge without the need
to reduce the pressure in the system. The open or closed position of the valve is
to be readily identifiable from the position of the handle or stem..
(3) Level
Liquid or interface level gauges are to be installed to cover the operating range
and set points of level controllers or level switches. Direct viewing level gauges
in processing or combustible fluid service are to be of the heavy-duty flat glass
type and are to be equipped with self-closing valves at their ends. An equivalent
type of level gauge may also be acceptable.
7.7.4 Alarm Systems
(1) Characteristics
Alarm systems are to be of the self-monitoring type and designed so that a fault
in the alarm system is self-revealing or will cause it to fail to the alarmed
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
322
condition. Additionally, alarms are not to react to normal transient conditions or
false signals.
(2) Independence
Alarm systems are to be independent of control and safety systems, except that
common sensors will be acceptable for non-shutdown related systems.
(3) Visual and Audible Alarms
Alarms are to be both audible and visual, and are to be provided at the control
stations, as required in this Section. Alarms are to clearly identify the system and
service of the faulted system or process components. Visual alarms are to be
displayed in a distinguishable manner such that alarms for similar process
components or systems are grouped together, and the colors representing a
particular function or condition remain uniform.
Visual alarms are to flash when first activated. Audible alarms associated with
the process plant are to be of distinctive tone from other alarms such as fire
alarm, general alarm, gas detection, etc., and they are to be of sufficient loudness
to attract the attention of personnel on duty; for spaces of unusual high noise
levels, a beacon light or similar device, installed in a conspicuous place is to
supplement any of the audible alarms in such spaces; however, red light beacons
are only to be used for fire alarms. A fault in the visual alarm circuits is not to
affect the operation of the audible alarm circuits.
(4) Acknowledgement of Alarms
Alarms are to be acknowledged by manually changing the flashing display of the
incoming alarm to a steady display and by silencing the audible signal; the
steady state light display is to remain activated until the fault condition is
rectified.
Alarming of other faults that may occur during the acknowledgement process is
not to be suppressed by such action, and is to be alarmed and displayed
accordingly. Where a centralized control and monitoring station is provided, the
silencing of the audible alarm from an associated remote control station is not to
lead automatically to the silencing of the original alarm at the centralized control
and monitoring station.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
323

(5) Disconnection and Resumption of Alarm Functions
Alarm circuits may be temporarily disabled for maintenance purposes or during
initial plant start-up, provided such action is clearly indicated at the associated
station in control and, where such station is provided, at the centralized control
and monitoring station. However, such alarm is to be automatically re-activated
after a preset time period.
(6) Summary Alarms
When individual alarms are displayed and alarmed at a centralized control and
monitoring station, the visual alarms may be displayed and alarmed at other
associated remote control stations as summary alarms.
(7) Built-in Testing
Alarm systems are to be provided with effective means for testing all audible and
visual alarms and indicating lamps without disrupting the normal machinery or
system operation. Such means are to be fitted in the associated remote stations.
7.7.5 Control and Monitoring
(1) General
Display systems are to comply with 7.7.4 (1), (3) and (7).
(2) Loss of Signal
Loss of control signal from a field sensing device required to comply with this
standard is to initiate an alarm or cause a shutdown..
(3) Display of Parameters
Operating parameter displays are to be clear, concise, consistent and grouped
logically. Operating parameter displays are to be included in control stations.
(4) Logic Circuit Features
When logic circuits are used for sequential start-up or for operating individual
process components, indicators are to be provided at the control console to show
the successful completion of the sequence of operations by the logic-circuit and
start-up and operation of the process component.
If some particular step is not carried out during the sequence, the sequence is to
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
324
stop at this point, and such condition is to be alarmed at the control console or,
where provided, at the centralized control and monitoring station.
Feedback devices are to be employed in order to sense steps carried out during
the start-up sequence. Sequence operation is to stop upon lack of feedback
signal.
Where valves are employed in any start-up sequence, valve condition is to be
sensed as valve stem position and not as a function of control or power signal to
the valve..
(5) Overrides.
No condition of operation within normal ranges is to require the override of a
required protective device or function. Where shutdown functions are bypassed
during special operational modes described below, sensing devices are to be
arranged to continue to indicate the condition of each process variable.
In addition, an indicator for each function is to alert the operator that the
shutdown function is being bypassed. Provisions to override shutdown
functions may include the following:
(a) Calibration
To periodically test or calibrate field sensing device
(b) Out of Service
To take the vessel or other process component out of service.
(c) Start-up
To allow process conditions to stabilize, automatic bypass of shutdown
functions on start-up may be installed, provided the process variable condition
is indicated, and an automated device is fitted which will return the shutdown
function to operation once the normal processcondition has been attained. The
use of timers in association with this required automatic function will be
considered
7.7.6 Safety Systems
(1) General
Safety systems are to be of the fail-safe type and are to respond automatically to
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
325
fault conditions that may endanger the plant or safety of the crew. Unless
otherwise required in this Section or specially approved, this automatic action is
to cause the plant to take the least drastic action first, as appropriate, by reducing
its normal operating output or switching to a stand-by process component, and
last, by stopping it. Actuation is to result in audible and visual alarm.
(See 7.3.4 for number of safety levels required)
(2) Independence
Safety systems are to be completely independent of the control and alarm
systems so that a failure in one of these systems will not prevent the safety
system from operating.
(3) Activation
Each safety action is to be alarmed at the associated remote station. Where a
centralized control and monitoring station is fitted, individual alarms are to be
provided at that station; in which case, a summary alarm for the specific safety
system will be acceptable at other associated remote stations. When both an
alarm and a safety action are required for a specific failure condition the
operating points are to be arranged such that alarm is activated earlier..
(4) Resumption of Operation
Process components that are stopped as a result of a safety action are to be
manually reset before their operation is resumed..
(5) Override of Safety Provisions
Remote overrides are not to be provided for those safety actions specified in
other Sections of this Guide. For safety actions specified in 7.7.5(5), any
overrides of safety provisions are to be so arranged that they cannot go
unnoticed, and their activation and condition are to be alarmed and indicated at
the associated remote station.
The override is to be arranged to preclude inadvertent operation and is not to
deactivate alarms associated with safety provisions. The override mechanism to
disconnect safety provisions is to be fitted at the associated remote station,
except that where a centralized control and monitoring station is fitted, the
override mechanism may be fitted at the centralized station instead.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
326

(6) Adjustable Set-points
Where means are provided to the field adjustable set points, either locally or
remotely, positive indication of the value of the set point is to be clearly
identified at the control location.
7.7.7 Shutdown Systems
(1) General
Shutdown systems are to comply with the requirements of safety systems given
in 7.7.6, except that systems supplied in accordance with 7.8, as applicable, are
not to be automatically actuated and need not be fail safe.
(2) Safety Analysis
Where alarm and shutdown functions are required, a Safety Analysis Function
Evaluation (SAFE) Chart is to be provided for equipment packages with their
own control/shutdown panels, as well as for individual process components
protected by a common safety shutdown system.
(3) Emergency Shutdown
(a) General
Shutdown is to take place within 45 seconds or less as may be considered
necessary for the safety of the plant after activation of the ESD system at a
manual ESD station, or after detection of a trouble condition by an
automatic shutdown device.
Electric circuits essential to ESD that rely on the continued operation of the
cable for correct operation of the system are to be of the fire resisting type .
(b) Emergency Shutdown Automatic
See 7.3.4
(c) Emergency Shutdown Manual
See 7.3.5
All electrical circuits used in the manual ESD system are to be dedicated to
this purpose and hard wired.
7.7.8 relief valves
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
327
(1) General
Where spare relief valves are provided, the upstream block valve is to be locked
closed and the downstream block valve is to be locked open to prevent the relief
valve from being over-pressurized due to the leakage of the upstream block
valve. The practice of using check valves in lieu of downstream block valves is
not permitted. The upstream block valve is to have a full bore area equal to or
greater than the pressure relief valve inlet. Similarly, the downstream block valve
is to have a full bore area equal to or greater than the pressure relief valve outlet.
(2) Provisions for Testing
Provision is to be made for periodic testing of each relief valve without removing
it from the line or vessel. Where necessary, relief valves are to be individually
equipped with an inlet block or check valve and test connection so that an
external pressure source can be applied.
(3) Block Valve Locking Devices
Any block valve upstream or downstream of a relief valve or rupture disc is to be
equipped with a carseal or locking device to prevent the relief valve from being
isolated while in service.
7.7.9 Shutdown valves, blowdown valves, diverter valves
Automatically actuated shutdown, blowdown or diverter valves are to be equipped
with position indicators at the valve operating station, or be of a type that valve
position (open or closed) is externally obvious.
7.8 Fire Protection and Personnel Safety
7.8.1 Scope
The requirements of fire protection and personnel safety are appplicable for hydrocarbon
process systems on floating installlation. The fire protection and personnel safetyto
comply with this appendix . Fire Fighting Systems supplying services other than oil or
gas production are to be in accordance with TCVN 6259-5:2003 and TCVN 5314:2001,
depends on type of floating installation.
7.8.2 Fire Fighting Systems
7.8.2.1 Firewater Systems
Fixed water fire fighting systems are to be provided as follows:
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
328
(1) Piping
(a) General: Water fire fighting systems are to be capable of maintaining a
continuous supply in the event of damage to water piping. Piping is to be
arranged so that the supply of water could be from two different sources.
Isolation valves are to be provided such that damage to any part of the system
would result in the loss in use of the least possible number of hydrants, water
spray branches, or foam water supplies. In most facility arrangements, this
will require a loop type fire main. Connections of the primary and standby
pump supplies are to be as remote from each other as possible..
(b) Materials: Materials rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used in
firewater piping systems.
(c) Charging: The firewater distribution system may be maintained in a charged
or dry condition. Where a system is maintained dry, relief devices and
additional pipe bracing is to be considered to prevent damage to the piping
system due to water hammer when the system is charged. When plastic pipe
that passes only Level 3 fire endurance test is used, the firewater system
design is to be pressurized (wet main) or be permanently in a charged
condition..
(d) Piping Maintenance: The distribution system is to be maintained such that
internal and external corrosion of the piping is minimized. In areas where the
system is subject to freezing, steps are to be taken to prevent freezing. For
instance, drains, circulation loops or other means may be provided for cold
water protection. If drains are provided, they are to be located at the lowest
points in the system.
(2) Fire Pumps
(a) General:
There are to be at least two independently driven and self-priming fire pumps.
The fire pumps, together with their respective source of power, fuel supply,
electric cables, lighting, ventilation, piping and control valves, are to be
located such that a fire in any one location will not render both fire pumps
inoperable. One of the two pumps is to be designated as the primary fire
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
329
pump, and the other as the standby fire pump. At least one of the pumps is to
be diesel engine driven, unless the emergency power supply can supply the
load for an electric motor driven pump
(b) Capacity:
The primary and standby fire pumps are each to be capable of supplying the
maximum probable water demand for the facility. The maximum probable
water demand is the total water requirement for protection of the largest single
fire area plus two jets of firewater at a pressure of at least 3.5 kg/cm
2
(50 psi)
Multiple-pump installations will be considered in lieu of a single primary and
standby pump installation, provided they are arranged in such a manner that a
fire in one area would not reduce the available supply of firewater required to
handle that fire
A means is to be provided for periodic testing of each fire pump.
For a typical FPSO arrangement, the maximum probable water demand
includes the water supply to the water spray system for a single fire on the
production deck as discussed above, the water supply to the foam system on
the tanker deck below, plus two jets of firewater.
To determine the maximum probable water demand, the fire risk areas on the
production deck may be divided into fire zones. If a fire is being considered in
a single zone, the water supply for the water spray system is to be sufficient
for that zone and adjacent zones. The water spray system requirement may be
ignored for adjacent zones if these zones are separated by a firewall (no less
than A-60) or by an adequate distance between process components to justify
such zoning.
The system emergency shutdown and the equipment blowdown may be
considered a safe alternative to the water spray for low hydrocarbon liquid
inventory equipment such as the gas compressor units
(c) Operability and Control:
Pump(s) with sufficient capacity for process water spray systems is (are) to be
provided with automatic starting. In addition to the pump automatic starting
requirement, pump driver starters are to be provided with means for local and
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
330
remote operation from a permanently manned station or a fire control station.
Pump discharge control valves, used to separate the section of the firewater
service system and the fire pump(s), are to be fitted in an easily accessible
location outside of the pump space. Diesel driven fire pumps may be provided
with electrical or pneumatic starting and control systems.
(d) Pump Drivers:
Pump drivers may include diesel engines, natural gas engines, or electric
motors. Fuel tanks, fuel lines to engines, and power cables and starters for
electric motors, are to be protected against fire and mechanical damage
(e) Fuel Systems
Fuel systems are to comply with the requirements of 7.4.3. Fuel supplies for
diesel engines are to be sufficient for 18 hours operation.
(f) Lift Columns:
Water lift columns are to be encased in pipe for protection against wave action
and mechanical damage, and the protective pipe is to be securely attached to
the structure in order to lessen wave action damage. Corrosion allowance is to
be considered when the water lift column is designed. Where pipes for lift
columns pass through floating structures, penetrations are to be made by
approved methods to maintain the watertight integrity of the structure. Intake
strainers constructed of corrosion-resistant materials are to be fitted at the
suction end of the fire pumps water lift column

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
331

Figure 9.7-1 Fixed Installation Fire Pump Arrangement - Two-pump Scenario

Figure 9.7-2 Fixed Installation Fire Pump Arrangement Multiple-pump (Even Power)
Scenario

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
332

Figure 9.7-3 Fixed Installation Fire Pump Arrangement Multiple-pump (Uneven
Power) Scenario

Figure 9.7-4 Fire Pump Arrangement Multiple-pump Scenario for Oil Carrier
Converted to Offshore Installation
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
333
a) Single Fire with A-60 Fire Wall

b) Single Fire with an Adjacent Zone that has no Liquid Inventory

Figure 9.7-5 (a and b) Typical Fire Zones Arrangement on a Production Deck of a
FPSO
(3) Firewater Stations
(a) General
Firewater stations are to be located so that each station will be readily accessible in
the event of a fire. All materials that comprise the firewater station and the access
to firewater stations are to be of steel or equivalent material which would not be
rendered ineffective by heat.
(b) Arrangement
Firewater stations are to be located on the perimeter of process areas. The stations
and their arrangements are to provide at least two jets of water not emanating from
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
334
the same fire station to reach any part of the production facility that may be
exposed to fire.
The firewater stations are also to be arranged to provide protection against fire
damage or mechanical damage, operation free from interference by other
emergency activities, and effective coordination with other stations.
(c) Monitors and Nozzles
Monitors are to be sized for a minimum flow of 1,892 liters/min. at 7.3 kg/cm
2

(500 gpm at 100 psig).
Nozzles are to be adjustable from straight stream to full fog and to have a nozzle
diameter of at least 12 mm (0.5 in.).
Monitors and nozzles are to be of corrosion-resistant materials, and/or be protected
with a suitable coating to protect the equipment from the offshore environment.
All nozzles are to incorporate means for a shut-off..
(d) Hoses
Fire hoses located outside, in the production area, are to be of a noncollapsible
type mounted on reels. The hoses are to be of material resistant to oil and chemical
deterioration, mildew and rot, and exposure to the offshore environment. They are
to be sufficient in length to project a jet of water to any location in the areas where
they may be required to be used.
Each hose is to be provided with a nozzle and the necessary couplings. The
maximum length of hose is not to exceed 30 m (100 ft.).
For hoses located in the living quarters areas, machinery spaces, or other enclosed
areas, If required, Fire hoses are to be of a collapsible type.The maximum length
of hose is not to exceed 23 m
(4) Water Spray (Deluge) Systems for Process Equipment
(a) General
A fixed water spray system is to be installed for the process equipment. Water
spray systems are to be capable of being actuated both automatically by a fire
detection system and manually.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
335
(b) Materials
Materials rendered ineffective by heat are not to be used in A fixed water spray
system
(c) Process Equipment
Process equipment, including hydrocarbon vessels, heat exchangers, fired heaters
and other hydrocarbon handling systems, are to be protected with a water spray
system. The system is to be designed to provide a water density of 10.2
liters/min/m
2
of exposed surface area for uninsulated vessels, or 6.1 liters/min/m
2

of exposed surface area for insulated vessels.
Process equipment support structure, including saddles, skirt, legs, but not
secondary deck structural members, is to be protected with a water spray system
designed to provide a water density of 4.1 liters/min/m
2
. Alternatively, the use of
intumescent coatings may be acceptable in protecting the support structure,
provided the selection of the fire rating of the coating is based on the results from
a risk analysis and/or fire load calculation which must be reviewed and accepted
by VR. The condition (intactness) of the coatings will be the subject of surveyor
inspection during attendance of the unit following normal survey intervals
For gas-handling equipment, such as gas compressor skids, where the hydrocarbon
liquid inventory is kept minimal, a water spray system is not required if the
equipment is provided with an automatic blowdown upon the process shutdown
(d) Wellhead Areas
Wellheads with maximum shut-in tubing pressures exceeding 42 kg/cm
2
are to be
protected with a water spray system. The water spray system is to be designed to
provide a minimum water density of 20.4 liters/min/m
2
based on the protection of
wellheads, ESD valves, and critical structural components including the firewall.
(e) Turret Areas (Internal Turret)
Internal turrets with swivel pressure ratings exceeding 42 kg/cm
2
are to be
protected with a water spray system. Turret areas, including the swivel and its
associated equipment, are to be protected by a water spray system designed to
provide a minimum water density of 20.4 liters/min/m
2
.
(5) Foam Systems for Crude Storage Tanks
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
336
For floating installations with crude oil storage capabilities, a foam system is to be
provided for all crude storage tanks in accordance with TCVN 6259-5:2003. If
process equipment is located or supported above crude storage areas in such a
manner that a deck foam system may be obstructed by steel supporting members,
foam applicators or fixed systems may be considered as an alternative. Deck foam
system coverage in way of process equipment supports is to be no less effective than
other tank deck areas
7.8.2.2 Dry Chemical Systems
For production facilities with no liquid hydrocarbon storage capabilities and limited
hydrocarbon liquid retention in processing equipment, dry chemical hose reel units
may be used for fire fighting in lieu of firewater station required by section (3).
Design of the dry chemical systems is to be in accordance with recognized standard
(refer to NFPA Standard 17).
7.8.2.3 Fixed Fire Extinguishing Systems
A fixed fire fighting system is to be provided in each enclosed space and enclosed
skid module containing the following equipment:
i) Internal combustion machinery, including diesel and gas engines,
having a total power output of not less than 750 kW (1000 hp)
ii) Oil- or gas-fired boilers and other processes such as incinerators and
inert gas generators
iii) Oil fuel units. An oil fuel unit is defined as any equipment such as
pumps, filters and heaters, used for the preparation and delivery of fuel
oil to oil-fired boilers (including incinerators and inert gas generators),
internal combustion engines or gas turbines at a pressure of more than
1.8 bar (26 psi).
iv) Settling tanks for boilers
v) Gas compressors
vi) Transfer pumps for crude oil (storage facilities) and flammable liquid
with low flash point such as methanol.
(1) Gas Smothering Systems
(a) General
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
337
1) Storage:
Smothering medium storage location is to be outside of protected space. If gas
bottles are kept in an enclosed compartment, the storage space is not to be
used for purposes other than storing the bottles. The storage space is also to be
situated in a safe and readily accessible position, and be effectively ventilated
by a ventilation system independent of other spaces, including the protected
space.
2) Controls
Automatic release of fire-extinguishing medium for total flooding systems is
not permitted. Two separate controls are to be provided for releasing the
fireextinguishing medium into a protected space and to ensure the activities of
the alarm. One control is to be used to discharge the gas from its storage
containers. A second control is to be used for opening the valve of the piping,
which conveys the gas into the protected space. This requirement is not
applicable if the system is provided for a single space and the protected space
is relatively small (under 170 m
3
). Controls are to be grouped together to
provide complete actuation of the system from their location. The number of
release stations is to be limited to as few as possible, typically two, one at the
gas storage location and another outside of the protected space. For the one
outside of the protected space, it is to be located in proximity and along the
main escape route of the space.
3) Alarms
Means are to be provided for automatically giving audible warning of the
release of fire-extinguishing gas into any space to which personnel normally
have access. The alarm is to operate for at least a 20-second period before the
gas isreleased. Alarms may be pneumatically (by the extinguishing medium or
by air) or electrically operated. If electrically operated, the alarms are to be
supplied with power from the main and an emergency source of electrical
power. If pneumatically operated by air, the air supply is to be dry and clean
and the supply reservoir is to be atomically kept charged at all times, and is to
be fitted with a low-pressure alarm. The air supply may be taken from the
starting air receivers. Any stop valve fitted in the air supply line is to be
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
338
locked or sealed in the open position. Any electrical components associated
with the pneumatic system are to be powered from the main and an emergency
source of electrical power..
(b) Carbon Dioxide Systems
In addition to the above general requirements, the design philosophy of CO2
fire extinguishing systems is to be in compliance with Chapter II-2,
Regulations 5 of SOLAS 1974 and Amendments,
(2) Foam Systems
(a) Fixed High Expansion Foam Systems
Fixed high expansion foam systems are to be in accordance with Chapter II-2,
Regulation 9 of SOLAS 1974 and Amendments.
(b) Fixed Low Expansion Foam Systems
Fixed low expansion foam systems may be installed in machinery spaces in
addition to the required fixed fire extinguishing system. Fixed low expansion
foam systems are be in accordance with Chapter II-2, Regulation 8 of SOLAS
1974 and Amendments.
(3) Fixed Water Spray Systems
Fixed water spray systems are be in accordance with Chapter II-2, Regulation 10 of
SOLAS 1974 and Amendments.
7.8.2.4 Paint Lockers and Flammable Materials Storerooms
Paint lockers and flammable material storerooms located on production deck with decks
area more than 4 m2 are to be protected by a fixed fire extinguishing system. One of the
following systems may be considered:
(1) CO2 system designed for 40% of the gross volume of the space
(2) Dry powder system designed for at least 0.5 kg /m3 (0.03 lb/ft3)
(3) Water spray system designed for 5 liters/min/m2 (0.12 gpm/ft2). The water
spraying systems may be connected to the units fire main system.
(4) Systems other than those mentioned above may also be considered.
For Paint lockers and flammable material storerooms on floatng installation but not
located on production deck, appropriate requirements are given in TCVN 6259-5:2003
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
339
and TCVN 5314:2001 , depended on tpye of floating installation.
7.8.2.5 Fire fihgting system on helideck
Requirements for Fire fihgting system on helideck are given in TCVN 6259-5:2003
and TCVN 5314:2001 , depended on tpye of floating installation.
7.8.2.6 Emergency Control Station
At least two emergency control stations are to be provided. One of the stations is to be
located in a normally manned space such as the process control room. The other is to be
at a suitable location outside of the hazardous area. The emergency control stations are to
be provided with the following:
i) Manually operated switches for actuating the general alarm system
ii) An efficient means of communication with locations vital to the safety of the
installation
iii) Manual activation of all well and process system shutdowns
iv) Means for shutdown, either selectively or simultaneously, of the following
equipment, except for electrical equipment listed in 7.8.2.7 :
ventilating systems, except for prime movers,
main generator prime movers,
emergency generator prime movers.
7.8.2.7 Operation after Facility Total Shutdown
The following services are to be operable after a facilitys total shutdown:
(1) Emergency lighting required for evacuation from service/accommodation
spaces and machinery spaces to embarkation stations. The lighting is to be
provided for thirty minutes.
(2) General alarm
(3) Blowout preventer control system if fitted on the installations
(4) Public address system
(5) Distress and safety radio communications
All equipment in exterior locations which is capable of operation after activation of
the prime mover/ventilation shutdown system, is to be suitable for installation in
Zone 2 locations
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
340

7.8.2.8 Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers
Locations, types, and quantities of fire extinguishers provided for the production deck
area are to be in accordance with Table 9.7-4 and Table 9.7-5. For areas not specifically
addressed in these tables, requirements for fire extinguishers is to be followed recognized
standard.
Table 9.7-4 Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers
Classification
Type & size
Water
Liters
Foam
Liters
Carbon dioxide,
Kg
Dry chemical,
Kg
A-II 9,5 9,5 2,251
B-I 4,7 1,8 0,9
B-II 9,5 6,7 4,5
B-III 45 15,8 9,0
B-IV 76 22,52 13,5
B-V 152 452 22,52
C-I 1,8 0,9
C-II 6,7 4,5
C-III 15,8 9,0
C-IV 22,52 13,5
Note:
1 Must be approved as a Type A, B, and C extinguisher
2 For outside use only
Classification of Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers
Fire extinguishers are designated by types as follows:
A For fires in combustible materials, such as wood
B For fires in flammable liquids and greases
C For fires in electrical equipment
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
341
Fire extinguishers are designated by size, where size I is the smallest and size V is
the largest. Sizes I and II are portable extinguishers, and sizes III, IV and V are semi-
portable extinguishers.
Table 9.7-5 Classification and Placement of Portable and Semi-portable Extinguishers
Space Classification Quantity & location
Safety areas
Main control room C-I or C-II 2 near the exit (See Note 1 )
Stairway enclosure B-II Within 3m of each stairway on each
deck level
Corridors A-II 1 in each main corridor, not more than
45m apart
Lifeboat embarkation & lowering
stations
-- None required
Radio room C-I or C-II 2 near the exit (See Note 1)
Paint storerooms B-II outside each room in vicinity of exit
(See Note 2 )
Storerooms A-II 1 for every 232m
2
or fraction thereof,
located in vicinity of exits, either inside
or outside of spaces (See Note 2)
Workshop and similar spaces C-II 1 outside each space in vicinity of an
exit (See Note 2)
ENCLOSED MACHINERY SPACES
Gas/oil-fired boilers: spaces
containing gas/oil-fired boilers,
Either main or auxiliary, or their
fuel
oil units
B-II

B-V
2 required in each space

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
342
Internal combustion

or gas turbine machinery spaces
B-II

B-III
1 for every 745kW but not less than 2
nor more than 6 in each space
ENCLOSED AUXILIARY SPACES
Internal combustion engines or gas
turbines
B-II 1 outside the space containing engines or
turbines in vicinity of exit (See Note 2)
Electric emergency motors or gas
turbines
C-II 1 outside the space containing motors or
generators in vicinity of exit (See Note
2)
Steam drive auxiliary -- None required
Fuel tanks -- None required
MISCELLANEOUS AREAS
Cranes with internal combustion
engines
B-II 1 required in vicinity of crane cab exit
Production areas B-III or B-IV (See Note 3)
Open areas B-II

C-II
1 for every 3 internal combustion or gas
turbine engines
1 for every 2 electric generators and
motors of 3.7 kW or greater
Turret area for internal turret B-III or B-IV 1 for each turret area
CHEMICALS AND FUELS WITH FLASH POINT BELOW 60
o
C~140
o
F
Pump room B-II 1 required in vicinity of exit (See Note
4)
Storage tank area BV required on open deck capable of
reaching the storage tanks, tank vents,
and transfer connections (See Note 4)

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
343
NOTES:
1 One of which must be placed inside (dry chemical extinguishers not recommended
for these applications).
2 Vicinity is intended to mean within 1 meter (3 ft.).
3 One B-III or B-IV extinguisher is to be provided at every entrance to any escape
route, under no circumstances are two extinguishers to be placed more than 15.24 m
(50 ft.) apart.
4 For methanol, foam extinguishers may be considered if the extinguishers are of the
polar solvent type foam (alcohol-resistant type)
7.8.3 Fire and Gas Detection and Alarm Systems
7.8.3.1 Fire Detectors
Open or enclosed areas are to be provided with automatic fire detection such that all
potential fire outbreak points are monitored. The automatic fire detection system will
sound an alarm and initiate necessary ESD functions for the facility.
7.8.3.2 Gas Detectors
(1) Combustible Gases
In all enclosed and semi-enclosed areas that might accumulate combustible gases,
gas sensors of an explosion (flame)-proof type are to be . Sensors are also to be
provided at fresh air inlets to non-classified areas
(2) Hydrogen Sulfide
Where hydrogen sulfide gas may be present in the well fluid in excess of 20 ppm,
hydrogen sulfide gas detection systems are to be installed.
(3) Detector Set Points
The low and high gas alarm set points are to be 20% L.E.L. and 60% L.E.L. for
combustible gases, and 10 ppm and 50 ppm for hydrogen sulfide. ESD functions are
to be initiated upon high gas detection
7.8.3.3 Smoke Detectors
A smoke detection and alarm system is to be provided for control rooms, switchgear
rooms, and other areas where slow-developing fires might be expected.
7.8.3.4 Alarm Panel
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
344
A master fire and gas panel is to be provided to receive and process all fire and gas
detection signals. The panel is to be located in the central control room or other normally
manned non-classified area.
7.8.3.5 General Alarm
Means are to be provided for manually activating a general alarm system capable of
producing a distinctive audible sound in all areas of the facility. Alarm-actuating devices
are to be located at points of egress from accommodation areas, process areas, and
machinery spaces
7.8.4 Structural Fire Protection
7.8.4.1 General
The structural fire protection requirements are intended to address the need for fire
protection of boundaries separating new and/or existing areas/spaces onboard the
installation from the process facility equipment.
Existing spaces that do not share common boundaries with the process facility equipment
are to be treated based on the requirements that were in effect at the time of construction.
Newly built spaces that do not share common boundaries with the process facility
equipment and all portable/temporary living quarters are to comply with the latest Rule
requirements
7.8.4.2 Requirements
The minimum fire integrity of bulkheads and decks is to be as prescribed in Table 9.7-6
and Table 9.7-7:
Windows and sidescuttles that face the production facilities are to possess a fire rating
equivalent to the bulkheads in which they are fitted..

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
345
Table 9.7-6: Fire Integrity of Bulkheads Separating Adjacent Spaces/Areas
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
1) Control Stations
including Central
Process Control
Rooms
A-0d A-0

A-60

A-0

A-15

A-60

A-15

H-60 A-60

A-60

*

A-0

2) Corridors C

B-0

B-0
A-0
b

B-0

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*

B-0

3) Accommodation
Spaces
C

B-0
A-0
b

B-0

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*

C

4) Stairways B-0
A-0
b

B-0
A-0
b

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*
b
B-0
A-0
b

5) Service Spaces
(low risk)
C

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*

B-0

6)MachinerySpaces
of Category A
*a A-0
a
H-60 A-60

A-60

*

A-0

7) Other Machinery
Spaces
-

A-0
a,c
H-0 A-0

A-0

*

A-0

8) Process Areas,
Storage Tank
Areas, Wellhead/
manifold Areas
--- H-60 H-60 * H-60
9) Hazardous Areas - A-0 * A-0
10) Service Spaces
(high risk)

A-0
A-0c
*

A-0

11) Open Decks - *
12) Sanitary and
Similar Spaces
C
Notes: applicable for tables 9.7-6 and 9.7-7
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
346
C bulkheads constructed of non-combustible materials
Symbols from a to d and X are meaning as follows:
(a) If a space contains an emergency power source or components of an emergency
power source, and adjoins a space containing a units service generator or
components of a units service generator, the boundary bulkhead or deck between
those spaces is to be an A-60 class division.
(b) not use any type of structure described above and below
(c) Where spaces are of the same numerical category and subscript (c) appears in the
tables, a bulkhead or deck of the rating shown is only required when the adjacent
spaces are for a different purpose. For example, in category (10), a galley next to
another galley does not require a bulkhead, but a galley next to a paint room requires
an A-0 bulkhead.
(d) If the results of a Risk Analysis or Fire Load Analysis justify such, an A-60 fire
division may be used in lieu of an H-60 bulkhead.
* Where an asterisk appears in the tables, the division is to be of steel or equivalent
material, but is not required to be of an A-class standard. However, where a deck is
penetrated for the passage of electric cables, pipes, and vent ducts, such penetrations
are to be made tight to prevent the passage of flame and smoke.
Where an X appears in the table, the configuration is not allowed.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
347
Table 9.7-7 Fire Integrity of Decks Separating Adjacent Spaces/Areas
Space above
Space below
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
1) Control Stations including
Central Process Control Rooms
A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*

A-0

2) Corridors
A-0

*

*

A-0

*

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*

*

3) Accommodation Spaces
A-60

A-0

*

A-0

*

A-60

A-0

X A-0

A-0

*

*

4) Stairways
A-0

A-0

A-0

*

A-0

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*

A-0

5) Service Spaces
(low risk)
A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

*

A-60

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0

*

A-0

6) Machinery Spaces of
Category A
A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

A-60

*
a
A-60

H-60 A-
60

A-60

*

A-0

7) Other Machinery Spaces
A-15

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0
a
*
a
H-0 A-0

A-0

*

A-0

8) Process Areas, Storage
Tank Areas, wellhead/
manifold Areas
H-60 H-60 X H-
60
H-60 H-60 H-
60
--- --- H-60 --- H-60
9) Hazardous Areas
A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 -- - A-0 - A-0
10) Service Spaces (high risk)
A-60 A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

A-0

H-60 A-0

A-0
C
*

A-0

11) Open Decks
* * * * * * * -- - * * A-0
12) Sanitary and Similar
Spaces
A-0 A-0 *

A-0

*

A-0

A-0

H-60 A-0

* *

7.8.4.3 Wellhead Areas
A-0 firewalls are to be used to provide protection from potential uncontrolled flare front
wellheads with shut-in pressure exceeding 42 kg/cm2 (600 psi). These firewalls are
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
348
independent of the requirements for structural fire protection of spaces. The intent of
these firewalls is to provide protection for escape routes, temporary refuges, lifeboat
embarkation stations, fire pumps and potential fire hazards. The dimensions of the
firewall and distance from the wellhead are to be determined based on the results from
fire load calculations or other recognized method.
A-0 firewalls are to be used to provide protection from potential fire hazard of fired
vessels. These firewalls are independent of the requirements for structural fire protection
of spaces. The intent of these firewalls is to provide protection for escape routes,
temporary refuges, lifeboat embarkation stations, fire pumps and potential fire hazards.
The dimensions of the fire wall and distance from the direct fired heaters are to be
determined based on the results from fire load calculations or other recognized method.
7.8.4.5 Helideck
All helidecks are to be constructed of steel or other material which provides equivalent
structural and fire integrity properties to that of steel. Helidecks which form the deckhead
(roof) of the accommodations are to be insulated to an A-60 class standard. If the
helideck is located less than one (1) meter above the deckhouse top, the helideck is to be
constructed to an A class standard. Deckhouse roofs (below the helideck) are to have
no openings.
7.8.4.6 Ventilation
Ventilation are to be in accordance with the requirements contained in TCVN 6259:2003
and TCVN 5314:2001 .
7.8.4.7 Penetrations
All penetrations through bulkheads and decks are to have the same fire integrity as the
bulkhead and deck through which they penetrate.
7.8.4.8 Materials/Certification
All materials used in the construction of structural fire divisions and protection of the
penetrations are to be certified for the fire rating in which they are fitted. This includes
structural fire protection and thermal insulation, joiner bulkheads, doors, HVAC ducts,
flooring materials, windows, fire dampers, etc.
7.8.5 Muster Areas
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
349
7.8.5.1 General
All units are to have a designated muster station(s) were personnel can gather prior to
entering the lifeboats..
7.8.5.2 Materials
All materials that comprise the muster stations routes are to be of steel or equivalent
material.
7.8.5.3 Muster Stations
The muster station is to be of sufficient area to accommodate the number of personnel to
be gathered. The muster station is to be located in a safe location with respect to the
processing equipment. The muster station may be a meeting room inside the
accommodations or may be part of the lifeboat embarkation station..
7.8.6 Means of Escape
7.8.6.1 General
Arrangement of escape routes is to be in accordance with the requirements contained in
TCVN 6259:2003 and sections 7.8.6.2, 7.8.6.3 and 7.8.6.4.
7.8.6.2 Material
All materials that comprise the escape routes are to be of steel or equivalent material.
7.8.6.3 Marking and Lighting of Escape Routes
Escape route paths are to be properly identified and provided with adequate lighting
7.8.6.4 Escape Route Plan
An escape route plan is to be prominently displayed at various points of the facility.
Alternatively, this information may be included in the Fire Control or Fire/Safety Plan
7.8.7 Lifesaving Requirements
7.8.7.1 General
Lifesaving appliances and equipment are to be in accordance with the requirements
contained in TCVN 6259:2003 and TCVN 5319:2001 and requirements in section
7.8.7.2
7.8.7.2 Lifesaving Appliances and Equipment
(1) Work Vests
When personnel baskets are used to transfer personnel from the facility to work
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
350
boats, or vice versa, a work vest is to be provided and kept with the personnel
basket for each person riding in the basket..
(2) Breathing Apparatus
For operations involving hydrogen sulfide, each person expected on the facility
is to be provided with a self-contained breathing apparatus of an approved type
for escape purposes. The breathing apparatus for maintenance personnel is to
have a minimum of thirty (30) minutes air supply. A designated safe area with
proper supply of air is also to be provided and shown on the fire control/safety
plan.
7.8.7.3 Means of Embarkation
Each facility is to have means of embarkation to allow personnel to leave the facility in
an emergency. The means of embarkation are to consist of at least two (2) fixed ladders
or stairways, widely separated, and extending from the main and cellar decks to the water
line. The ladders or stairways will preferably be located near lifeboat-launching stations.
7.8.8 Personnel Safety Equipment and Safety Measures
7.8.8.1 Firemans Outfits
All firemans outfits and equipment are to be of an approved type, i.e., equipment is to
meet the requirements of SOLAS. The requirements below are in addition to those
required by the applicable Rules and/or Regulations:
(1) Fireman's Outfit
A minimum of two (2) sets of fire-fighting outfits and equipment is to be provided
and stowed in a suitable container.
The firemans outfits or sets of personal equipment are to be stored as to be easily
accessible and ready for use, and where more than one firemans outfit or more than
one set of personal equipment is carried, they are to be stored in widely separated
positions. One of the outfits should be readily accessible from the helicopter deck.
(2) Breathing Apparatus
A minimum of two (2) self-contained breathing apparatus of an approved type is to
be provided and stowed with the fireman's outfits. There is to be a sufficient number
of spare compressed air charges. The breathing apparatus is to have a minimum of
thirty (30) minutes air supply.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
351
7.8.8.2 Guard Rails
The perimeter of all open deck areas, walkways around accommodation spaces, catwalks
and openings, are to be protected with guardrails. The requirements for guard rails are
given in TCVN 6259-2:2003. In addition, Toe plates are to be provided at the base of all
guardrails.
7.8.8.3 Insulation of Hot Surfaces
(1) Personal Protection
All exposed surfaces with which personnel are likely to come in contact are to have
temperatures that do not exceed 71
o
C . If this can not be achieved, then the exposed
surfaces are to be insulated or shielded.
(2) Spillage Protection
Surfaces with temperatures in excess of 204C are to be protected from contact with
liquid hydrocarbon spillage and mist.
(3) Combustible Gases
Surfaces in excess of 482C are to be protected from contact with combustible gases
(4) Protection of Insulation
Insulation is to be protected from weather, oil spillage, mechanical wear, and
physical damage.
7.9 Survey During Construction and Commissioning
7.9.1 Construction Surveys
7.9.1.1 General
During construction of equipment components and assemblies for an Offshore
Production Facility, VR Surveyors are to have access to manufacturers or fabricators
facilities to witness construction and/or testing as required by the Rules. The
manufacturer/fabricator is to contact the VR Surveyor to make necessary arrangements to
examine equipment and components. If the VR Surveyor finds reason to recommend
repairs or additional surveys, notice will be immediately given to the Owner or his
Representative so that appropriate action may be taken.
7.9.1.2 Survey at Vendor's Shop
Survey requirements for equipment components and packaged units at vendor's shop are
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
352
summarized in Table 9.7-8.
Each vendor is required to have an effective quality system, which is to be verified by the
attending Surveyor prior to the start of fabrication.
7.9.1.3 Module Fabrication
Where equipment and components are assembled as skid mounted units or modules, the
Surveyor is to inspect the fit-up, piping and electrical connections, and to witness
pressure and function tests of the completed assembly in accordance with approved plans
7.9.1.4 Module Hook-up
Survey during hook up is to be carried out per approved procedures, and to include the
following where applicable:
(1) All piping hook up is to be verified for compliance with approved drawings and
procedures. All welds are to be visually inspected, and non-destructive testing (NDT)
carried out as required. Upon completion of hook up, the affected sections are to be
proven tight by hydrostatically testing to 1.5 times the design working pressure.
(2) All electrical hook up is to be verified for compliance with the approved drawings
and procedures. Proper support for all cables and proper sealing of cable entries to
equipment are to be verified. Upon completion of all hook up, the affected sections
of the equipment and cabling are to be insulation tested and proven in order. All
grounding is also to be verified in order.
(3) All instrumentation hook up is to be verified for compliance with the approved
drawings and procedures. All tubing supports are to be verified. Upon completion, all
systems are to be functionally tested and proven in order.
(4) All mechanical equipment hook up is to be verified for compliance with the approved
drawings and procedures, including the grounding of the equipment. Upon
completion, all equipment is to be functionally tested and proven in order.
7.9.2 Commissioning and Start-up Surveys
The start-up and commissioning of all hydrocarbon production systems are to be verified
by an attending VR Surveyor. The scope of the survey is to include the following:
7.9.2.1 The start-up and commissioning are to be in accordance with the approved start-up
and commissioning procedures.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
353
7.9.2.2 Verify personnel safety precautions to be taken during commissioning, which are to
include checks of operational readiness of all lifesaving, fire and gas detection, fire
fighting equipment, ESD systems, unobstructed escape routes, etc.
7.9.2.3 Verify establishment of communication procedures prior to commissioning.
7.9.2.4 Verify that emergency procedures are provided to deal with any contingencies such
as spillage, fire, and other hazards. Drills may have to be carried out to ensure the
readiness of these procedures.
7.9.2.5 Verify start-up and testing of all support utility systems, including main and
auxiliary sources for the process system, prior to commissioning..
7.9.2.6 Verify proper hook-up and testing of the entire process system, prior to
commissioning. This is to include testing of the entire system for leaks, of the
process control functions and the emergency shutdown system..
7.9.2.7 Verify purging of the entire production system of oxygen to an acceptable level,
prior to the introduction of hydrocarbons into the production system.
7.9.2.8 Verify the introduction of hydrocarbon into the process system, and the systems
capability to control the flow of the well affluent in the system in a stabilized
manner, without undue control upsets.
7.9.2.9 Verify the starting up of the flare system, if applicable, including precautions taken
to eliminate the risk of explosion or fire. The functional capability of the flare
system is to be verified.
7.9.2.10 Verify that the post-commissioned process system is in satisfactory functioning
order for a duration of at least 12 hours. Equipment required to be verified but not
used during the start-up and commissioning is to be identified for verification at the
next annual survey.
7.9.3 Start-up and Commissioning Manual
7.9.3.1 Functional Testing Procedures
During commissioning, the following systems are to be functionally tested in accordance
with approved procedures.
(1) Piping and Equipment
(a) Pressure/Leak Test
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
354
(b) Purging
(2) Utility Systems
(a) Power Generation (Main & Emergency)
(b) Process Support Facilities
(c) Instrument Air
(d) Cooling Water
(3) Fire Fighting and Safety Systems
(a) Fire Pumps
(b) Fixed Fire Fighting Systems
(c) Manual Equipment
(d) Lifesaving Equipment
(4) Detection and Alarm
(a) Fire Detection
(b) Gas Detection
(c) Fire and Gas Panel
(d) ESD Systems
(5) Process Systems
(a) Flare (pilot, ignition, snuffing and flare operational tests)
(b) Instrumentation and Control (wellhead control and process control system)
(c) Safety Shutdown Valves
(d) Process Components
7.9.3.2 Start-up Procedure
A step by step procedure is to be followed for the displacement of air or other fluid from
the process systems prior to start-up. The Surveyor is to be permitted access to suitable
vantage points to verify that the start-up procedures are satisfactorily accomplished. The
Surveyor is to observe the facilities operating at the initial production capacity for at least
a 12 hour period of uninterrupted normal operation. As applicable, the Surveyor is also to
observe the facilities operating at various capacities under various conditions.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
355
Table 9.7-8 Construction Survey
A B C D E
Hydrocarbon production process systems
Production Vessels x x x
Storage Tanks x x x
Heat Exchangers x x x
Fired Vessels x x x
Meters, Strainers, Filters and Other Fluid Conditioners
< 254 mm and 1,033 MPa x
> 254 mm or 1,033 MPa x x x
Pumps
< 7 kg/cm
2
(100 psi) and 757 liters/min x
> 7 kg/cm
2
(100 psi) or 757 liters/min x x
Compressors
< 686 kPa and 28,3 m
3
x
> 686 kPa and 28,3 m
3
x x
Flowlines and Manifolds x x x
Scraper Launchers/Receivers x x x
Packaged Process Units x x x x
Flare Systems x x
Subsea Systems x x x x
PROCESS SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Pressure Vessels
< 686 kPa and 93,3
o
C x
> 686 kPa or 93,3
o
C x x x
Heat Exchangers
< 686 kPa and 93,3
o
C x
< 686 kPa or 93,3
o
C x x x
Pumps x
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
356
A B C D E

Air Compressors x
Engines And Turbines
< 100 kW x
> 100 kW x x
Packaged Support Systems
< 686 kPa and 93,3 oC x
> 686 kPa or 93,3 oC x x x x
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Generators
< 100 kW x
> 100 kW x
Motors
< 100 kW x
> 100 kW x x
Switchboard x
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
Control Panels x
FIRE PROTECTION & SAFETY EOUIPMENT
Fire Pumps x
Alarm Panels x
Fire Extinguishing Systems (Components) x
COMPONENT SKID STRUCTURE x
Index:
A VR attendance at Vendor's shop to verify materials for compliance with
drawings/specification and their traceability record, and to review welding and NDT
specifications and procedures, and welder and NDT personnel qualification records..
B VR attendance at Vendor's shop during critical phases of fabrication such as fit-up,
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
357
alignment, and NDT examination.
C VR attendance at Vendor's shop to witness and report on pressure testing.
D VR attendance at Vendor's shop to witness and report on operational tests to insure
proper functioning of equipment.
E Exempt from VR Shop Inspection and Testing when Vendor or manufacturer has
provided acceptable documentation that component is designed, manufactured, and
tested in accordance with an applicable standard or code.
Notes:
Prior to the commencement of the construction surveys listed above, VR should have
completed the review of any documentation submitted for systems and components as
listed in 7.2.
Table 9.7-9 Specific Testing Requirements on construction
The following specific tests, if required, are to be witnessed by the VR Surveyor. Other
tests required by project specifications may also be witnessed and reported on by the
Surveyor
1 Pressure Vessels
(1) Each vessel is to be subjected to a hydrostatic test which at every point in the
vessel is at least equal to 1.5 times the maximum allowable working pressure.
(2) For pressure vessels that cannot be safely filled with water, a pneumatic test
equal to 1.25 times the maximum allowable working pressure is to be
performed.
2 Pumps
(1) Each pressure casing or pressure-retaining part is to be hydrostatically tested
with water at ambient temperature at a minimum of 1.5 times the maximum
allowable casing pressure.
(2) An operational test of the pump is to be performed to demonstrate satisfactory
performance.
3 Compressors
(1) Pressure and operational tests, identical to items 1 and 2 under Pumps, are to
be performed.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
358
(2) Each compressor intended for toxic or flammable gas service is to be
pressurized with an inert gas to the rated discharge pressure. The casing is to
be held at this pressure for a minimum of 30 minutes to check for gas leaks,
when subjected to a soap-bubble test or to another approved leak test.
4 Gas Turbines
(1) Pressure and operational tests, identical to items 1 and 2 under PUMPS, are to
be performed.
(2) See API Standard 616 for details of the mechanical running test.
5 Low Pressure Storage Tanks 0.011 to 1.05 kg/cm2
(1) Depending on the design of the tank, each storage tank is to be subjected to a
combination hydrostatic-pneumatic test, or a completely hydrostatic test.
(2) If the tank has not been designed to be filled with liquid to the tank, the tank is
filled with water to its high liquid design level, and a test pressure of 1.25
times, design pressure of the vapor space is applied to the vapor space.
(3) If the tank has been designed to be filled with liquid to the tank top, it is to be
hydrostatically tested with a pressure under the topmost point equal to 1.25
times the vapor space design pressure.
(4) Partial vacuum tests are to be conducted for tanks that are designed to
withstand the partial vacuum.
6 Atmospheric Storage Tanks
(1) Atmospheric storage tanks are to be hydrostatically tested to the maximum
liquid head to which the tank is likely to be subjected.
7 Piping Systems
(1) All piping systems are to be hydrostatically leak-tested prior to being placed
into service. The test pressure is to be 1.5 times the design pressure, or 3.5
kg/cm
2
(50 psig), whichever is greater.
(2) Where it is necessary to perform a pneumatic leak test, the test pressure is to
be 1.1 times the design pressure.
(3) All joints, including welds, are to be left uninsulated and exposed for
examination during leak testing.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
359
8 Electrical Systems (Generators & Motors)
(1) Check windings for dryness. It is recommended that space heating be operated
for a sufficient time prior to startup to assure dryness.
(2) Measurement of stator insulation resistance to the motor or generator frame is
to be made with an instrument applying a minimum of 600 volts across the
insulation. The suggested minimum insulation resistance is 2.0 meghoms; new
or rebuilt machines should provide at least 10 megohms in insulation
resistance readings.
(3) If generators are to be operated in parallel, check their phase rotation and the
synchronizing circuits for proper operation.
(4) Check motor starter overload relay heater elements for proper sizing.
(5) Check circuit breaker trip settings and fuse sizes.
(6) Jog motors to check for proper direction of rotation, but only after uncoupling
any loads which might be damaged by reverse rotation.
(7) Check motor-to-load and generator-to-prime mover alignments.
(8) Perform an insulation test of all electrical circuits to ensure that cables are not
damaged during installation.
(9) Ensure all components are properly grounded.
(10) After motors and generators are started, check for abnormal line currents,
vibration, and high bearing temperatures.
(11) Witness full-load heat run and saturation curve tests for the first unit of a
particular design.
9 Electrical Systems (Switchboards)
(1) Check all bus-bars for correct sizing and spacing.
(2) Check all components for correct voltage and current rating.
(3) Ensure all components are properly grounded.
(4) The various circuits of switchboard and panelboard assemblies are to be tested
by conducting dielectric strength test and insulation resistance measurements.
(5) Satisfactory tripping and operation of all relays, contactors and various safety
devices is to be demonstrated.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
360
10 Instrument and Control System
(1) Witness calibration of all pressure, level and temperature switches necessary
for functioning of controls in accordance with SAFE Charts.
(2) Review calibration records of all other instruments.
(3) Ensure all instruments used as pressure-retaining parts have correct pressure
ratings.
(4) Ensure all electrical/electronic instruments to be installed in a hazardous
location are suitable for that environment.
(5) Ensure all electrical/electronic instruments are properly grounded.
(6) Ensure all electrical circuits are installed in a 'fail safe' manner, that is all
circuits in normal working state are to be electrically continuous, and non-
continuous when in an abnormal state.
(7) Check logic functions with normal voltage applied to the control circuits, but
preferably with the power circuits not energized.
(8) Check each sensor and end device individually for proper operation before
incorporating them into the system.
7.10 Survey for Maintenance of Class
7.10.1 Annual Survey
At each Annual survey, the Surveyor is to verify the effectiveness of the following items
by visual examination and operational testing, as appropriate
(1) Examination of corrosion protection system
(2) Examination and testing of remote shutdown arrangements for fuel and ventilation
equipment
(3) Examination and testing of safety shutdown devices
(4) Examination and testing of Emergency Control Stations
(5) External examination and testing of safety relief valves
(6) External examination during operation of all machinery, pumps and pumping
arrangements, including valves, cocks and pipes
(7) Examination of fire hoses, nozzles, and spanners at each fire station
(8) Examination of fire protection system, including fire water pumps and related piping,
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
361
hydrants, control valves and alarm systems
(9) Examination of personnel protection, rescue and escape systems and devices,
including alarm devices and emergency lighting for escape routes, landing platforms,
etc.
(10) General examination of structure, piping, electrical systems and machinery
foundations for damage, deterioration, or hazard. (i.e., flare tower or ground flare,
production systems, power generation, etc.)
(11) Examination of enclosed hazardous areas, including ventilation, electric lighting,
electricfixtures and instrumentation
(12) Verification of the integrity of explosion-proof equipment
(13) Operational test of emergency lighting systems, navigation and obstruction lights
(14) External examination of boilers, separators, and similar process equipment and
associated relief valves
(15) Examination of steam-generating units.
7.10.2 Special Survey
The Special Survey is to include all items listed under the Annual Survey with the
following additions:
(1) Checking and weighing the contents of fixed fire protection systems, including the
capability and stability of storage foam liquids. Blowing through and ensuring that
piping for fixed fire extinguishing systems are not choked.
(2) Non-explosion proof electric motors are to be examined, including automatic power
disconnect to motors that are arranged to shut down in case of loss of ventilation.
(3) Gauging of pressure vessels, heat exchangers, and storage tanks, as considered
necessary
(4) Internal examination of pressure vessels, pumps, compressors, and safety relief
valves
(5) Random thickness gauging of process piping, as considered necessary Hydrostatic
testing of process related piping systems to 1.25 times the maximum allowable
working pressure as considered necessary.
(6) Lube oil examination record review
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
362
(7) Measurement of the insulation resistance of generators and motors
(8) Running of generators of under load, separately and in parallel
(9) Examination of cable runs, bus ducts, insulators, etc.
(10) Testing of circuit breakers, relays, etc.
(11)Examination of electrical equipment and circuits for possible damage or deterioration
(12) Vibration checks of rotating machinery
(13) Internal examination of steam and gas turbines, as considered necessary
(14) Testing of protective devices for engines, turbines, and gas compressors
(15) Internal examination of diesel engines and gas engines rated 1000 hp output and
above, as considered necessary
(16) Operational check of process control equipment.

TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
363
8 Appendix VIII: Underwater Inspection procedure
8.1 Introduction
At drydocking surveys, VR may consider to accept underwater inspection inlieu of
drydocking survey if underwater inspection,which is carried out by diver is equivalent to
drydocking survey.
The scope of underwater inspection is to be included all items, which are normally
carried out during drydocking. See requirements in section 1.5 part 8.
Following are the procedures and conditions under which a properly conducted
underwater inspection may be credited as a Drydocking Survey
8.2 Conditions
8.2.1 Limitations
Vessels 15 years of age or over will be subject to special consideration before being
permitted to have an underwater inspection.
Underwater inspection in lieu of Drydocking Survey may be restricted or limited where
there is record or indication of abnormal deterioration or damage to underwater body,
rudder or propeller..
8.2.2 Thickness Gauging and Nondestructive Testing
Underwater or internal thickness measurements of suspect areas may be required in
conjunction with the underwater inspection. Means for underwater nondestructive testing
may also be required for fracture detection.
Note: Thickness measurement of the underwater body, as required for Special Periodical
Survey, are to be taken in drydock in conjunction with visual inspection of the bottom
plating by the Surveyor.
8.2.3 Tailshaft Surveys
Tailshaft Surveys are to be dealt with in accordance with the applicable Rules
8.2.4 Plans and Data
Plans showing the following items are to be submitted to the attending Surveyor, together
with the proposed inspection procedures for review well in advance of the inspection.
(1) Location of bottom shell seams and butts (Shell Expansion), including any doublers,
straps, bottom plugs and all underwater openings.
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
364

(2) Marks or other means for orienting the diver and identifying photographs. These
should include specific areas of plating, (e.g., locations of bulkheads or tanks) sea
suction and discharge openings, propeller blades and rudder surfaces.
(3) Reference data and instructions to the diver for any necessary underwater operations
such as means of access to rudder bearings and for determining clearances of rudder
bearings or propeller shaft strut and stern bearings.
8.2.5 Underwater Conditions
The vessels bottom is to be sufficiently clean and the sea water clear enough to permit
meaningful examination and photography (if necessary) by the diver. Where possible, the
examination should be carried out in protected waters, preferably with weak tidal streams
and currents and with the floating unit at light draft. Overall or spot cleaning may be
required at the discretion of the attending Surveyor.
Sufficiently clean is taken to mean that sections of the underwater body, including flat
keel plating forward, amidships and aft, are cleaned to the extent that the Surveyor can
determine the condition of the plating, welding and the coating. Additional cleaning may
be necessary. Sea water clear enough means the underwater visial range is 5 m or more.
8.3 Physical Features
The following physical features are to be incorporated into the floating units design in
order to facilitate the underwater inspection. When verified, they will be noted in the
floating units records for reference at subsequent surveys
8.3.1 Stern Bearing
Means are to be provided for ascertaining that the seal assembly on oil-lubricated
bearings is intact and for verifying that the clearance or weardown of the stern bearing is
not excessive. For oillubricated bearings, this may only require review of operating
history and on board testing including accurate oil-loss records and a check of the oil for
contamination by sea water or white metal and/or oil sample reports. These
considerations are to be included in the proposals for underwater inspection procedures.
For wood or rubber bearings, an opening in the top of the rope guard and a suitable gauge
or wedge would be sufficient for checking the clearance by diver. Where there is any
doubt with oillubricated metal stern bearings, however, weardown could be checked by
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
365
external measurements or by use of the vessels wear-down gauge, where the gauge wells
are located outboard of the seals or the vessel can be tipped. For use of the wear-down
gauges, up-to-date records of the base depths are to be maintained onboard. Whenever
the stainless steel seal sleeve is renewed or machined, the base readings for the wear-
down gauge are to be re-established and noted in the vessels records and in the survey
report.
8.3.2 Rudder bearings
Means and access are to be provided for determining the condition and clearance of the
rudder bearings, and for verifying that all parts of the pintle and gudgeon assemblies are
intact and secure. This may require bolted access plates and a measuring arrangement.
8.3.3 Sea Suctions
Means are to be provided to enable the diver to confirm that the sea suction openings are
clear. Hinged sea suction grids would facilitate this operation..
8.3.4 Sea Valves
The sea valves and their attachment to sea chest are to be examined externally.
Nonmetallic expansion pieces in sea water cooling and circulating systems are to be
examined externally.
8.4 Procedures
8.4.1 Exposed Areas
An examination of the outside of the shell plating above the waterline and exposed
portions of appendages is to be carried out by the Surveyor. Means are to be provided to
enable the Surveyor to accomplish this visual inspection.
8.4.2 Underwater Areas
An examination of the entire vessel below the waterline is to be carried out by a certified
diver using closed-circuit television with two-way communication capable of being
monitored by the Surveyor, as required, or photographic documentation, or both,
depending on the age and type of vessel. This is to be supplemented by the divers report
describing and attesting to the conditions found. A copy of this divers report and
pertinent photographs are to be submitted to the attending Surveyor. Copies are also to be
retained onboard.
8.4.3 Damage Areas
TCVN 6474-9 : 2007
366
Damage areas are to be photographed. Internal examination or thickness gauging of such
locations may be necessary, as determined by the attending Surveyor. Means are to be
provided for orienting and identifying underwater surfaces in photographs, as noted in
8.2.4.

TCVN 6474-2007 Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TCVN 6474-2007 Eng

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TCVN 6474-2007 Eng

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TCVN NATIONAL STANDARD

TCVN 6474-1: 2007 TCVN 6474-9: 2007

for each load case are

= ESF for pitch amplitude

= ESF for roll amplitude

= ESF for vertical acceleration

= ESF for transverse acceleration

= ESF for longitudinal acceleration

= ESF for relative vertical motion at the forward perpendicular on

are reduction factors accounting for effect of the environmental

= distribution factor along the length of the floating unit

is as given in figure 9.4-5

= distribution factor around the girth of floating unit at location i.

= effective length of the tank

= 1.0 for tanks without deep ring webs

= 1 for tanks without a swash bulkhead

= 1 for boundary bulkheads that:

= height of deep bottom transverses measured from the tank bottom, m

= bottom height of the lowest openings in non-tight transverse bulkhead

correspond to for do = 0.7h.

are weighted coefficients, as given in Figure 9.4-10.

, Pitch -1 1 -1 1 0 0 -0,7 0,7 0 0

, Roll 0 0 0 0 1 -1 0,7 -0,7 0 0

You might also like